This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
X telle que tp\(p(K) = tp'1. La formule G(y) = (p(F(tp(y))) definit une fonction multivoque compacte s.c.s. et acyclique de / " dans lui-meme. D'apres le resultat cite d'Eilenberg et Montgomery, G a un point fixe yg, et il est facile de voir que
/ et verifiant g(Xx(x,y,t)) = X(g(x),g(y),t) quels que soient x, y et t. Soit Y un espace UC, et soit F une fonction multivoque compacte s.c.s. et acyclique de Y dans lui-meme. Fixons un sous-ensemble compact X de Y contenant U 6 y F(y). La propriete universelle de notre foncteur nous permet de trouver une fonction continue r de U(X) dans Y telle que r(x) = x pour tout x G X. La formule G(x) = F(r(x)) definit alors une fonction multivoque compacte s.c.s. et acyclique de U(X) dans X. Si XQ est un point fixe de G, il appartient a X et, comme r(xo) = XQ, c'est aussi un point fixe de F. La demonstration est done ramenee a la verification du cas particulier suivant: Proposition. Pour tout compact X, toute fonction multivoque compacte s.c.s. et acyclique de U(X) dans X a un point fixe.
Points fixes des fonctions multivoques
73
La demonstration de cette proposition se fera en deux etapes. Nous la prouverons d'abord pour les compacts metrisables en utilisant l'existence d'un compact Z et d'une fonction continue
X une fonction multivoque compacte s.c.s. et acyclique. Le lemme 1 nous fournit une
74
Robert Cauty
topologie r £ T(X) telle que F soit r-s.c.s. Fixons un compact Z et une fonction continue
X verifiant les conditions du lemme 2. Soit 0 be an arbitrary number, KE{UQ) be the ball of radius e around UQ in the space H™+n. A pseudosolution of the problem (1), (2) is defined to be a the function ue e H™+n minimizing the estimation error +), then ip £ V(MOi.P+) and P+MOiiP+¥ (R(A)), . Then Vt G Z a;(i) = ^ /02?r x^e1** dip and SS(^) = e i v x ( » . Thus the spectrum of 3 is the circle {elv : 0 < 0, J^(f) = J^(vr) = 0, e G (0; ^ ) . Then the function |J($,a;)| — 1 = — evsin(i/xi) satisfies the conditions (6), (7) (see, for instance, [4]). This means that the mapping $ preserves the measure of all unit balls and all balls with radius r £ An. Repeating the arguments from the proof of Theorem 2 we conclude that $ is one-to-one mapping. Besides, since | J ( $ , x ) | is not identically unit there exists a ball B e l " such that m($(B)) ^ m(B). This completes the proof of Theorem 3. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 0. Note that even in the case of Banach space E the condition (6) is weaker than the classical Cartan's condition (see [3]) requiring the operator x *-> g(x,-) be an isomorphism of the spaces E and E*. Proposition 11. If a quadratic form Z p , Q p is called continuously differentiable on A if there exists continuous F : A2 —> Q p such that f{x)-f{y) = {x-y)F{x,y) Z p : x — i >• x + a(x) is continuously differentiable isometry and Q p is absolutely continuous if for any e > 0 there exists 8 > 0 such that for arbitrary closed disjoint balls B1[x1,81],...,Bn[xn,8n], Uf=1B, C A we have: J27=id(Bi) < S implies Z p transposing digits at places 2k and 2k + 1, fc = 0,1,2,... in canonical representation of argument is absolutely continuous and nowhere differentiable in usual sense. Proof. Absolute continuity follows from the Lipshitz inequality \f(x) — f(y)\p P- A is locally cylindrical on A if any point a £ A has cylindrical neighborhood U C A such that for all p = oo,2,3,... equality t p (x) = ip(y), x,y eU implies Lp(ip(x)) = ip(
3. Resultats auxiliaires Un systeme projectif d'espaces topologiques sur un ensemble ordonne filtrant A sera note S = (Xa,pP,,A) (les Xa sont des espaces topologiques et, pour a < (3, p^ : Xp —» Xa est continue). Nous notons lim§ la limite projective de ce systeme et pa la projection de limS dans Xa. Si B est un sous-ensemble filtrant de A, nous notons S\B = (Xa,p^,B) le systeme obtenu en restreignant l'ensemble des indices a B. Si B est cofinal dans A, nous identifions naturellement lim(S|B) a limS. Un systeme projectif § = {Xa,p^, A) est appele un w-systeme projectif s'il verifie les conditions suivantes: (a) Tout sous-ensemble denombrable totalement ordonne de A a une borne superieure. (b) Pour tout sous-ensemble totalement ordonne B de A admettant une borne superieure /3, la fonction lim^gep^ : Xp —> lim(S|B) est un homeomorphisme. (c) Chaque Xa a une base denombrable. II est connu que tout compact X est la limite d'un w-systeme projectif (Xa,p^, A) tel que les projections pa : X —> Xa soient surjectives (voir la demonstration de la proposition 3.2.17 de [6]). Un sous-ensemble B d'un ensemble filtrant A est dit ferme si, pour tout sousensemble totalement ordonne C de B admettant une borne superieure dans A, cette borne superieure appartient a B. Si § = (Xa,p^,A) est un w-systeme projectif et si B est un sous-ensemble cofinal et ferme de A, alors S\B est aussi un w-systeme projectif. Soient (Xa,p^,A) et (Ya,q^,A) deux o;-systemes projectifs de compacts de limites X et Y respectivement, et soit F une fonction multivoque compacte s.c.s. et acyclique de X dans Y. Supposons les projections pa surjectives. Nous pouvons alors, pour tout a £ A, definir une fonction multivoque compacte Fa : Xa —> Ya par la formule
Fa(x) = qa(F(p-1(x))).
Points fixes des fonctions multivoques
75
Etant composee des fonctions s.c.s. qa, F et p " 1 , Fa est s.c.s.. Pour ce qui est de son acyclicite, nous avons le resultat suivant: Lemme 3. L'ensemble B des a G A tels que Fa soit acyclique est cofinal et ferine dans A. Demonstration. Soit M un sous-ensemble totalement ordonne de A admettant une borne superieure fi. Pour a < j3, nous avons p'^1(x) C Pal{Pa(x))' d'ou Qa(F/3(x)) ^ Fa(Pa(x)) P o u r tout x G Xp. Par consequent, pour tout x G X^, nous avons un systeme projectif (FQ(p£(ar)),g£\F0(p^{x)),M) et q^F^x)) C Fa(p£{x)) pour tout a G M. Affirmation 1. Pour tout x G XM, les fonctions q^F^x) : F)1(x) —> F a (p^(x)) representent F^(x) comme limite du systeme projectif (Fa(p£(x)),q%\Fp(pp(x)),M). En effet, d'apres (b), la limite de ce systeme projectif est un sous-ensemble de Yp. Puisque q£(F^(x)) C Fa(p£(x)) pour tout a G M, FM(x) est contenu dans cette limite. Si y G 1^ n'appartient pas a ^(a;), il y a, d'apres (b), un a G M tel que 1a(y) 4- 1a(Fn(x))- Puisque F^ est s.c.s., l'ensemble V des z G XM tels que F^(z) C ^M \ (ia)~1 (ia(y)) e s t u n voisinage de x. II existe done (3 £ M avec cc < /3 et un voisinage W de p£(z) dans Xp tels que (p^)" 1 !^) C F. Alors ( p ^ ) " 1 ^ ^ ^ ) ) C F , d'ou
Fetyix)) = q0(F(p/(p$(x)))) = q0{F{p-\{P^)-\P^x))))) C q0{F{p-\V))) = $q»(F(p-\V))) = q^F^V)) C q^ \ (qZrHqtty))) C Yp \ (gf)" 1 ^^)), ce qui entraine que g^(y) n'appaxtient pas a Fp(p^(x)) puisqu'il est contenu dans (
76
Robert Cauty
tif (Fai(p^i(x)),qa3i\Fa:j(p".(x))>^o) et le choix des a; garantit que les fonctions +1 x q"l \Fai+1(Pai+1( )) de ce systeme induisent des homomorphismes triviaux en cohomologie de Cech. La continuite de la cohomologie de Cech entraine alors que Hn(Fa(x), Q) = 0 pour tout n > 0 et tout x € Xa, done a appartient a B. Pour simplifier les notations dans la demonstration de l'affirmation 2, nous ferons les conventions suivantes. Pour j3 < 7 dans A, K C Yp et e G Hn(K, Q), nous notons (^)- 1 (e)(resp.^ 1 (e))l'imagedeedansff' l ((g^)- 1 (^),Q)(resp.jy™(g^ 1 (^),Q)) par rhomomorphisme induit par la fonction de K dans {q^)~l{K) (resp. q^l(K)) induite par gl (resp. qp). Pour L C K, nous noterons e|L l'image de e dans Hn(L, Q) par rhomomorphisme induit par l'inclusion de L dans K. Fixons une base denombrable O = {Oi}^Z1 de la topologie de Yao stable par reunion finie. Pour i > 1, soit Ui = {x G Xao \ Fao(x) C O,}. Puisque FQ,0 est s.c.s., Ui est ouvert, done est cr-compact puisque le compact Xao est metrisable. Soit Ui = Uj*Li Kli o u ^ / es * compact. Pour tout compact metrisable Z, Hn(Z, Q) est denombrable pour tout n > 0, done nous pouvons trouver une partition N = Ufci -^i de Pensemble des entiers et, pour tout i, une surjection k 1—> e^ de ATj sur
Ur=o^n(^,Q)Soit (i,j,k) un triplet d'entiers tel que k appartienne a Ni, et soit n tel que efc s Hn(Oi,Q). Nous allons montrer qu'il existe /? = f3(i,j,k) > 0.$ tel que, pour tout x € (Pao)~1(-ft'i'), (9ao)~1(efc)l^/3(x) = ^- Pour cela, remarquons d'abord que l'argument utilise pour prouver l'affirmation 1 montre aussi que, pour tout x G X, Fix) est la limite du systeme projectif (Fa(pa(x)),qP\Fp(pp(x)),A). Soit x € Pao(K-i); nous avons done Fao(pao(x)) C Oi- Puisque F{x) est acyclique, la continuite de la cohomologie de Cech entraine l'existence d'un (3X > ao tel que (
(1)
Les ouverts p~p~l(Wx) recouvrent le compact p^{Kl), done il existe Xi,... ,xs tels que p^(K{) C U ' = I Pjlr (w*r)- Fixons /? = /3(z,j, fc) tel que (3 > /3Xr pour 1 < r < s. Soit x € (PQ O )~ 1 (-?^/)- II existe x' £ X tel que pp(x') = x et 1 < r < s tel que i ' e P^ p (Wx P ). Alors p ^ J x ) = ppxr(x') e Wxr et ^ ^ ( ^ ( x ) ) C i ^ r ( * & > ) ) , d'ou, d'apres (1),
Puisque A est filtrant, la condition (a) entraine l'existence d'un a\ € A tel que /3(*>j\k) < Qi pour tout triplet d'indices (i,j,k) tel que k € TV;. Soit x G X a i et soit e G iJ ra (FQ, o (p"j(x)),Q). Puisque C est stable par reunion finie, tout voisinage de Fao(p%i(x)) dans Yao contient la fermeture d'un Ot contenant Fao(p2l(x)). La continuite de la cohomologie de Cech entraine done l'existence d'un i tel que Oi contienne -FQo(p™j(x)) et d'un element e' G Hn(O~,Q) tel que e = e'|F Qo (p"j(x)).
Points fixes des fonctions multivoques
77
II existe j tel que p"l(x) £ K\ et un k 6 AT* tel que e' = e^. L'image de e dans /f™(FQ1(a;),Q) par Fhomomorphisme induit par q^l\Fai{x)) est done egale a ( C ) " 1 ^ ) ! ^ ! ^ ) - S o i t 0 = ^(*.J. fc )- N o u s a v o n s Qo < P < «i et ^ ( F Q l ( z ) ) C ^(^(x)),d'ou = (^1)-1(0)|JFai(x)=0, et TafErmation 2 en resulte. Pour a < P et n > 1, nous notons p^n (resp. pa,n) l e prolongement naturel de p^ (resp. pQ) a Un(Xp) (resp. !7n(X)) ( p ^ = pf et p Q]1 = p Q ). Pour m < n, nous avons pf,m = p^jE/mpi^) (resp. p O i m = p Q , n |£/ m (A»). Puisque le foncteur Un commute aux limites projectives et preserve la surjectivite des fonctions, (Un(Xa),p^n,A) est un w-systeme projectif de limite Un(X) et les projections p QiK sont surjectives si les pa le sont. Soit F une fonction multivoque compacte s.c.s. de U(X) dans Y. Supposons les projections pa surjectives. Alors, pour a £ A et n > 1, la formule
FS{x) = qa(F(p-jn(x))) definit une fonction multivoque compacte s.c.s. de Un(Xa) dans Ya. Notant Uo(Xa) = 0, nous definissons alors une fonction multivoque Ga de U(Xa) dans Ya en posant
Ga{x) = F£(x)
si x G Un(Xa) \ Un-i{Xa), n > 1.
Lemme 4. L'ensemble des a & A tels que G a soit s.c.s. est cofinal dans A. Demonstration. Etant donne ao £ A, nous allons construire une suite croissante {a n }^L 0 d'elements de A et, pour tout n > 1, une base denombrable £>n = {-B^jga de Yan stable par reunion finie, de fagon que la condition suivante soit verifiee:
(*) Pour tout m
Um(Xan)\Um-i{Xan)
et tout i > 1, si Garl(paZ*n (x)) C SJj, alors il existe un voisinage V de x dans ^n(* Q n + 1 ) tel que qZ+1 (F^+l(y)) C Sj, pour tout yeV. Puisque Uo(XaQ) = 0, nous pouvons prendre a.\ = «o et pour Si n'importe quelle base denombrable stable par reunion finie de Yai. Soit n > 1 et supposons an et 23n construits. Pour l < m < n e t i > l , soit W(m,i) = {x G t/ m (X a n ) \ !7 m _i(X Qn )|G Qn (x) C Bln}. Puisque G Q n |U m {X a n )\U m -i{X a n ) = F™n\Um{Xan)\ Um-i(Xan) est s.c.s., W(m,i) est ouvert dans Um(Xan) \ Um-i(Xarl), done est acompact. Soit W(m,i) = U j l i K3m t, ou les K3m i sont compacts. Soit Oi = {x G C/n(X) | gari(.F(x)) c -B^}. Puisque F est s.c.s., Oi est ouvert dans Un(X). Puisque G a . ( i ) = -F™ (x) pour x G Um(XaJ \ Um-i(XaJ, la definition de F™n entraine que le compact p~^ niK^ t) \ Oi est disjoint de Um(X), done il existe (3 = f3(m, i,j) > a tel que
PsAPalJK^i)
\ Oi) n um{x0) = 0.
(2)
78
Robert Cauty
La condition (a) entraine l'existence d'un an+\ G A tel que an+\ > /3(m,i,j) quels que soient m, % et j . Soient m < n et x G Um(Xan+1) \ Um-i(Xan+l) tel que pa: + 1 (x) G [ / m ( X t t J \ Um-i(Xari). Si G Qn (p£;#(a:)) C #i, il existe j tel que PaZ~tn{x) € K3mi. Soit /3 = P(m,i,j). Puisque x appartient a Um(Xan+1), P^ {x) appartient a Um(Xg) et (2) entraine P£n(x)
c P}l{{pin,nr\Kltl)
n Um(X0)) c Ot.
II existe done un voisinage V de pa^x (x) dans Un(Xp) tel que p^^(V) C Oi- Pour 2/ € ( P ^ 1 ) " 1 ^ ) -
nous
avons
c gan(F(p^n(V))) c (fcJFfOO) c B ; , done la condition (*) est verifiee. Prenons pour Bn+i n'importe quelle base denombrable de Yan+1 stable par reunion finie. Pour prouver le lemme, il suffit, puisque «o etait arbitraire, de montrer que si a est la borne superieure de la suite {an}^L0, alors Ga est s.c.s. et, comme U(Xa) est la limite inductive de la suite croissante de compacts {Uk(Xa)}, il suffit pour cela de montrer que Ga\Uk(Xa) est s.c.s. pour tout k > 1. Fixons un entier k > 1, et soit x £ Uk(Xa). Soit m < k tel que x G Um(Xa) \ Um-i(Xa). Puisque Um-i(Xa) est ferme dans Uk{Xa), (b) entraine l'existence d'un n 0 > k tel que p^no,k(x) e Um(Xano) \ Um-i(Xano). Alors, pour n0 < n, nous avons ft^x) G Um(XaJ \ Um-!{XaJ, done G Qn (p2 nifc (x)) = ^ ( a : ) et G a ( i ) = F^*(a;). L'affirmation 1 s'applique a la fonction F™ et montre que Ga(x) est la limite du systeme projectif (G Qn (p^ n fe(x)),3°;|GQr{p^>A.(x)),n > n 0 ), done si M est un voisinage de Ga(x) dans Ya, il existe n > no et un voisinage N de G an (p2 n , fc (^)) dans Yan tel que GQ(x) C (q"n,k)~H^) C M. Puisque la base S n de Y"arl est stable par reunion finie, il existe i tel que G Qn (p^ k(x)) ^ ^n ^ -^rPuisque m < k < n et que P^ n + 1 ^(a;) appartient a Um(Xan+1), il existe d'apres (*) un voisinage V de p^n+uk(x) dans C/ n (^a n+1 ) tel que gS" +1 (^« n+1 (y)) C -B^ pour tout y dans V. Alors (p° fc)^1(^) ^ Uk(Xa) est un voisinage de x dans C/fc(XQ) et si y appartient a ce voisinage, alors
Ga(y) c F2{y) c ( ^ J - 1 ^ ^ ^ ^ , * ^ ) ) ) . d'ou
&n(Ga(y)) = C + 1 °C +1 (Ga(y)) c C+1(^n+1(PaB+1,it(y))) c B\ puisque p^n
l k
G V. Par consequent
Ga(y) c ( C ) " 1 ^ ) c (gSJ-1 W c M, ce qui montre que Ga\Uk{Xa)
est bien s.c.s. et acheve de prouver le lemme.
Points fixes des fonctions multivoques
79
4. Le cas general Soit X un compact, et soit F : U(X) —* X une fonction multivoque compacte s.c.s. et acyclique. Representons X comme limite d'un w-systeme projectif (Xa,p^,A) de compacts tels que les projections pa soient surjectives. Alors Un(X) est la limite de 1'w-systeme projectif (Un(X),p^n,A) et, pour a £ A, nous definissons une fonction multivoque compacte s.c.s. .F™ : Un(Xa) —> Xa par FZ(x)=pa(F(p^n(x))), et une fonction multivoque compacte Ga : U(Xa) —+ Xa par Ga(x) = F%{x) si x G J7n(Xa) \ t/ n _i(X a ), n > 1. Le lemme 3 entraine que l'ensemble An des a E A tels que F£ soit acyclique est cofinal et ferme dans A. D'apres la proposition 3.1.1 de [6], Ax = H^Li ^n est cofinal et ferme dans A. D'apres le lemme 4, l'ensemble B des a € Ax tels que G a soit s.c.s. est cofinal dans Ax, done dans A. Si a; S £?, alors GQ est une fonction multivoque compacte s.c.s. et acyclique de /7(XQ) dans Xa. Puisque Xa est metrisable, l'ensemble Pa des points fixes de Ga est non vide pour tout a G B et, comme Ga est s.c.s., P a est ferme dans U(Xa). Evidemment, Pa est contenu dans Xa. Soient a < /3 dans B et x S P/3. Puisque x appartient a JC^, nous avons Gp{x) = F^(x) done, puique p0al = pPa et paA = pa, Ga(p0a(x)) =FlM{x)) =
=pa{F{p-l^a{x)))^pa{F{p-0\x)))
P0aP0(F(pe1(x)))=pe(G0(x))BpP(x),
ce qui montre que p^(P^) C Pa. Nous obtenons done un systeme projectif de compacts (Pa,p^\P/3,B). Comme ces compacts sont non vides, leur limite P n'est pas vide, et est contenue dans la limite du systeme projectif {Xa,p^,B), qui est egale a X puisque B est cofinal dans A. Si y appartient a P, alors, en raisonnant comme dans la demonstration de l'affirmation 1, on constate que F(y) est la limite du systeme projectif {F^(pa{y)),p^\F^(pp(y)),B), et comme pa(y) appartient a Fa(Pa(y)) = Ga(pa(y)) pour tout a € B, nous avons y 6 F(y), done y est un point fixe de F et la proposition est prouvee. References 1. R. Cauty, Solution du probleme de point fixe de Schauder, Fund. Math. 170 (2001) 231-246. 2. R. Cauty, Le probleme de Schauder; correction et complement, Prepublication. 3. R. Cauty, Le theoreme de point fixe de Lefschetz-Hopf pour les compacts ULC, Prepublication. 4. S. Eilenberg and D. Montgomery, Fixed point theorems for multivalued transformations, Amer. J. Math. 68 (1946) 214-222.
80
Robert Cauty
5. S. Eilenberg and N. Steenrod, Foundations of algebraic topology. Princeton University Press, Princeton, 1952. 6. V.V. Fedorchuk et A. Chigogidze, Retractes absolus et varietes de dimension infinie. Nauka, Moscou, 1992 (en Russe). 7. E.H. Spanier, Algebraic topology. Me Graw Hill, New York, 1996.
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
81
Almost Periodic Mappings to Complex Manifolds Sergej Favorov and Natalia Parfyonova Karazin Kharkiv National University, Department of Mechanics and Mathematics, Kharkiv, Ukraine Key words: Almost periodic holomorphic mappings, meromorphic functions 2000 MSC: 32A20 A continuous mapping F of a tube TK = {z = x + iy : x £ Rm, y G K C ]Rm} to a metric space X is almost periodic if the family {F(z + i)}tgRm of shifts along Mm is a relatively compact set with respect to the topology of the uniform convergence
onTK. Further, let X be a complex manifold, and F be a holomorphic mapping of a tube TQ = {z = x + iy : x e Mm, y e 0 } , with the convex open base fl C Mm, to X. We will say that F is almost periodic if the restriction of i71 to each tube TK, with the compact base K C O, is almost periodic. For X = C we obtain the well-known class of holomorphic almost periodic functions; for X = Cq the corresponding class was being studied in [3], [7], [8]; for X = CP, we get the class of meromorphic almost periodic functions that was being studied in [4], [10], [5]; the class of holomorphic almost periodic curves, corresponding to the case X = CP 9 , was being studied in [6]. The following theorem is well known: Theorem B (H. Bohr [2]). If a holomorphic bounded function on a strip is almost periodic on some straight line in this strip, then this function is almost periodic on the whole strip. This theorem was extended to holomorphic functions on a tube domain in [11]; besides usual uniform metric, various integral metric were being studied there. The direct generalization of Theorem B to complex manifold is not valid: Email address: [email protected] (Natalia Parfyonova).
82
Sergej Favorov, Natalia Parfyonova
Example. Let f(z) be the quotient of two periodic functions sin y/2z and sin z. It is clear that the restriction of f(z) to any straight line {z = x + iyo : x G R}, yo ^ 0, is almost periodic on this line. Besides, f(z) is bounded as a mapping to compact manifold CP. Nevertheless, zeros and poles of f(z) are not separated on the axis z = x e l , therefore f(z) is not almost periodic on any substrip containing the real axis ( see [4]). In order to give the right version of Theorem B, we need the following proposition. Proposition. If K is compact subset ofM.m, then an almost periodic mapping F of TK to a metric space X is uniformly continuous and F(TK) is a relatively compact subset of X.
Proof. Let
teRm.
It is easy to prove that ip(t) is an almost periodic function on R m , therefore the function
for each t,t' € UnW . Using the obvious inequality V{t-t)<\
+
t))<e.
Therefore the function F(T,
y) =
lim x—>T,
F(x + iy)
xGM™
is well-defined and continuously maps the compact set B x K to X. Since F(x, y) = F(x + iy) for x € M.m, we obtain all the statements of our proposition. Note that a bounded holomorphic function on a tube domain is uniformly continuous on every subtube with the compact base, but bounded holomorphic mappings, in general, have not this property. It motivates the following result is natural. Theorem. Let F be a holomorphic mapping of TQ to a complex manifold X such that for every compact subset K C il the mapping F is uniformly continuous on TK and F(TK) is a relatively compact subset of X. If the restriction of F(z) to some hyperplane Rm +iy' is almost periodic, then F(z) is an almost periodic mapping of Tn to X. Corollary. Let F be a holomorphic mapping form TQ to a compact complex manifold X such that F is uniformly continuous on TK for every compact set K C f2. If
Almost Periodic Mappings to Complex Manifolds
83
the restriction of F(z) to some hyperplane R m + iy' is almost periodic, then F(z) is an almost periodic mapping ofTn to X. Proof the Theorem. Take an arbitrary sequence {£„} C R m . Since the function F(z) is uniformly continuous, the family {F(z + tn} is equicontinuous on each compact set S C Tn. Further, it follows from the condition of the Theorem that the union of all the images of S under mappings of this family is contained compact subset of X. Therefore, passing on to a subsequence if necessary, we may assume that the sequence {F(z + tn)} converges to a holomorphic mapping G(z) uniformly on every compact subset of TQ. It easy to see that the mapping G(z) is bounded and uniformly continuous on every tube TK with the compact base K C ft. Let us prove that this convergence is uniform on every TK • Assume the contrary. Then we get d(F(zn+tn),G{zn))>eo>0
(1)
for some sequence zn = xn + iyn € TK1, where K' is some compact subset of f2. Replacing sequence by a subsequence if necessary, we may assume that the mappings G(xn + z) converge to a holomorphic mapping H(z), and the mappings F(z+xn+tn) converge to a holomorphic mapping H(z) uniformly on every compact subsets of Tfi. We may also assume that yn —> yo £ K' • Using (1) we get \H(iyo)-H(iyo))\>eo. Since the mapping F(x + iyl) of R m to X is almost periodic, we may assume that a subsequence of the mappings F{x + tn + iy') converges to G(x + iy') uniformly in x £ R m . Therefore the sequences of mappings F(x+xn+tn+iy') and G(x+xn+iy') have the same limit, i. e., H{x + iy') = H(x + iy') for all i e R m . Since H(z), H(z) are holomorphic mappings, we get H(x+iy') = H(x+iy') on TQ. This contradiction proves the Theorem. References 1. Ch. Berg, Introduction to the almost periodic functions of Bohr, Proceedings of a symposium held in Copenhagen, April 24-25 (1987), 15-24. 2. H. Bohr, Ueber analytische fastperiodische Funktionen, Math. Ann. 103 (1930) 1-14. 3. S.Ju. Favorov, A.Ju. Rashkovskii, L.I. Ronkin, Almost periodic divisors in a strip, Journal D'analyse Mathematique 74 (1998) 325-345. 4. N.D. Parfyonova, S.Yu. Favorov, Meromorphic almost periodic functions, Mathematychni Studii 13 (2000) 190-198. 5. N.D. Parfyonova, Meromorphic almost periodic functions and their continuous extension on the Bohr's compact, Vestnik Kharkovskogo Universiteta 542 (2002) 73-84. (In Russian). 6. N.D. Parfyonova, Holomorphic almost periodic mappings into complex manifolds, Mat. Fiz. Anal. Geom. 9 (2002) 294-305. (In Russian).
84
Sergej Favorov, Natalia Parfyonova
7. A.Yu. Rashkovskii, Monge-Ampere operators and Jessen functions of holomorphic almost periodic mappings. Mat. Fiz. Anal. Geom. 5 (1998) 274296. 8. A.Yu. Rashkovskii, Flows associated with holomorphic almost periodic functions, Mat. Fiz. Anal. Geom. 2 (2) (1995) 150-169. 9. L.I. Ronkin, Jessens' theorems for holomorphic almost periodic functions in tube domains, Sib. Math. J. 28 (3) (1987) 199-204. (In Russian). 10. F. Sunyer i Balaguer, Una nova generalitzacio de les functions gairebeperiodiques, Inst.d'Estudis Catalans, Arxius de la seccio de ciencies XVII, 1949, 3-46. 11. O.I. Udodova, Holomorphic almost periodic functions in tube donains,. Vestnik Kharkovskogo Universiteta 542 (2002) 96-105.
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
85
Some new differential equations of the first-order in the spaces M(l,3) x R(u) and M(l,4) x R(u) with given symmetry groups Vasyl Fedorchuk a and Volodymyr Fedorchuk b a
Pedagogical Academy, Institute of Mathematics, 2 Podchorazych Street, 30-084, Krakow, Poland; Pidstryhach Institute of Applied Problems of Mechanics and Mathematics of NAS of Ukraine, 3b Naukova Street, 79-601, Lviv, Ukraine; b Ivan Franko Lviv National University, 1 Universytetska Street, Lviv, 79000, Ukraine
Abstract We present some new first-order differential equations invariant under continuous subgroups of the generalized Poincare group P(l,4) and defined in the spaces M(l,3)xR{u) and Af(l,4) x i?(u). Key words: Lie groups, Lie algebras, subgroup structure, differential invariants, differential equations 2000 MSC: 58J70, 35A30, 59D19
1. Introduction The mathematical modeling of various natural processes very often requires that some symmetry properties of the processes considered be taken into account. This leads to mathematical models with non-trivial symmetry groups. In many cases this type of models can be expressed in the form of (linear or nonlinear) differential equations with non-trivial symmetry properties in the spaces of different dimensions. It is well known that among equations, important for theoretical and mathematical physics, there are also ones which have nontrivial symmetry groups. For example, in the space M ( l , 3) x R(u) we have the Eikonal equation, the Euler-Lagrange-
86
Vasyl Fedorchuk, Volodymyr Fedorchuk
Born-Infeld equation and homogeneous and inhomogeneous Monge-Ampere equations. In the space M(l,4) x R(u) we have the linear and nonlinear wave equations and Dirac equation. Here, and in what follows, R(u) is the number axis of the dependent variable u. These equations are invariant under the generalized Poincare group P(l,4) (see, for example, [7, 11-16]). The group P(l,4) is the group of rotations and translations of the five-dimensional Minkowski space M(l, 4). This group has many applications in theoretical and mathematical physics [7, 11, 16]. The group P(l,4) has many subgroups used in theoretical physics [3-6, 9]. Among these subgroups there are the Poincare group P(l,3) and the extended Galilei group G(l,3) (see also [10]). Thus, the results obtained with the help of the subgroup structure of the group P ( l , 4) will be useful in relativistic and nonrelativistic physics. Therefore, it is important from the physical and mathematical points of view that we are able to construct, in the spaces M(l,3) x R(u) and M(l, 4) x R(u), new differential equations invariant under continuous subgroups of the generalized Poincare group P(l,4). The papers [1,2] are devoted to the construction of the first-order differential equations invariant under splitting subgroups of the group P(l,4), defined in the spaces M(l,3) x R(u) and M(l,4) x R(u). In the present paper we continue to study this type of equations. We concentrate our attention on the first-order differential equations invariant under continuous subgroups of the group P(l,4), defined in the spaces M(l,3)xR(u) and M ( l , 4 ) x R(u). We give the number of all first-order differential equations of a certain form (in these spaces) which are invariant under splitting subgroups of the group P ( l , 4) as well as some new obtained equations. Recently, we have constructed the first-order differential equations (in the spaces M(l,3) x R(u) and M(l,4) x R(u) ) which are invariant under non-splitting subgroups of the group P(l,4) for the majority of these subgroups. Our paper is organized as follows. In the first section we introduce some notation and results concerning the Lie algebra of the group P(l,4) which we use in the following. Sections 3 and 4 present our main results.
2. The Lie algebra of the group P ( l , 4) and its non-conjugate subalgebras The Lie algebra of the group P(l,4) is given by the 15 basis elements M^v = -Mvii (fj,,v = 0,1,2,3,4) and P^ (fj, = 0,1,2,3,4), which satisfy the commutation relations
[/*, P'v] = 0,
[Mlv, Pi] = g^P'v -
9vaPl,
[ M ^ , M'pa] = gpPM'va + gvaM'w - g^M'^
-
g^M'vp,
Some new differential equations with given symmetry groups
87
where g00 = - 0 n = -322 = -333 = ~344 = 1, g^ = 0, if fj, ^ v. Here, and in what follows, M'^ = iM^v. Below, we will use the following basis elements: G = M'i0,
Li = A^2)
Pa = M'Aa~M'a0, X0 = \(P^-Pi),
L2 = -M'3l,
Ca = M'ia + M^0,
Xk = P'k
(k= 1,2,3),
L3 = M21, (a = 1,2,3), XA = \ ( i * + Pi).
For the study of the subgroup structure of the group P(l, 4) we used the method proposed in [20]. Continuous subgroups of the group P(l,4) have been described in [3-6, 9]. From the results obtained (see also [10]) it follows, in particular, that the Lie algebra of the group P(l,4) contains as subalgebras the Lie algebra of the Poincare group P(l,3) and the Lie algebra of the extended Galilei group G(l,3).
3. The first-order differential equations in the space iW(l,3) X R(u) The group P(l, 4) acts on M(l, 3) x R(u) (i.e. on the Cartesian product of the four-dimensional Minkowski space (of the independent variables xo,xi,X2,X3) and the number axis of the dependent variable u). The group P(l,4) usually acts on M(l, 3) x R(u) as a group generated by translations and rotations of this space. Let X=
^i(x,u)—+r,{x,u)i=0
be one of the basis infinitesimal operators. The first prolongation of X has the form
where w» = ^ , i = 0,1,2,3. Now, a function J{x,u^) is a first-order differential invariant if X (1) - J(x,w(1)) = 0. Here u^ = (U,UQ,UI, «2,«3) is an element of the first prolongation R(u)^\ The results obtained in [12-14] enable us to use the subgroup structure [3-6, 9] of the generalized Poincare group P(l,4) in order to construct the first-order differential equations invariant under continuous subgroups of the group P(l,4), defined in the space M(l,3) x R(u). Let us consider the following representation of the Lie algebra of the group P(l,4):
88
Vasyl Fedorchuk, Volodymyr Fedorchuk
P'-A P i=
'
P'--A-
P'--A-
~~L' M'lu/ = -(xllP'u-xl/P'll),x4
P'--A-
= u.
More details about this representation can be found in [12-15]. The considered equations can be written in the following form (see, for example [17-19,21]): F(J1,J2,...,Jt) = 0, (1) where F is an arbitrary smooth function of its arguments, {Ji, J2,..., Jt] is a functional basis of the first-order differential invariants of continuous subgroups of the group P ( l , 4 ) . In the construction of the differential equations with non-trivial symmetry groups it has turned out that different non-conjugate subalgebras can have the same functional basis of the first-order differential invariants. Consequently, there is no oneto-one correspondence between non-conjugate subalgebras of the Lie algebra of the group P(l,4) and corresponding differential equations. Definition 1. We call two subalgebras L1 and L2 of the Lie algebra of the group P(l, 4) equivalent if they have the same functional basis of the first-order differential invariants. It is possible to prove that the relation of equivalence of subalgebras L1 and I? given by Definition 1 is the set-theoretical equivalence relation. With respect to this equivalence relation, all non-conjugate subalgebras of the Lie algebra of the group P ( l , 4 ) split into classes of equivalent subalgebras. Each two different classes have different functional bases of the first-order differential invariants. Definition 2. We call two classes of the first-order differential equations of the form (1) equivalent if functional bases corresponding to them belong to the equivalent subalgebras. First, we give the results obtained with the help of the splitting subgroups of the group P(l,4). One of the results in this section can be formulated as follows. Proposition 1. In the space M ( l , 3) x R(u), there exist 242 non-equivalent classes of the first-order differential equations of the form (1) which are invariant under the splitting subgroups of the group P(l,4). This proposition has been proved with use of: - the list of the splitting subalgebras of the Lie algebra of the group P(l,4) [8]; - the general ranks of the matrices which contain coordinates of the basis elements of the subalgebras of the considered Lie algebra; - theorem on the number of invariants of the Lie group of point transformations (see, for example, [18, 19]).
Some new differential equations with given symmetry groups
89
The differential first-order equations in the space M(l,3) x R(u) which are invariant under splitting subgroups of the group P(l,4) are constructed. Some of the results obtained have been presented in [ 2 ]. Since we cannot present all the results obtained here, in this section we only give some of the new results which cannot be found in [ 2 ]. Below, for some splitting subgroups of the group P ( l , 4), we write the basis elements of its Lie algebras and corresponding arguments J i , J2,..., Jt of the function F. 1.
J2=x2,
J
6 = ^ , J7 = ^ , 2. (G, P3), Jl=XU
J2=X2,
J4 = (xl-u2)l/2,
h=x3, J
8 = ;^r±i,
J5 =
(xo+u)2^j,
uM = ^ , /i = 0, 1, 2, 3;
J3 = (xg - x\ - M2)1/2,
Ji=^^Ui,
3. (G, L3, X4>, J1=X3,
J 2 = (X2+X2)V2,
J 3=
f t S f
^ ,
J 4=
( x o + U
)(^,
4. (G, P ^ , X 4 ), Jl=X3, T _
^2 = f^fW3,
u%-u\-u\-\
J 3 = X 1 + ^±f« 1 ,
J4=a.2
+
2a±HU2)
.
5. {L3 + 6G, P l 5 P2, P3, Xu X2, Xi, 6 > 0 ) , ^1 = x 3 + ^ « 3 , J2 = («§ - «? - « | - u§ - l) ( ^ ± f ) 2 ; 6. (G, P l 5 P 2 ) P 3 ) X i , X2, X3, X4),
J^iul-ul-ul-ul-l)^)2 ; 7. (Li, L 2 , L 3 , P i , P 2 , P 3 , X i , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 ), Jl = a;o+ M,
j 2= "i + ^;t?i" 0 + 1 ) ;
8. (G, L i , L2; L%, Pi, P2, P3, X\, X2, X3, X4),
Jx = {ul-ul-ul-ul-l){^)2
.
Now, we present results obtained with the help of the non-splitting subgroups of the group P ( l , 4 ) . We have constructed classes of the first-order differential equations (in the space M(l,3) x R(u) ) which are invariant under non-splitting subgroups of the group P(l, 4) for the majority of these subgroups. These classes of equations can be written in the form (1), where {J\, J2,..., Jt} is a functional basis of the first-order
90
Vasyl Fedorchuk, Volodymyr Fedorchuk
differential invariants of the non-splitting subgroups of the group P ( l , 4 ) . Here, we only write some of the new results obtained. Below, for some non-splitting subgroups of the group P ( l , 4), we give the basis elements of their respective Lie algebras and corresponding arguments J\, J2,..., Jt of the function F. 1. (L3 - XA, P3), J2 = {x\ + xl)1/2,
Ji=xo+u, T J i
X3 ~
1
XQ+U
U3
" " " Uo + 1 '
T 5
J3 = x\ - x\ - u2 + (XQ + u) arctan ^ ,
X1V.2—X2U1 ~
^7 = ^ +^ , «^^ 2. {G + a3X3, Pu P2, a 3 < 0 ) , «^i = ^3 — c-3 l n ( x 0 + u),
J5 = x2 + (x0 + w)^tr,
J __ U1+U2 6
Iltll+I2tl2'
)
~ ~ (uo + 1 ) 2 '
/ x = 0,l,2)3; — W2)1/2,
J 2 = (XQ —X\—X\
^=
^
3
;
3. (G + a3X3, L3, Pi, P2, a 3 < 0 ) ,
J^Cxg-xf-xl-ti2)1^,
J2= ( x o + W ) - ^ T , / \2 / \2 J3 = x3 - a3 ln(a;o + u), J4 = [Xi + f^y«iJ + ^2 + ^ f i ^ J ,
J5 = "3-y- 1 ;
4. (L 3 , P x + X 2 , p 2 - X L P 3 + /i 3 X 3 , X4>, Ji=x o + u,
J2=x3 + (x0 + u ) ^
I
- ^ ,
Jz = (xi + ^ x + ^ f « i ) 2 + (x2 - - ^ + ^ ± f « 2 ) 2 , T _ u2,+ul+ul+2(u0 + l) . ~ («o + l) 2 ' 5. (G + aX3, L3, Plt P2, P3, X4, a<0), J4
J1 = (.0+ ,) 2 ("i + t + 0 ^"° + 2 -l) ; J2=(xi
+ ^ui)2+(x2
+^ u
2
) \
Jz = x3 - aln(x0 + u) + (x0 + M ) ^ J ; 6. (G + aX3, Pu P 2 , P 3 , Jd, X2, X4, a < 0), Ji = aln(x o +w) - (a;o + w ) ^ T -a; 3 ,
J2 = ( M 2 - U 2 - U l - u 2 - l ) g ^ ; 7. (Li + i(P! + Ci), L2 + \{P2+ C2), L3 + i(P 3 + C3),
Some new differential equations with given symmetry groups Li -\(P* T J
l
+ C3) + a{X0 + X4), Xlt
91
X2, X3, Xo - X4, b< 0),
_ ul+ul+ul + l -
<
•
4. The first-order differential equations in the space JVf(l,4) X R(u) In this section we present some of the new results concerning the first-order differential equations in the space M(l,4) x R(u). The group P(l,4) acts on M(l,4) x R(u) (i.e. on the Cartesian product of the five-dimensional Minkowski space (of the independent variables xo,X\,X2,X3,X4) and the number axis of the dependent variable u). The group P(l, 4) usually acts on M(l, 4) as a group generated by translations and rotations of this space, and it acts trivially on R(u) in this specific case. Let i=o ° l be one of the basis infinitesimal operators. It generates the action
gt(x,u(x)) = (gtx,u(x)) = (y,u(g-ty)), where gt — exptX G P(l,4), x G M(l,4), y = gtx. From this, one obtains the first prolongation of X in the form
i = 0
Now, a function J(x,u^)
ux
j=0
ua
i
U L
t
- J
is a first-order differential invariant if J ( X , M ( 1 ) ) = 0.
X^-
Here u^ = (U,UQ,U\, 112,113,114) is an element of the first prolongation R(u)(lh Let us consider the following representation of the Lie algebra of the group P(l,4): P'-
d
P>-
OX0
P' —
d
9
P>-
OXi
M'
—
P'-
OX2
(v
P'
T
9
OX3
P'\
The equations in the space M(l, 4) x R(u) which are invariant under continuous subgroups of the group P(l,4) can also be written in the form (1). First, we also give the results which are based on splitting subgroups of the group P(l,4). One of the results obtained can be formulated as follows.
92
Vasyl Fedorchuk, Volodymyr Fedorchuk
Proposition 2. In the space M(l,4) x R(u), there exist 243 non-equivalent firstorder differential equations of the form (1) which are invariant under the splitting subgroups of the group P ( l , 4 ) . The proof of Proposition 2 has been obtained in analogous manner as the proof of Proposition 1. The first-order differential equations in the space M(l,4) x R(u) which are invariant under splitting subgroups of the group P(l,4) are constructed. Some of the results obtained have been presented in [1]. In this section we only give some of the new results which cannot be found in Below, for some splitting subgroups of the group -P(l, 4), we also write the basis elements of their respective Lie algebras and corresponding arguments Ji, J2,..., Jt of the function F. 1. (P3 + C3 + 2L3), Ji=x0, J5 = u,
Ji = X1X4 - 3:22:3, Je = x\u
J 8 = «o, JQ = U\+ 2. (L3, X 0 + X 4 ) ,
V%,
h = {x\ + x | ) 1 / 2 ,
J4 =
(xl+xl)1/2,
Jt = £31*4 — X4U3,
JIO
= u\ + u\,
Ji=x3,
J2 = x4,
J3-{x\-\-xl)l/2,
J6 = M0,
h = «3,
^8 = "4,
uM = ^ - , n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4; J4-u,
JQ = U\+UI
J5 = xiu2 - x2ui,
;
3- (G, L3, Xt), J2 = ( x ? + x | ) 1 / 2 ,
^1=^3,
J5 = (xo + x^iuo+u^), 4. ( L i , I/2, L3,
XQ
J3=w,
J6 = u3;
J 4 = X1U1 + X2U2 + X3M3, 5. (G, L 3 ) P i , P 2 ) X 4 ) ,
J1=X3,
J7 = ul-u\i
-x2ui, J% = u\ + u\;
— X4),
J2 = (xj +x\+ xl)1/2,
Ji = x0,
J 4 = xiu2
J2=M,
J 3 = u,
J 5 = M0,
J& = «4,
J7 = M2 + M | + M§ ;
J3 = f^ft,
• / 4 = ( ^ l + S ^ « l ) 2 + (x2 + f ^ W 2 ) 2 ,
J5=«3,
2
J6 = M§ - M - u\ - u\ ; 6. (G, P3) L3) X 1; X2, X4), ^=U.
J
2= ^ t ,
J3 = ^ t x 3 + M 3 ,
J 4 =M 2 +M 2 ,
J5 = M§ - u\ - u\ ; 7- (Pi, P2, P3, X\, X2, X3, X4), Ji = x0 + x4, J 2 = u, J 3 = u0 - M4, 8. (I/ 3 , Pi, P2, P3, X i , X2, X3, X4),
J 4 = Wg - u\ - u\ - u\ - u\ ;
Some new differential equations with given symmetry groups Jl = X0 + X 4 ,
J 2 = U,
9. (L1 + l(P1+C1),
^4 = UQ —ul -
J3 = Mo - «4i
L2 + l(P2+C2),
93
U
2 ~ U3 ~ Ul !
L3 + \(P3 + C3),
L3 — 2(^3 + C3), .Xo, Xi, X2, X3, X4), Jl = U, J2 = Uo, J3 = u\ + lt| + W3 + «4 • Here, we also present some of the new results concerning the non-splitting subgroups of the group P(l,4). For the majority of non-splitting subgroups, the first-order differential equations in the space M(l,4) x R(u) which are invariant under these subgroups are found. These equations can also be written in the form (1), where {Ji, J2, •••, ./*} is a functional basis of the first-order differential invariants of the non-splitting subgroups of the group P(l,4). Now, we only write some of the new results obtained. Below, for some non-splitting subgroups of the group -P(l, 4), we give the basis elements of their respective Lie algebras and corresponding arguments Ji,J2,...,Jt of the function F.
1. (L3,
P3+X0),
J^Orf+z!) 1 / 2 ,
J2 =
(x0+x4)2-2x3,
J3 = 2(xo + x 4 ) 3 - 6x3(2:0 + £4) + 3(x0 — x 4 ), J5=X1U2-X2Ui,
J6=Xo+X4 + ^ ^ ,
J8=uf+ul, J9 = ul~ul-u\, 2. (G + a3X3, P x , P2, a 3 < 0 ) , Ji = x 3 - a 3 ln(x 0 +X4),
J2 =
J 4 = u, J7=U0-U4,
Uf, = ^ - , (XQ - X\
-
/i = 0,1,2,3,4;
X\ - X | ) 1 / 2 ,
J 3 = M,
J7 = u3, J8 = u§ - u\ - u\ - u\ ; 3. (G + a3X3, L3, P1; P2, a 3 <0), J1 = ( x g - x ? - x | - x l ) 1 / 2 , J2 = w, J3 = ^ ^ , J4 = X3-a3ln(xo + x4),
J5 = («i + n ^ )
J6 = U3, J7 = «o - u\ ~ U2 ~ ul ! 4.
J2=U,
J3=X3+
X
^^71"3,
^4 = ( S J X ! + M l ) 2 + ( f ^ X 2 + M2)2 , ^5 = "0 - «4,
^6 = «0 - «1 - U2 ~ U3 ~ U4 ;
5. (G + aX3, L3, Pu P2, P3, X 4 , a < 0 ) ,
+(M2+ X
2
^^) ,
94
Vasyl Fedorchuk, Volodymyr Fedorchuk Ji = x3 -a ln(u0 - Ui) + ^z^u3, 6. {L3 + bG + kX3, P u P 2 , P 3 , X
Ji = u, 9
J2 = f ^ , 9
9
u
J 5 = w§ - u\- u\- u\X2, XA, b > 0 , k < 0 ) ,
J3 = 6a;3 - k\n{x0 + x4) + 9
u\ ;
fef^us,
9
^4 = ^0 "" Ul ~ U2 ~ U3 ~ UX 5
7. (L1 + I(p 1 + Ci), L2 + \(P2+C2), L3 + \(P3 + C3), L3 - \{P3 + C3) + a(X0 + Xi), Xu X2, X3, Xo - X4, a < 0), Ji = u,
J2 = u0.
J3 — ul + u2+u3 + ul .
Since the Lie algebra of the group P(l,4) contains, as subalgebras, the Lie algebra of the Poincare group P(l, 3) and the Lie algebra of the extended Galilei group G(l,3) [10], the results obtained can be used in relativistic and nonrelativistic physics.
References 1.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7.
8.
9.
Fedorchuk V.I., Differential equations of the first-order in the space M ( l , 4) x R(u) with nontrivial symmetry groups, Proc. of the Institute of Mathematics of NAS of Ukraine 36 (2001) 283-292. Fedorchuk V.I., On Differential Equations of First- and Second-Order in the Space M(l,3) x R(u) with Nontrivial Symmetry Groups, Proc. of the Fourth Internat. Conf. Symmetry in Nonlinear Mathematical Physics (9-15 July 2001, Kyiv, Ukraine), Proceedings of Institute of Mathematics of NAS of Ukraine, Kyiv, 43, Part 1, 145-148. Fedorchuk V.M., Continuous subgroups of the inhomogeneous de Sitter group P ( l , 4 ) , Preprint, Inst. Matemat. Acad. Nauk Ukr. SSR N 78.18, 1978. Fedorchuk V.M., Nonsplitting subalgebras of the Lie algebra of the generalized Poincare group P ( l , 4 ) , Ukr. Mat. Zh. 33 (5) (1981) 696-700. Fedorchuk V.M., Splitting subalgebras of the Lie algebra of the generalized Poincare group P ( l , 4 ) , Ukr. Mat. Zh. 31 (6) (1979) 717-722. Fedorchuk V.M. and Fushchych W.I., On subgroups of the generalized Poincare group, in Proceedings of the International Seminar on Group Theoretical Methods in Physics, Moscow, Nauka, V. 1, 1980, 61-66. Fushchych W.I., Representations of full inhomogeneous de Sitter group and equations in five-dimensional approach. I, Teoret. i mat. fizika 4 (3) (1970) 360-367. Fushchych W., Barannyk L. and Barannyk A., Subgroup analysis of the Galilei and Poincare groups and reductions of nonlinear equations. Kiev, Naukova Dumka, 1991. Fushchich W.I., Barannik A.F., Barannik L.F. and Fedorchuk V.M., Continuous subgroups of the Poincare group P ( l , 4 ) , J. Phys. A: Math. Gen. 18 (4) (1985) 2893-2899.
Some new differential equations with given symmetry groups
95
10. Fushchich W.I. and Nikitin A.G., Reduction of the representations of the generalized Poincare algebra by the Galilei algebra, J. Phys.A: Math, and Gen. 13 (7) (1980) 2319-2330. 11. Fushchych W.I. and Nikitin A.G., Symmetries of Equations of Quantum Mechanics. Allerton Press Inc., New York, 1994. 12. Fushchych W.I. and Serov N.I., On some exact solutions of the multidimensional nonlinear Euler-Lagrange equation, Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR 278 (4) (1984) 847-851. 13. Fushchych W.I. and Serov N.I., The symmetry and some exact solutions of the multidimensional Monge-Ampere equation, Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR 283 (3) (1983) 543-546. 14. Fushchych W.I. and Shtelen W.M., The symmetry and some exact solutions of the relativistic Eikonal equation, Lett. Nuovo Cim. 34 (16) (1982) 498-502. 15. Fushchych W.I., Shtelen W.M. and Serov N.I., Symmetry Analysis and Exact Solutions of Equations of Nonlinear Mathematical Physics. Dordrecht, Kluver Academic Publishers, 1993. 16. Kadyshevsky V.G., New approach to theory electromagnetic interactions, Fizika elementar. chastitz. i atomn. yadra 11 (1) (1980) 5-39. 17. Lie S., Uber Differentialinvarianten, Math. Ann. 24 (1) (1884) 52-89. 18. Olver P.J., Applications of Lie Groups to Differential Equations. SpringerVerlag, New York, 1986. 19. Ovsiannikov L.V., Group Analysis of Differential Equations. Academic Press, New York, 1982. 20. Patera J., Winternitz P. and Zassenhaus H., Continuous subgroups of the fundamental groups of physics. I. General method and the Poincare group, J. Math. Phys. 16 (8) (1975) 1597-1614. 21. Tresse A., Sur les invariants differentiels des groupes continus de transformations, Ada math. 18 (1894) 1-88.
This page is intentionally left blank
Functional Analysis and its Applications V, Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
97
Inverse Spectral Problems for Sturm-Liouville Operators with Singular Potentials, II. Reconstruction by Two Spectra* Rostyslav O. Hryniv a b and Yaroslav V. Mykytyuk b a
Institute for Applied Problems of Mechanics and Mathematics, 3b Naukova st., 79601 Lviv, Ukraine b Lviv National University, 1 Universytetska st., 79602 Lviv, Ukraine
Abstract We solve the inverse spectral problem of recovering the singular potentials q £ VF2"~1(0,1) of Sturm-Liouville operators by two spectra. The reconstruction algorithm is presented and necessary and sufficient conditions on two sequences to be spectral data for Sturm-Liouville operators under consideration are given. Key words: Inverse spectral problems, Sturm-Liouville operators, singular potentials 2000 MSC: 34A55, 34B24, 34L05, 34L20
1. Introduction Suppose that q is a real-valued distribution from the space W f1 (0,1). A SturmLiouville operator T in a Hilbert space Ti := £2(0,1) corresponding formally to the differential expression * The work was partially supported by Ukrainian Foundation for Basic Research DFFD under grant No. 01.07/00172. Ft. H. acknowledges support of the Alexander von Humboldt Foundation. Email addresses: rhrynivaiapmm.lviv.ua (Rostyslav O. Hryniv), yamykytyukayahoo.com (Yaroslav V. Mykytyuk).
98
Rostyslav 0. Hryniv, Yaroslav V. Mykytyuk
can be defined as follows [18]. We take a distributional primitive a G 7i of q, put la{u) := —(u' — au)' — av!
for absolutely continuous functions u whose quasi-derivative u'1! := u' — au is again absolutely continuous, and then set
Tu := la{u) for suitable u (see Section 2 for rigorous definitions). When considered on this natural domain subject to the boundary conditions ull](0)-Hu(0)
= 0, u[1](l) + hu(l)=0,
H,h GRU{oo},
(1.2)
the operator T = T(cr, H, h) becomes [17,18] selfadjoint, bounded below, and possesses a simple discrete spectrum accumulating at +oo. (If H = oo or h = oo, then the corresponding boundary condition is understood as a Dirichlet one.) We observe that among the singular potentials included in this scheme there are, e.g., the Dirac <5-potentials and Coulomb 1/x-like potentials that have been widely used in quantum mechanics to model particle interactions of various types (see, e.g., [1,2]). It is also well known that singular potentials of this kind usually do not produce a single Sturm-Liouville operator. Still for many reasons T(a, H, h) can be regarded as a natural operator associated with differential expression (1.1) and boundary conditions (1.2). For instance, la(u) = —u" + qu in the sense of distributions and hence for regular (i.e., locally integrable) potentials q the above definition of T(cr, H, h) coincides with the classical one. Also T(a, H, h) depends continuously in the uniform resolvent sense on a G 7i, which allows us to regard T(a, H, h) for singular q = a' as a limit of regular Sturm-Liouville operators. Sturm-Liouville and Schrodinger operators with distributional potentials from the space W% (0,1) and W^~unif(R) respectively have been shown to possess many properties similar to those for operators with regular potentials, see, e.g., [9,10,17,18]. In particular, just as in the regular case, the potential q = a' and boundary conditions (1.2) of the Sturm-Liouville operator T(a,H,h) can be recovered via the corresponding spectral data, the sequences of eigenvalues and so-called norming constants [11]. The main aim of the present paper is to treat the following inverse spectral problem. Suppose that {A^} is the spectrum of the operator T(a, H, hi) and {/J^} is the spectrum of the operator T(a, H, ft^) with h,2 / h\. Is it possible to recover a, H, hi, and /12 from the two given spectra? More generally, the task is to find necessary and sufficient conditions for two sequences (A^) and (fi^) so that they could serve as spectra of Sturm-Liouville operators on (0,1) with some potential q — a' e W/2~1(0,1) and boundary conditions (1.2) for two different values of h and, then, to present an algorithm recovering these two operators (i.e., an algorithm determining a and the boundary conditions). For the case of a regular (i.e., locally integrable) potential q the above problem was treated by LEVITAN AND GASYMOV [14,15] when h\ and h2 are finite and by
Reconstruction by two spectra
99
MARCHENKO [16, Ch. 3.4] when one of hi,h2 is infinite. Earlier, BORG [4] proved that two such spectra determine the regular potential uniquely. Observe that T(a + h',H - ti, h + h') = T(cr, H, h) for any h' G C, so that it is impossible to recover a, H, hi, and hi uniquely; however, we shall show that the potential q = a' and the very operators T(a, H, hi) and T(a, H, h2) are determined uniquely by the two spectra. The reconstruction procedure consists in reduction of the problem to recovering the potential q = a' and the boundary conditions based on the spectrum and the sequence of so-called norming constants. The latter problem has been completely solved in our paper [11], and this allows us to give a complete description of the set of spectral data and to develop a reconstruction algorithm for the inverse spectral problem under consideration. The organization of the paper is as follows. In the next two sections we restrict ourselves to the case where H = oo and h\,h2 G R. In Section 2 refined eigenvalue asymptotics is found and some other necessary conditions on spectral data are established. These results are then used in Section 3 to determine the set of norming constants and completely solve the inverse spectral problem. The case where one of hi and h2 is infinite is treated in Section 4, and in Section 5 we comment on the changes to be made if H is finite. Finally, Appendix A contains some facts about Riesz bases of sines and cosines in L2{Q, 1) that are frequently used throughout the paper.
2. Spectral asymptotics In this section (and until Section 4) we shall consider the case of the Dirichlet boundary condition at the point x = 0 and the boundary conditions of the third type at the point x = 1 (i. e., the case where H = oo and hi,h,2 G K). We start with the precise definition of the Sturm-Liouville operators under consideration. Suppose that q is a real-valued distribution from the class Wr2~1(0,1) and a G Ti is any of its real-valued distributional primitives. For h £ R we denote by Ta^h = T(a, oo, h) the operator in Ti given by Ta}hu = la(u):=-{u[1]
)'-
and the boundary conditions M(0)=0,
uw(l) + hu(l) = 0 ,
ftel
(we recall that «W stands for the quasi-derivative v! — cru of «). More precisely, the domain of X^/, equals £ ( 2 ^ ) = {w G ^ [ 0 , 1 ] | «[1] G WftO.l], / »
G W,
u(0) = 0, u[1](l) + hu{l) = 0}. It follows from [18] that so defined Ta>h is a selfadjoint operator with simple discrete spectrum accumulating at +oo. The results of [19] also imply that the eigenvalues A^ of To-./i) when ordered increasingly, obey the asymptotic relation \ n = 7r(n—l/2)+An
100
Rostyslav 0. Hryniv, Yaroslav V. Mykytyuk
with an ^-sequence (An). However, we shall need a more precise form of An, and shall derive it next. To start with, we introduce an operator Ta defined by Tau = la(u) on the domain 2>(Tff) = {u G Wl[0,1] | v,W G Wl[0,1], la(u) G H, /(0) = 0}. In other words, Ta is a one-dimensional extension of Ta^ discarding the boundary condition at the point x = 1. We invoke now the following results of [12] on the operator Ta. Just as in the classical situation with regular potential q the operators T±a turn out to be similar to the potential-free operator To; the similarity is performed by the transformation operators I + K^r, where K^r are integral Volterra operators of Hilbert-Schmidt class given by K±u{x)= / k±(x,t)u(t)dt. Jo It follows that any function u from ©(X^) has the form u = (I + K^)v for some function v G 5D(To) (i.e., for some v G W|[0,1] satisfying the boundary condition v(0) = 0) and that Ta(I + K+)v = ~(I + K+)v". Moreover, there exists a HilbertSchmidt kernel ra(x,t) such that
[(I + K+)vf\x)
= [(I + K-)v']{x) + f ra(x, t)v{t) dt Jo
for every v G Q{T0). Also, for every fixed x G [0,1] the functions kf(x,-) and ra{x, •) belong to 7i. Due to the above similarity of Ta and To, for any nonzero A G C the function
fx u(x, A) := sin Ax + / fc£(x,t) sin Xt dt
Jo is an eigenfunction of the operator Ta corresponding to the eigenvalue A2 G C If in addition u(x, A) satisfies the boundary condition u^(l) + hu(l) = 0, then u(x, A) is also an eigenfunction of the operator Ta^ corresponding to the eigenvalue A2. Therefore the nonzero spectrum of Ta^ consists of the squared nonzero A-solutions of the equation fi
c o s A + / ka(l,t)cos\t Jo
1
dt+-
,i
Ai0 h
ra(l,t) h
sin At At f
+ - s i n A + - / fc+(l,<)sinAt A A Jo
d< = 0.
Recall that the operator Ta^ is bounded below and hence after addition to q a suitable constant Ta^ becomes positive. Therefore without loss of generality we may assume that all solutions of equation (2.1) are real and nonzero. Observe also that due to the symmetry we may consider only the positive zeros. The asymptotics of these zeros is given in the following theorem.
Reconstruction by two spectra
101
Theorem 2 . 1 . Suppose that a € H and h € M are such that the operator X^/j is positive and denote by Af < Af < •• • the eigenvalues of Ta^- Then the numbers Xn satisfy the relation Xn = n(n - 1/2) + — + Sn(h) + -yn, in which the sequences (<5n(/i))n=1 and (yn)n°=i belong to £\ and ^2 respectively with 7 n independent of ft. Proof. Recall that Xn —>• 00 as n —> 00 and that the functions fc^(l,i) and r CT (l,i) belong to 7i. Therefore (2.1) and the Riemann lemma imply that
cosAn = - / k-(l,t)cos\ntdt Jo
+ 0{l/Xn) = o(l)
as n —> 00. By the standard Rouche-type arguments (see details, e.g., in [16, Ch. 1.3]) we conclude that Xn = n(n — 1/2) + An with An —> 0 as n —> cc. As a result (see Appendix A), the system {sinXnx} turns out to be a Riesz basis of Tt and the sequences (cn)^°=1 and (c'n)'£L1 with
cn:= f k+{l,t)sinXntdt, Jo
c'n:= [ ra{l, t) sinXnt dt Jo
belong to £2- Relation (2.1) now implies that
sinAn = ( - i r + 1 f1 k~(l,t)cosXnt dt + h°-^ Jo
+ (_i)n+iftc" + <
Xn
=
Xn
where 7n:=(-l)n+1 f Jo
fc-(l,t)cos7r(n-l/2)tdt,
S'n := ( - l ) n + 1 I jfc~(l,f)[cosAni - cos7r(n - 1/2)*] dt, Jo hc C „ __ fecOsAw h Un + l n+ 'n n
'~~
\ An
-rrn Tin
^
'
(2.2)
\ An
Next we observe that the systems {cos7r(n — l/2)t}^L1 and {cos Xnt}^=1 form Riesz bases of Ti, so that (7,,) and (S'n) belong to £2- It follows that (sin An) € £2 and therefore (An) € £2- Lemma A.2 now implies that the numbers S'n form an £\sequence, and simple arguments justify the same statement about 5'^. Thus we have shown that ~ h s i n A n = 7 n + — +8'n + 8Z with the sequences (7ra) from £2 and (5'n) and (<5^) from £\. Applying arcsin to both parts of this equality, we arrive at
102
Rostyslav
0. Hryniv,
Yaroslav V.
~ h K = In H
Mykytyuk
r
1" On
with some £i-sequence (5n), and t h e theorem is proved.
•
It was shown in [11] that any sequence (A 2 ) of pairwise distinct positive numbers satisfying t h e relation Xn = ir(n—l/2)+\n with an ^-sequence (A n ) is the spectrum of some Sturm-Liouville operator Ta
y±
dx\u)
a
j
\u)
and hence u enjoys the standard uniqueness properties of solutions to first order differential systems with regular (i.e. locally integrable) coefficients. The numbers An and \xn are then solutions of the equations v^{\,X) + hiu(l,X) = 0 and u [11 (l, A) + h2u(l, A) = 0 respectively. We introduce a continuous function 9(x, X) through cot#(:r,A) = u^/u. After differentiating both sides of this identity in x and using (2.3) we get -^-22 = sin 8
2 uz
A = - cot<9 + <7
2
-A,
or 9' = X sin2 9 + (cos 9 + a sin 9)2. It follows from [3, Ch. 8.4] or [7, proof of Theorem XI.3.1] that the function 9(1, A) is strictly increasing in A; hence solutions of the equations cot#(l,A) = —hi and cot 9(1, A) = —/12 interlace, and the proof is complete. •
The next restriction concerns asymptotics of Xn and jj,n.
Reconstruction by two spectra
103
Lemma 2.3. Suppose that (A^) and ()in) are spectra of Sturm-Liouville operators Ta,h! and Tath2 with real-valued a 6 H and hi,h2 G R- Then there exists an ^2-sequence {vn) such that hi -h2 K-Vn
=
vn 1
irn
•
(2-4)
n
Proof. Put An := An - 7r(n — 1/2) and Jin := fin - ir(n - 1/2) so that An - fin = An —Jin- Recall that sinA n - sin/In = ^ — - + S'n(hi) - S'n(h2) + 5'^hi) - %(h2) with the quantities 6'n(h),8£(h) of (2.2). Relation
S'n(hi) - S'n(h2) = ( - l ) n + 1 / ^-(l.^IcosA,,* - cos^t] dt Jo
and Lemma A.2 show that 5'n(hi) -5'n(h2) = (An —/xn)t£ for some ^-sequence (v'n). Also there exists an ^-sequence (i/£) such that S'^hi) — ^'(Z^) = v'^/n. Finally, using the relations sin Ara - sin jun = (An - Jin) cos ?„, where vn are points between An and Jin (so that (1 — cos? n ) is an ^-sequence), and combining the above relations we arrive at (An -/x n )(cos i / n - i / n ) = ——
h—,
which implies (2.4).
D
Corollary 2.4. Under the above assumptions, lim n ^ oc (A^ — /i^) = 2(/i! — hi)-
3. Reduction to the inverse spectral problem by one spectrum and norming constants Suppose that a € H. is real-valued and that {A^} and {/^} are eigenvalues of the operators Ta^ and Tath2 respectively introduced in the previous section. We shall show how the problem of recovering a, hi, and h2 based on these spectra can be reduced to the problem of recovering a and hi based on the spectrum {An} of T^j^ and the so-called norming constants {an} defined below. This latter problem for the class of Sturm-Liouville operators with singular potentials from W^~l(0,1) is completely solved in [11]; see also [13,16] for the regular case of integrable potentials. Denote by U\{x, A) and u2(x, A) solutions of the equation la(u) = \2u satisfying the terminal conditions Ui(l,A) = u 2 (l,A) = 1 and w^(l,A) = —hj, j = 1,2.
104
Rostyslav O. Hryniv, Yaroslav V. Mykytyuk
Then Ui(x,Xn) are the eigenfunctions of the operator X^/jj corresponding to the eigenvalues X\, and we put f1
an:=2
Jo
\ux(x,\n)\2
dx.
Our next aim is to show that an can be expressed in terms of the spectra {A2.,//2.} only. Set $j(A) := Uj(0, A), j = 1,2; then zeros of <J?i and $2 are precisely the numbers ±A n and ±fin respectively. We show that $1 and $2 uniquely determine an and are uniquely determined by their zeros. Lemma 3.1. The norming constants an satisfy the following equality: a
n =
7 ft a v An *2(,AnJ
(3-1)
Proof. The proof is rather standard and the details can be found, e.g., in [13], so we shall only sketch its main points here. Put m(A) := -$ 2 (A)/$i(A); then the function /(x, A) := u2{x, A) +m(X)ui(x, A) for all A G C such that A2 is not in the spectrum of TG)hx satisfies the equation lo-(f) = A 2 / and the boundary condition /(0,A) = 0. In other words, f(x, A) is an eigenfunction of the operator TCT corresponding to the eigenvalue A2. Since u\ (x, An) is an eigenfunction of the operator Ta corresponding to the eigenvalue A2, we have
(A2-A2) / Jo
f(x,X)u1(x,Xn)dx=(Taf,u1)-(f,Taul) = - / W ( l , A M M ) + / ( I , A)«W(l,An) =
h2-h1.
On the other hand, ( A 2 - A 2 ) / /(x,A) U l (x,A n )dx = (A 2 -A 2 ) / Jo Jo 2
u2(x,X)Ul(x:Xn)dx
- (A - ^ ) f ^ j jj 1 Ul(a:, A)Ul(x, An) dx,
and after combining the two relations and letting A —> Xn we arrive at _h1-h2
D
The following statement has appeared in many variants in numerous sources, but we include its proof here for the sake of completeness.
Reconstruction by two spectra
105
Lemma 3.2. In order that a function /(A) admit the representation /(A) = c o s A + / g(t) cos Xtdt Jo with an Ti-function g, it is necessary and sufficient that
(3.2)
where /^ := ir(k — 1/2) + /& and (fk) is an ^-sequence. Proof. Necessity. The function / of (3.2) is an even entire function of order 1, and the standard Rouche-type arguments (see the analysis of Section 2) show that zeros ±/fc of / have the asymptotics fk = n(k — 1/2) + fk with (fk) € £2- On the other hand, up to a scalar factor C, the function / is recovered from its zeros as
W>-<#-j?)-*n;F$f$i.
(">
where f
fc=l
k
To determine Ci, we observe that, in view of (3.2), lim^^oo f(iv)/ that -
[
(7r2(A._1/2)2_A2)
™x=n
U(fc-i/2)»
;
cos iv = 1 and
(3 5)
-
fc—1
comparing now (3.4) and (3.5), we conclude that C\ = 1 and the necessity is justified. Sufficiency. Suppose now that / has a representation of the form (3.3), in which fk = ir(k — 1/2) + fk with (fk) £ (-2- We assume first that the zeros fk are pairwise distinct. Then due to the asymptotics of fk the system (cos /fcx)^_1 is a Riesz basis of Ti (see Lemma A.I) and the numbers Ck := — cos fk = (—l)fc sin fk define an £2sequence. Therefore there exists a unique function g £ 7i with Fourier coefficients Ck in the Riesz basis (cos fkx)kxLl. Now the function 1
/(A):=cosA+ /f g(x)cos\x dx (3-6) Jo is an even entire function of order 1 and has zeros at the points ±/fc. It follows that / and / differ by a scalar factor, which as before is shown to equal 1. Due to the asymptotics of the zeros fk only finitely many of them can repeat. If, e.g., fn = fn+i = • • • = fn+p-i is a zero of the function / of multiplicity p = p(n), then we include to the above system the functions cosfnx, x s i n / n x , ••• , xp~1 sin(7rp/2 — fnx). After this modification has been done for every multiple root, we again get a Riesz basis of Ti and can find a function g G Ti with Fourier
106
Rostyslav 0. Hryniv, Yaroslav V. Mykytyuk
coefficients c n := - c o s / n , c n + i = - s i n / n , - - - , cn+p(n) := - sin(7rp(n)/2 - fnx). Then ± / n becomes a zero of the function / in (3.6) of multiplicity p(n), and the proof is completed as above. • Lemma 3.3. The following equalities hold:
$1(\) = l[n-2(k-l/2)-2(\l-\2), $2(A) = n^ 2 (^-l/2)- 2 (^-A 2 ). Proof. We recall [12] that the function u\ has a representation via a transformation operator connected with the point x = 1 of the form Mi (x, A) = cos A(l - x) + / k(x, t) cos A(l - t) dt, Jx
which implies that $1(A) = cosA+ / k\ (t) cos At dt, Jo where k\{t) := fc(0,1 — t) is a function from H. The claim now follows from Lemma 3.2. The representation for $2 is derived analogously, and the lemma is proved. • Now, given two spectra (A2) and (/^) of two Sturm-Liouville operators Ta^,x and To-^2 respectively, with unknown a € H and h\,hi € R, we proceed as follows. First, we identify hi — hi as lim n ^ oo (A^ — Ai21)/2 (see Corollary 2.4), then construct the functions $1 and $2 of (3.7) and determine the norming coefficients (an) via (3.1). The spectral data {(A^), (ctn)} determine a and hi up to an additive constant by means of the algorithm of [11]. This gives the required function a and two numbers h\ and hi up to an additive constant, and the reconstruction is complete. The second part of the inverse spectral problem is to identify those pairs of sequences (A^) and (/x^) that are spectra of Sturm-Liouville operators T,,^ and Tafo for some real-valued a € 7i and some real hi, /12, hi ^ hi- We established in Theorem 2.1 and Lemmata 2.2 and 2.3 the necessary conditions on the two spectra; it turns out that these conditions are sufficient as well. Namely, the following statement holds true. Theorem 3.4. Suppose that sequences (A^) and (fi^) of positive pairwise distinct numbers satisfy the following assumptions: (i) the sequences (A£) and {n2n) interlace; (ii) An = ?r(n — 1/2) + An and fj,n = 7r(n — 1/2) + Jin with some ^-sequences (Ara) and (£„); (iii) there exist a real number h and an ^-sequence (vn) such that Xn — ixn = _h_ •Kn
1 VJO, n '
Reconstruction by two spectra
107
Then there exist a function a £ Tt and two real numbers h\ and h2 such that (An) and (/zn) are the spectra of the Sturm-Liouville operators Ta^x and T^/^ respectively. Moreover, the operators Ta ^ and TCT ^2 are recovered uniquely. In order to prove the theorem we have to show first that the numbers an constructed for the two sequences through formula (3.1), with the functions $ i , $ 2 of (3.7) and hi — hi := h with h of item (3), are positive and obey the asymptotics an = 1 + a n for some ^-sequence (an). Then the algorithm of [11] uses (An) and (an) to determine a (unique up to an additive constant) function a 6 Ti and hi € R such that {An} is the spectrum of the Sturm-Liouville operator T^hx and an are the corresponding norming constants. The second and final step is to verify that {/«„} is the spectrum of the Sturm-Liouville operator Ta^i with hi := hi —h, where h is the number of item (3). These two steps are performed in the following two lemmata. Lemma 3.5. Assume (l)-(3) of Theorem 3.4. Then the numbers an constructed via relation (3.1) with <3>1; <3>2 of (3.7) and hi - h2 := h with h of item (3) are all positive and obey the asymptotics an = 1 + an, where (an) is an ^-sequence. Proof. By Lemma 3.2 there exist H-functions / i , fa such that the functions $ j , j = 1, 2, of (3.7) admit the representation $ j (A) = cos A + / fj (t) cos At dt. Jo It follows that $ i (An) = - sin An - / tfi (t) sin Ant dt Jo
= ( - l ) " c o s A n - / iA(t) sin A n tdt = (-1)" + An, Jo where ( A n ) ^ ! £ £2, and by similar arguments $ 2 (A n ) = (An - ^n)*'2(/*n) + O(\Xn = (An-Mn)[(-l)n+An]
Mn|
2
)
for some ^2-sequence (/in). Next, assumptions (2) and (3) easily imply the relation h —rr
r = 1 + !/„,
^nV^n ~ A*nj
for some ^-sequence (i>n). Therefore the numbers = Qn
obey the required asymptotics.
'
h ^(An) A n * 2 (A n )
108
Rostyslav 0. Hryniv, Yaroslav V. Mykytyuk
Finally, the interlacing property of the two sequences implies that all an are of the same sign, and thus are all positive in view of the asymptotics established. The proof is complete. • With the above-stated properties of the sequences (An) and (an) we can employ the result of [11] that guarantees existence of a unique Sturm-Liouville operator Ta,h\ with a real-valued function a G Ti and a real number hi such that {A^} coincides with the spectrum of Ta^x and an are the corresponding norming constants. Now we put hi :— h\ — h with h of assumption (3) and expect {/i2} to be the spectrum of Tajl2. Lemma 3.6. The spectrum of the Sturm-Liouville operator Ta^ a € Ti. and hi € R coincides with (/i^).
with the above
Proof. Denote by V\{x,X) a solution of the equation la(v) = X2v satisfying the boundary conditions v(l) = 1, ^E1!(1) = —h\. Then V\(x, Xn) is an eigenfunction of the operator Ta^ corresponding to the eigenvalue Ara, and by construction
2/ 1 |, 1 (x,A n )| 2 d, = a n : = A | i M with the functions $i,3>2 of (3.7). Denote by (f^) the spectrum of T^h2 and put oc
* 2 (A):=n^ 2 (fc-l/2)- 2 (^-A 2 ). fc=i
By Lemma 3.1 we have h $;(Ara) Ctn = T— ~
,
An $ 2 (A n ) whence $2(^71) = ^2(Ara) for all n £ N . Lemma 3.2 implies that f1 $2(A) - $ 2 (A) = / f(t) cos At At Jo for some f £H. Equality $ 2 (A n ) = $2(Ara) means that the function / is orthogonal to cos Xnt, n e N. Since the system {cos Xnt} forms a Riesz basis of Ti, we get / = 0 and \&2 = ^2- Thus vn = /in, and the lemma is proved. •
4. Reconstruction by Dirichlet and Dirichlet-Neumann spectra The analysis of the previous two sections does not cover the case where one of hi, hi is infinite. In this case the other number may be taken 0 without loss of generality (recall that TCT;/j = Ta+h,o), i-e., the boundary conditions under considerations become Dirichlet and Dirichlet-Neumann ones.
Reconstruction by two spectra
109
Suppose therefore that a £ Ti is real valued and that (A^) and (/z^) are spectra of the operators TCTjo and TCTjOO respectively; without loss of generality we assume that An and \in are positive and strictly increase with n. The reconstruction procedure remains the same as before; namely, we use the two spectra to determine a sequence of norming constants (an) and then recover a by the spectral data {(A^), (an)}. Denote by «-(•, A) and u+(-, A) solutions of the equation lau = Xu satisfying the initial conditions «-(0, A) = 0, u_ (0, A) = A and the terminal conditions u+(l, A) = 1, U+ (1, A) = 0 respectively. Then u+(-, An) is an eigenfunction of the operator TCT>o corresponding to the eigenvalue A^ and /•i
an:=2
Jo
\u+{x,Xn)\2 dx
is the corresponding norming constant. We also put ^i(A) := w+(0, A) and \&2(A) := «_(1,A); then zeros of the functions $ i and ^2 are numbers ±A n and ±/i n respectively. As earlier, the function ^1 is uniquely determined by its zeros through formula (3.7). Observe that the Dirichlet eigenvalues /ij; have asymptotics different from that of A^, so that \&2 requires slight modification of formula (3.7). We first investigate the asymptotics of //„. Theorem 4.1 ([12,17]). Suppose that a e Ti and {fJ%}, n G N, is the spectrum of the operator T(T)0O. Then the numbers \xn satisfy the relation /i n = ?rn + Jin, in which the sequence {jxn) belongs to £2Proof. The solution w_ can be represented by means of the transformation operator [12] as U-(x, A) = sin Ax + J^ k£(x,t) sinXt dt, where k£ is the kernel of the transformation operator. Therefore the numbers ±fj,n are zeros of the function * 2 ( A ) : = s i n A + / /c+(l,i) sin Ai di, (4.1) Jo which is entire of order 1. Since the function A;+(l, •) belongs to H. [12], the required asymptotics of \xn is derived in a standard way (cf. [16] and Section 2). • The function \&2 is determined by its its zeros in the following way. Lemma 4.2. The following equality holds:
*2(A) = A [ I x - 2 r V t - A 2 ) .
(4.2)
The proof is completely analogous to that of Lemma 3.2 and is left to the reader. Now we show how the norming constants an are expressed via \&i and \&2-
110
Rostyslav 0. Hryniv, Yaroslav V. Mykytyuk
Lemma 4.3. The norming constants satisfy the following equality:
Proof, (cf. [5]) The Green's function G(x,y, A2) of the operator TCTj0 (i- e., the kernel of the resovlent (Tafi — A 2 )" 1 ) equals
m
2
^2^ _ ^
2
G(x,y,A j - 2 ^ A - A2
u+(x,Xn)u+(y,Xn) a
'
On the other hand, we have ,2)
r( [X V
''
=
'
1 (u-(x,\)u+(y,\), W(X)'\u+(x,X)u.(y,X),
0<x
where W(X) := u+(x,X)u_ (x,X) — U-(x,X)u+ (x,X) is the Wronskian of u+ and «_. The value of W(X) is independent of x G [0,1]; in particular, taking i = 0we find that W(X) = Xu+(0, A) = A*i(A). Now we take x = y = 1 in the above expressions and find that v^ ^A
2
2 -A
1 2
a
n
* 2 (A) A*! (A)"
Comparing the residues at the poles A = An, we derive formula (4.3), and the lemma is proved. • Now the reconstruction procedure is completed as follows: we determine the sequence of norming constants (an) as explained above and find a unique operator T<jfi with spectrum (A2) and norming constants (an), see [11]. This gives the function a G 7i and thus the operator T(Tj00. Now we would like to give an explicit description of the set of all possible spectra of the operators Tao and Tat00 when a real-valued function a runs through Ti, i. e., to give the necessary and sufficient conditions on two sequences (A2) and (/LJ2) to be the spectra of X^o and Ta>oo with a real-valued a G 7i. Necessary conditions are that the eigenvalues A2 and p?n should interlace and obey the asymptotics described in Theorems 2.1 and 4.1; we shall show that these conditions are in fact sufficient as well. Theorem 4.4. Suppose that sequences (A2) and (/i2) of positive pairwise distinct numbers satisfy the following assumptions: (i) the sequences (A2) and (/z2) interlace: 0 < X\ < \i\ < A| < . . . ; (ii) An = ?r(n — 1/2) + An and /zn = irn + Jin with some ^-sequences (An) and
(fin)Then there exist a unique function a G Ti. such that (A2) and (/x^) are the spectra of the Sturm-Liouville operators Ta^ and Ta
Reconstruction by two spectra
111
The main ingredients of the proof of this theorem are the same as for Theorem 3.4: first, we construct functions >J/i and ^2 by their zeros and define the sequence (a n ) as explained in Lemma 4.3; then we prove that an are all positive and have the required asymptotics an = 1 + an for some ^-sequence (an). Using now the reconstruction algorithm of [11], we find a unique function a £ TL such that the corresponding Sturm-Liouville operator T^o with potential q = a' € H possesses the spectral data {(A^), ( a n ) } . Finally, we prove that (/z^) is the spectrum of the operator TaiOO with a just found, and the reconstruction procedure is complete.
5. The case of the Neumann boundary condition at x — 0 The analysis of the previous sections can easily be modified to cover the case H = 0, i.e., the Neumann boundary condition uM(0) = 0. As before, we use the two spectra to determine the sequence of norming constants and then apply the reconstruction procedure of [11] to find the corresponding Sturm-Liouville operators. Also the necessary and sufficient conditions on the two spectra can be established. We formulate the corresponding results in the following two theorems. Theorem 5.1. Suppose that sequences (A^) and (//^) of positive pairwise distinct numbers satisfy the following assumptions: (i) the sequences (A^) and (/i£) interlace; (ii) An = 7r(n - 1) + An and \in = 7r(n -1) + Jln with some £2-sequences (An) and G"n); (iii) there exist a real number h and an ^-sequence (yn) such that Xn — fJ,n = •nn '
n '
Then there exist a unique function a £ 7i and real constants h\,hi such that (A^) and (/i^) are the spectra of the Sturm-Liouville operators X^o,^ and TaQ^2 respectively. Conversely, the spectra (A^) and (//^) of Sturm-Liouville operators TCT]o,hi and Ta,o,h2 with cr eH and hi, h2 G M satisfy assumptions (l)-(3). For the case where one of hi, hi is infinite (say, hi = 00) the asymptotics of the corresponding spectrum is different; also assumption (3) becomes meaningless and should be omitted. Theorem 5.2. Suppose that sequences (A^) and (/i^) of positive pairwise distinct numbers satisfy the following assumptions: (i) the sequences (A^) and ((jfy interlace; (ii) \ n = 7r(n — 1) + An and fj,n — ?r(n - 1/2) + jun with some £2-sequences (An) and (/!„). Then there exist a unique function a € H and a real constant hi such that (A^) and (/x^) are the spectra of the Sturm-Liouville operators T^o,^ and TCTjo,oo respectively.
112
Rostyslav 0. Hryniv, Yaroslav V. Mykytyuk
Conversely, the spectra (An) and {fi\) of Sturm-Liouville operators T^o,^ and Ta,o,oa with a S H and h\ £ M. satisfy assumptions (1) and (2).
Appendix Appendix A. Riesz bases In this appendix we gather some well known facts about Riesz bases of sines and cosines (see, e.g., [6,8] and the references therein for a detailed exposition of this topic). Recall that a sequence (e n )f° in a Hilbert space % is a Riesz basis if and only if any element e £ TC has a unique expansion e = X)^Li cnen with (c n ) € ii- If (e n ) is a Riesz basis, then in the above expansion the Fourier coefficients cn are given by cn = (e, e'n), where {e'n)^° is a system biorthogonal to (e n ), i.e., a system which satisfies the equalities (ek,e'n) = Skn for all k,n G N. Moreover, the biorthogonal system (e'n) is a Riesz basis of TL as long as (en) is, in which case for any e € H also the expansion e = XXei e «) e n takes place. In particular, if (e n ) is a Riesz basis, then for any e G TL the sequence (c^) with c'n := (e,era) belongs to £2. Proposition A.I ([8]). Suppose that /^/. —> 0 as fc —> 00 and that the sequence Trfc + /Ufc is strictly increasing. Then each of the following systems forms a Riesz basis of 1/2(0,1): (a) {sin(ivkx +/j,kx)}%Li, (b) {sin{Tr[k - l/2}x + fikx)}^=1; (c) {cos(nkx + nkx)}^=0; (d) {cos(n[k + l/2]x + nkx)}%LQ. Lemma A.2. Suppose that (An) and (fin) are two sequences of real numbers such that lim |An - 7r(n - 1/2)1 = lim \un - 7r(n - 1/2)1 = 0. n—>oo
L
'
n—>oo
L
J
and assume that / € W. Then there exists an ^-sequence (vn) such that /
f(t)[cOS\nt
- COS flnt] dt = (An - / i n ) ^ + 0(1 An - MnH
as n —> 00. Proof. Using the relation cosAn£ — cos fint = —2sin[(An - fxn)t/2] sin[(An + jjLn)t/2], we find that
Reconstruction by two spectra
113
f1 / f(t)[cos\nt Jo
— cosfint] dt = - 2 f f(t) sin[(An - tin)t/2] sin[(An + fin)t/2] dt Jo = -(A n - fin) / tf(t) sin[(An + /i n )t/2] dt + O{\\n Jo
fin\3).
We put vn := —/ 0 i/(t)sin[(A n + /zn)£/2] dt and observe that the sequence (un) belongs to £2 since the system {sin[(An + /j,n)t/2]} is Riesz basic in H (at least for all n large enough) and the function tf(t) belongs to H. D
References 1. S. Albeverio, F. Gesztesy, R. H0egh-Krohn, and H. Holden, Solvable Models in Quantum Mechanics. Springer-Verlag, New York-Berlin-Heidelberg-LondonParis-Tokyo, 1988. 2. S. Albeverio and P. Kurasov, Singular Perturbations of Differential Operators. Solvable Schrodinger Type Operators. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 2000. 3. F. V. Atkinson, Discrete and Continuous Boundary Problems. Academic Press, New York-London, 1964. 4. G. Borg, Eine Umkehrung der Sturm-Liouvilleschen Eigenwertaufgabe, Ada Math. 78 (1) (1946) 1-96. 5. F. Gesztesy and B. Simon, On the determination of a potential from three spectra, in Differential operators and spectral theory, 85-92, Amer. Math. Soc. Transl. Ser. 2, 189, Amer. Math. Soc, Providence, RI, 1999. 6. I. Gohberg and M. Krein, Introduction to the Theory of Linear Non-selfadjoint Operators in Hilbert Space. Nauka Publ., Moscow, 1965 (in Russian); Engl. transl.: Amer. Math. Soc. Transl. Math. Monographs, vol. 18, Amer. Math. Soc, Providence, RI, 1969. 7. P. Hartman, Ordinary Differential Equations. John Wiley&Sons, New York, 1964. 8. X. He and H. Volkmer, Riesz bases of solutions of Sturm-Liouville equations, J. Fourier Anal. Appl. 7 (3) (2001) 297-307. 9. R. O. Hryniv and Ya. V. Mykytyuk, ID Schrodinger operators with singular periodic potentials, Meth. Fund. Anal. Topol. 7 (4) (2001) 31-42. 10. R. O. Hryniv and Ya. V. Mykytyuk, ID Schrodinger operators with singular Gordon potentials, Meth. Fund. Anal. Topol. 8 (1) (2002) 36-48. 11. R. O. Hryniv and Ya. V. Mykytyuk, Inverse spectral problems for SturmLiouville operators with singular potentials, Inverse Probl. 19 (2003) 665-684. 12. R. O. Hryniv and Ya. V. Mykytyuk, Transformation operators for SturmLiouville operators with singular potentials, Math. Phys. Anal. Geom. (2003), to appear.
114
Rostyslav O. Hryniv, Yaroslav V. Mykytyuk
13. B. M. Levitan, Inverse Sturm-Liouville Problems. Nauka Publ., Moscow, 1984 (in Russian); Engl. transl.: VNU Science Press, Utrecht, 1987. 14. B. M. Levitan, On determination of a Sturm-Liouville differential equation by two spectra, Izv. AN SSSR, Ser. Math. 28 (1) (1964) 63-78. 15. B. M. Levitan and M. G. Gasymov, Determination of a differential equation by two spectra, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 19 (2) (1964) 3-63. 16. V. A. Marchenko, Sturm-Liouville Operators and Their Applications. Naukova Dumka Publ., Kiev, 1977 (in Russian); Engl. transl.: Birkhauser Verlag, Basel, 1986. 17. A. M. Savchuk, On eigenvalues and eigenfunctions of Sturm-Liouville operators with singular potentials, Matem. Zametki (Math. Notes) 69 (2) (2001) 277-285. 18. A. M. Savchuk and A. A. Shkalikov, Sturm-Liouville operators with singular potentials, Matem. Zametki (Math. Notes) 66 (6) (1999) 897-912. 19. A. M. Savchuk and A. A. Shkalikov, The Sturm-Liouville operators with distributional potential, Trudy Mosk. Matem Ob-va (Trans. Moscow Math. Soc.) 64 (2003) 159-212.
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
115
Incorrect Nonlocal Boundary Value Problem for Partial Differential Equations Volodymyr Il'kiv Lviv Polytechnic National University, Bandery str. 12, Lviv, Ukraine
Abstract The existence and uniqueness conditions of the pseudosolutions of a nonlocal twopoint boundary value problem for a system of PDE with continuous coefficients in Sobolev spaces are studying. Key words: Nonlocal boundary value problem, PDE, pseudosolutions, lagrangian function, small denominators 2000 MSC: 35G05, 35G15 The nonlocal boundary value problems for PDE, generally, are incorrect in the Hadamar sense. For example, the problem with two-point nonlocal conditions with respect to one selected variable in the Sobolev space scale has no solution or has a non unique solution [1-3]. Incorrectness of this problem can be explain by a null (nonuniqueness of solution) or arbitrary closely to null (nonuniqueness of solution) quantities which in the last case enter as multipliers into denominators of terms of Fourier series which represent a formal solution of the problem. For this reason these type of quantities will be called the small denominators, and the problem of their lower estimation was known since the XVIII century in the problem of celestial mechanics as the problem of small denominators [4]. By using the metrical approach to the problem of small denominators the nonlocal problem solvability in the Sobolev space scales [2, 5] for almost all coefficients in differential quantity of this problem has been established. This is true in particular for a such problem. Email address: [email protected] (Volodymyr Il'kiv).
116
Volodymyr Il'kiv
Let Q = [0, T] x dp be a cylindrical domain, where Q.p a p-dimensional torus, (t,x) G Q, x = (x\,... ,xp). In the domain Q we consider the following problem with nonlocal boundary conditions in time variable t for the canonical system of m partial n order differential equations
lu = y[BOl{D)%Z^\
where Lj(t,D)
°^
-
+BTJD)^J
I Qtn-3 s
= Yl LjS(t)D ,
^
"
I Qfn-j
)=V,
(2)
I
\ )
*,
LjS(t) are complex m-matrix coefficients contin-
M<j
= J2 lQjSDs, hj(D) = J2 hjSDs, kjs, hjs are nm x m kl with the inner product uous on [0,T],
ZOJ(-D)
fcezp
(ft,5), = (27r)P^fc2«r(fc)M*), fc€ZP
where g(x) =
XI d{k)e%(*k<x\ k = (/ci,... ,kp), (k,x) = fciXi + • • • + kpxp, % =
Jl + kj + • • • + fc^ a n d * denotes the Hermitian conjugate of matrix. We use the notation Hq for vector-function spaces of arbitrary dimension so that (h,g)g = (h>i,gi)q + (^2,52)9 for vector-functions h = col(/ii,/i2) and g = col (31,32) of the same dimension. We denote by iT™, 9 G M, n G N, the completion of the space, of infinitely differentiable finite sums v(t,x) = J2v(t,k)el(h>x^ by the norm, generated by the k
inner product T
{v w) n =
> *
TJ
^{WW),-^-
0 J=o
The spaces i? ? and if™ form the scales of spaces with respect to index q G R. If a vector-function
Incorrect Nonlocal Boundary Value Problem
117
F(Di,... ,DP) we shall mean the operator acting on the vector-function h(x) = Y, 'h{k)ei{-k'x"> e Hq by the rule fcez»
F(k)h{k)ei(k'x).
F(D)h(x) = J2 keif
By operations on these operators F(D) we mean the same operations on F(k) for k € Zp, in particular, the conjugate operator F*(D) is defined by the Hermitian conjugate matrix F* (k) and the scalar operator D is defined by the number sequence k, k £ Zp. A pseudoresolution of the problem (1), (2) will be found in the space H™+n, where q € R is the some fixed number. The operators L : H™+n —> Hq and I : Hq+n —•> Hq-1/2 are continuous, so that we may take the right-hand sides / and
Ru=\\Lu-n\fl on the set Ke(uo), namely
KE(HQ)
=
+ \\lu-
R(u). If
UQ =
0 then a pseudosolution
«eKe(u0)
with the minimal norm will be called the normal pseudosolution; if UQ ^ 0 then the ito-normal pseudosolution be called the pseudosolution minimizing \\v — Wo||9+n,n on the set of pseudosolutions of the problem (1), (2). Let u e Hf+n. Then g = Lu & H°, Cj = d^1u{0,x)/dp-1 e Hq+n_j+1/2, j = l , . . . , n , and C = C{x) = c o l ( C i , . . . ,Cn) G Hq+n_1/2 x ••• x Hq+1/2; the function u may be written as the solution of the Cauchy problem Lu = g,
dj~1u/dtj~l\t=o
= Cj, j = 1,... ,n, in the form u = FUU — FU\C + Fu2g, where t
= E{t,D)j£-l(TjD)g{T,x)dT, E(t,D) is the noro mal (on t = 0) fundamental system of solutions of the system (1), £(t,D) = col (E(t,D),dE{t,D)/dt,... ,dn-1E(t,D)/dtn~1), £~1{T,D) is a matrix formed l by the last m column of the matrix £~ (r, D). Similarly we obtain the following relations H°3Lu = FLU = FL1C + FL2g, Ful = E(t,D),
(Fu2g){t,x)
Hq 3 b-l'2lu H°BVu
= FtU = FnC + Fl2 g,
= col (Dnu, Dn-ldu/dt,...,
dnu/dtn)
where FL1 = 0, FL2 = Im, Fn = lo(D) + h(D)£(T,
= FVU = FVIC + FV2 g, D),
T 1
Fl2g = lT(D)£(T,D)j£- (T,D)g(T,-)dT, o
FV1 = col (Z,A)£(t,D),
118
Vo lodymyr II 'kiv t
(FV2 g){t, x) = col {Z, A)£(t, D) J £~1(T, D)g{r, x) dr + col (0, g{t, x)), o 2 Z = diag ( / > , . . . , D ,5), A= A(t,D)=(Ln(t,D),...,L1(t,D)), lo(D)=D-^2(lOn(D),...
,loi(D)), lT{D)=D-l'2{lTn(D),..
.,hi(D)).
The estimate error R(u) = TZ{U) can be represented in the form TZ(U) = \\FLU - f\\l0 + \\FiU -
< e}.
(3)
The problem (3) is a convex conditional minimization problem [7] in the space if ° norm on the linear set of elements col (FL,FI)U — £. For solving this problem we, can use the Lagrange multiplier method. Consider now the Lagrange function CU(U) = R(u) + u{\\u - u o l l ^ - e2) = = U{U) + LO(\\FVU - Vixoll^ - s2) = \\FU - ry||^0 - UJE2, where F — col (FL, F[, S/LOFV), r\ = col (^, ^/UJVUQ), LO > 0 is a Lagrange multiplier, saddle points of which (C/E, u>e) [7] will determine the solutions Ue of the problem (3). By the Kuhn-Tucker theorem [7] the saddle point (C/£, u>s) satisfies the following conditions: CUe(U£) = min{£Ue(C/) : LUU e H^+n}, (4) Lje(\\FvUs-Vuo\\lo-e2) = 0, \\FvUs-Vuo\\lo<e2. Let F* denote the conjugate operator to operator F, then r7-1*
/ TJ*
TTT*
/~,TP*\
(5)
( FL1 Fl\ V^Fvi ) L l
11
V
VI
and the operator F*F = F£FL + FfFi + cuFyFy is the positive definite operator since \\FU\\lo = {F*FU,U)qfi > u>\\FvU\\l0 = w||u||? +n , n > 0 for an arbitrary function 0 ^ u = LUU G H™+n. We construct the projector PF = F(F*F)~1F* onto the range of F to make the lower estimation of Lagrange function Cu{U) and find its minimal value for an arbitrary u> > 0. We obtain CU(U) = \\FU - PpvWlo + ||(7 - PF)V\\l0
- ue2.
The components of operator F* have the following form *ii=0,
F*L2 = Im,
F;i=l*o(D)+£*(T,D)l*T(D),
1
Fl*2=T£- *(t,D)£*(T,D)l*T(D), T
Kiv = ^
I£*(T,D)(Z,A*(T,D))v(r,-)dT, o
(6)
Incorrect Nonlocal Boundary Value Problem
119
T
1
(F^2v)(t,x) = £- *(t,D)J£*(T,D)(Z,A*(T,D))v(T,x)dT+(O,Im)v(t,x). t
Since FU - PFr] = F{U - {F*F)~1F*7j), from the formula (16) we obtain romCu{U) = Cu(Uu)ior ii
—F U
JJ — (F*F)~1 F*n
(7)
The function uu is a unique function that minimizes the Lagrangion function CU{U), in particular COJ{UU) < C^Fy^Vuo)
= R(u0) < oo.
(8)
Using formula (7) we also have uu =uo + FuFy1(G*G)~1G*£o
= u+ +coui,
(9)
where G = col (FL, Ft)Fy \ ^o = ? - col (Lu 0 , D"1/2Zw0) = £ - GVu0, G+ = lim (G*G + LO)~1G* = lim G{G*G + UJ)~1 is a pseudoinverse operator [7, 8] ofG. U " ° Theorem 1. If e < e0 = \\go\\2q+n,n, go = FuFylG+£,0 = u+ FuFylG+GVu0, then a pseudosolution of the problem (1), (2) exists, is unique, has the form uE = uUc = u0 + FuFy\G*G
+ to^G^o
= u+ + LUEU1E,
(10)
where uie is a solution of the algebraic equation \\uu — UQ\\ = e, uu = FUF~\G*G
+ LOE)-\VUO
- G+0, £
and is not the solution of the problem (1), (2), R(u ) > 0. If e > e$ then a pseudoresolution exists, generally, is not unique and has the form ue =u++ FuFy\l
- G+G)Q = uo + go + FuFy\l
- G+G)(Q - Vu0),
(11)
where Q is an arbitrary vector-function in space H® that satisfies the inequality \\(I— G+G){Q — Vwo)||^o —£2 ~£oi there exists a unique uo-normal pseudosolution ue = uo+go and a unique normal pseudosolution ue = u++/3FuFyl(I—G+G)Vuo, where (3 > 0 is some constant. If £ = GG+£, then pseudosolutions (11) are the solutions of the problem (1), (2); if the inverse operator G'1 exists, then the pseudoresolution (11) is unique and is the solution of the problem (1), (2). Proof. From (4) and (5) we find the saddle point of the Lagrangian function. The function UE = Uulc determined in (7) satisfies condition (4) for all value coe > 0. Choose u!e so that condition (5) is valid. Consider the function \\uu — uo||?,o = il-FVL^ — V«o||g,o = ||(G*G + u)~1G*t;o\\q,o which is continuous and strictly decreasing to zero as u> —> +oo; moreover, lim uu = UQ, lim « u = UQ + go, u—>+oo
uj—»+0
^o = IM| g +n,n may be a number if g0 G H£+n or e0 = +oo if g0 £ H"+n. For this
120
Volodymyr Il'kiv
reason when e < £o the equation \\uu — UQ\\ = e has a unique solution u> = u>£ and Ue = UUs. Relation (10) follows from (9) at the change us by a>£. The estimation error R(u) at the pseudosolution ue is
R(u°) = ||(7 - GG+)Z\\2g,0 + "1\\{G*G + u^fa
- (I - GG+)t)\\lo-
If R{uE) = 0, then (/ - GG+)£ = 0 and £0 = (I - GG+)£, namely £0 = 0 and 0 = ||G+£o||<2,o = So < £ that contradicts the condition 0 < e < SQ. Consequently, R(uE) > 0 namely any pseudosolution of the problem (1), (2) is its solution. When £ > EQ, the equation ||uw — ito||<j+ra,n = e has no solution and the condition (5) satisfies only at LU£ = 0. Then C0(U) = R(u) = \\GFVU - £\\2qfi and
£o(U) = R{u) = \\G(FVU-G+O\\l0 + \\(I-GG+)£\\lo > IIU-GG + )t\\lo- (12) If U£ = Fy^G+t) + Fyl{I - G+G)Q then for all vector-functions Q £ H° the minimum CQ{UE) = \\{I — GG+)^\\^0 vanishes. Choose among vector-functions Q satisfying condition (5) which means that for functions uE = FUUE = u0 + g0 + FuFy\l 2
- G+G)(Q - Vu0)
(13)
t h e inequality \\u* - uo\\ q+n,n = \\gO\\ q+n,n + \\(I - G+G)(Q - Vuo)\\lo < s 2 is satisfied, this implies the condition on vector-functions Q. For any pseudosolution (13) u£ ^ Uo + go we have the inequality e2 > \\us — u o\\2q+n,n > llffo||^+n,n = 4 = II(«o + 9o) - Uo||g+n,n hence uE = UQ+ g0 is the uo-normal pseudosolution. Compute the minimal value of the norm ||w £ || g+nin for the set of the functions (13) satisfying condition \\ue — uo\\q+n,n < £ to construct a normal pseudosolution. The Lagrangian function of this conditional minimization problem ||w£||^+n n + r2(||u£ — «o||^ +n n — £2) satisfies inequality
\\u%+ntn +
2
m\ns-uo\\2q+n^-e2)>
> ( T ^ ^ I K 7 - G+G)Vuo\\lo + \\G+Z\?qfl + n(e2 - e2), so that when (/ - G+G)Q = n\\{I - G+G)Vuo\\lo/(l + ft), namely ue = u0 + l go - FuFy (I - G+G)Vuo/(l + ft) it transformed into equality. If a = \\(I G+G)Vuo\\qfi — \Je2 — £g > 0, then ft = ft£ = a/\Js2 — e\ determines the Lagrangion multiplier with the help of which me construct the desired normal pseudosolution ue = u+ + %==FuFy\l - G+G)Vu0. 2 a + A / £ - £g If a < 0 then normal pseudosolution us — u+ corresponds to zero Lagrangian multiplier. Putting j3 = max(0,1 — \Je2 — SQ)/\\(I — G+G)Vuo\\q,o w e obtain the desired normal pseudosolution. An equality R(u£) = 0 results from (12), when £ = GG+t;, namely pseudosolutions (13) have been the solutions of the problem (1), (2). If operator G" 1 exists, then G+G = I, G~l = Fv{co\{FL, Fi))'1 and formula (12) and (13) imply that ue = uo + go = u+ = .FM(col (FL, Fi))~l£ is an unique solution of the problem (1), (2). The theorem is proved.
Incorrect Nonlocal Boundary Value Problem
121
The theorem results that the condition e < oo is a necessary condition of the existence of the solution of the problem (1), (2) in the space H™+n. The case e = oo indicates that this problem has small denominators and shows that the solution of this problem can exist only in the spaces of smaller smoothness and does not exist in the space H™+n. We note that other pseudosolutions may be obtained by using the minimization the weighted estimation error of the problem (1), (2), in particular one may examine the minimization problem of functional ||Lu — /||^ + r l n / 7 i + \\lu —
This page is intentionally left blank
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
123
Singular Integral Operators with Flip and Unbounded Coefficients on Rearrangement-Invariant Spaces Alexei Karlovich a l a
Departamento de Matematica, Instituto Superior Tecnico, Av. Rovisco Pais 1, 1049-001 Lisboa, Portugal
Abstract We We obtain Fredholm criteria for singular integral operators of the form P++MbP_+MuUP-, where P± are the Riesz projections, U is the flip operator, and Mb, Mu are operators of multiplication by functions b, u, respectively, on a reflexive rearrangementinvariant space with nontrivial Boyd indices over the unit circle. We assume a priori that Mb is bounded, but Mu may be unbounded. The function u belongs to a class of, in general, unbounded functions that relates to the Douglas algebra H°° + C• Key words: Rearrangement-invariant space, Boyd indices, Douglas algebra H°° + C, outer function, Fredholmness, singular integral operator with flip 2000 MSC: 47A53, 46J15, 47B38, 48B60, 46B42
1. Introduction Let T be the unit circle equipped with the normalized Lebesgue measure m and let X := X(T,m) be a rearrangement-invariant space (for the definition and basic properties, see [1]). Rearrangement-invariant spaces are wide generalizations 1 The author is partially supported by F.C.T. (Portugal) grants POCTI/ 34222/MAT/2000 and PRAXIS/XXI/BPD/22006/99.
124
Alexei Karlovich
of Lebesgue spaces LP := L P (T, TO), 1 < p < oo, as well as Orlicz and Lorentz spaces. The domain of a linear operator T from X to X is denoted by T>(T). The set of all closed (bounded) linear operators from X to X is denoted by C(X) (respectively, B(X)). We shall denote by / the identity operator on X and by Ma the operator of multiplication by a measurable (not necessarily bounded) function a on T. The flip operator is defined by (U
:=t
(
The Cauchy singular integral of a function ip G L 1 is given by
(5^)(i) := lp.«. JT^z{dT
(t£T).
We will always assume that the rearrangement-invariant space X is reflexive and the Boyd indices a\,Px of X (see [3]) are nontrivial, i.e., ax,Px & (0,1). Lemma 1.1. (a) S, U G B{X) and U2 =I,S2 (b) Ma G B{X) if and only if a G L°°.
= I, SU = -US;
Proof, (a) Since S,U € B(LP) for p G (l,oo), by Boyd's interpolation theorem [3], S,U G B(X) whenever X has nontrivial Boyd indices. The equality U2 = I is obvious. The equality S2 = I is proved in [7, Lemma 6.5]. The equality SU = —US is proved similarly. Part (b) is proved in [10, Theorem 1]. • Put P+ := (I + S)/2 and P_ := (/ - S)/2. From Lemma l.l(a) it follows that Pl = P+,
P2=P-,
U2 = I,
P+U = UP-,
P-U = UP+.
(1)
For a linear operator T from X to X, we shall use the notation
R{T)
:=P++TP_.
Following [9], we study Fredholmness of singular integral operators with flip of the form R(A), where A := Mb + MUU, b G L°°, but the function u may be unbounded. We refer to [8, Ch. 3-4] for properties of operators in C(X) and to [2, Ch. 1], [5, Ch. 4] for the definition and properties of (bounded) Fredholm operators on Banach spaces. The paper is organized as follows. In Section 2, we prove that R(A) is closed whenever b G L 00 and u is measurable and a.e. finite. Further we study the invertibility of two auxiliary operators. In Section 3, we define the class A of, in general, unbounded functions u such that logw G L1 and uOl.~ belongs to the Douglas algebra H°° + C. Here u := max{l, \u\} and O1,~ is the outer function generated by 1/u. Then we prove the relative compactness of the Hankel operator P_MUP+ with respect to the operator MUP+ assuming u G A. By using this key result, we obtain Fredholm criteria for the operator R(A), where b G L°° and u G A.
Singular Integral Operators on Rearrangement-Invariant Spaces
125
2. Auxiliary results 2.1. Closedness of R{A) Lemma 2.1. If a is a measurable a.e. finite function on T, then Ma G C(X). Proof. The idea of the proof is borrowed from [4, Ch. 3, Theorem 9.2]. Clearly,
D(Ma) = {f e X : atpeX}. For each n G N, let Tn := {t G T : \a(t)\ < n}. Then OC
T n C T n + i,
| J Tn = T \ T^,
where T^ := {t G T : a(t) = oo}.
(2)
n=l
For every ip £ X and n G N, put
\fn\ < M,
Wn\ =
WXTM
neN.
Hence, by the lattice property (see [1, Ch. 1, Definition 1.1]), fn and a
G(f) = (f,g):=
f
fgdm,
Jt where / G X,g G X' and ||G|| X * = ||
JT
Hence, the operators Ma and Ma are adjoint to each other. Let us show that any other adjoint to Ma is a restriction of M-^. Assume T is an adjoint to Ma, that is, (Matp,g) = {
= (y>,xrn{Tg - M^g)} = 0.
Therefore, Tg = M-^g a.e. on T n for every g G V(T) and every n G N. Since w(Too) = 0) taking into account (2), we deduce that Tg = M-^g a.e. on T for every g G V(T). Thus, T is a restriction of M^, and M^ is the adjoint to Ma.
126
Alexei Karlovich
By [1, Ch. 1, Corollary 4.4], (X1)* = X" = X. In view of just proved, M« is densely defined in X' and (Ma)* = M= = Ma. Since Ma is densely defined in X1, its adjoint Ma is closed in X (see [8, Ch. 3, Section 5.4]). • L e m m a 2.2. If b g L°° and u is a measurable a.e. finite function on T, then R(A),MuP+eC(X). Proof. By Lemma 1.1, Mb,U,P-,P+ € B(X). Lemma 2.1 gives Mu € C(X). By using [8, Ch. 3, Section 5.2, Problems 5.6-5.7], we subsequently conclude that the operators MUU, MUP+, Mb + MUU, (Mb + MUU)P-, P+ + (Mb + MJJ)P- are closed. • If T g C(X), then its domain T>(T) becomes a Banach space with respect to the graph norm
\\f\\v(T):=\\f\\x
+ \\Tf\\x
(see, e.g., [8, Ch. 4, Section 1.1, Remark 1.4]). Hence, from Lemma 2.2 it follows that T>(R(A)) equipped with the graph norm is a Banach space. L e m m a 2.3. If b € L°° and u is a measurable a.e. finite function on T, then T>(R(A)) = V(MUUP-)
= V(P±MUUP-)
= UV(MUP+).
(5)
Proof. By Lemma 1.1, the operators P± and R(Mb) are bounded on X. Therefore, using the representation R(A) = R(Mb) + MUUP-,
(6)
we can easily obtain the equalities V(R(A)) = V(MUUP-) = V(P±MUUP-). equality V(R(A)) = UV(MUP+) is proved as in [9, Lemma 2.3]. •
The
2.2. Invertibility of some auxiliary operators Lemma 2.4. If b g L°° and u is a measurable a.e. finite function on T, then / - P+MUUP- : V(R(A)) -+ V(R(A)) is a bounded and continuously invertible operator. Its inverse is / +
(7) P+MUUP-.
The proof is straightforward. Consider the usual Hardy spaces Hp, 1 < p < oo, over T (see, e.g., [6]). For a nonnegative function $ with log
T
-^- log $ ( T ) dm{T)] , z G D := {C £ C : |C| < 1}- Z J It is analytic in D and has the crucial property that |O$| = $ a.e. on T. Moreover, 0 $ G H1 if and only if $ G L1 (see, e.g., [6, p. 62]). For a measurable function u on T, put u := max{l, \u\}. \JT T
Singular Integral Operators on Rearrangement-Invariant Spaces
127
Proposition 2.5. (a) If logw G L 1 , then O1/~ G H°°. (b) If logu G L \ F G tf\ and CKF G Z,1, then £>~F G ZZ1. (c) If logu G L1 and
= MOiLP+f,
P_MoaP+
(8)
Proof, (a) Obviously, logu G L1 if and only if log(l/w) G Z,1. Hence, O 1 ,~ is well defined whenever log u G L1. From the definition of u it follows that 1/u G L 00 C L 1 . Hence, O1/~ G L°° n iJ 1 = Zf °°. Part (a) is proved. (b) Obviously, O~O,,~ = 1. (9) Therefore, O~F = F/O, .— T h e denominator is in H1, in view of Part (a). By the '
u
i
1/u
\
'
/
j
assumption, the numerator is in H1 and the fraction is in L1. Hence, the fraction is in H1, due to [6, Ch. 5, Exercise 5, p. 75]. Part (b) is proved. (c) Hip e V(MUP+), then MuP+ip G X and P+
a.e. on T.
Then \MOilP+
(11)
is bounded and continuously invertible. Its inverse is R(UMOM) : V(R(A)) -> X.
(12)
Proof. The idea of the proof is borrowed from the proof of [9, Lemma 2.6]. If logu G L1, then u is a measurable and a.e. finite function. Hence, by Lemma 2.2, R(A) is closed. Therefore, T>{R{A)) is a Banach space with respect to the graph norm. By Proposition 2.5(a), Olf~ G Zf°°. Then MOl/z,R(UMOl/M) G B(X). By using (1), (6), and Ol/~ G H°°, we get for
= R(Mb)R(UMOl/M)
+ MuMOl/MP-
(13)
Since b G L°°, we have R(M(,) G B(X), in view of Lemma 1.1. On the other hand, from properties of outer functions and the definition of u we get \uO1 ,~\ = \u\/u < 1 a.e. on T. Therefore, by the lattice property (see [1, Ch. 1, Definition 1.1]), ||MuMOl/a||B(x)
(14)
128
Alexei Karlovich
Thus, from (13) and (14) we deduce that the operator (11) is bounded and lmR{UMOiruU)dV{R{A)).
(15)
V{R{A)) c lmR(UMOirJJ).
(16)
Let us show that Assume that / G V{R(A)) C X. By Lemma 2.3, Uf G V{MUP+). Proposition 2.5(c) and (1), we get P+ UMoz UP- / = 0, Put ip := P+f + UMoJJP-f. R(UMOl/.U)
Therefore, by
P- UMOii UP- f = UMO~U UP-f.
(17)
Then from (1), (9), and (17) we obtain = P+f + UMOl/M2MoMP-f
= f.
Hence, (16) holds and
R(UMOl/.U)R(UMo.U)f = / ,
f£V(R(A)).
(18)
Analogously to (18), by using Proposition 2.5(a), one can show that R(UMozU)R(UMOl/iiU)
=
(19)
Equalities (18) and (19) imply that the operator (11) is invertible and its inverse is given by (12). Moreover, we have shown that the operator (11) is bounded (and, therefore, it is closed) and its image coincides with the range space (see (15) and (16)). From above and the closed graph theorem (see, e.g., [8, Ch. 3, Section 5.4, Problem 5.21]) it follows that the operator (12) is bounded. •
3. Fredholm theory 3.1. Relative compactness of Hankel operators By analogy with [9] define the class A := < u is measurable :
logu £ L1,
uOl/~€
Lemma 3.1. If u G A, then the operator P_MUP+ respect to the operator MUP+.
H°° + c\.
is relatively compact with
Proof. This lemma is proved by analogy with [9, Lemma 2.1]. Since P_ is bounded on X, we have V(MUP+) = V(P-MUP+). Let {ifn} C T>(MUP+) be a bounded sequence in X such that the sequence {MuP+(pn} is also bounded in X. Since P+ is bounded on X, the sequence {P+
Singular Integral Operators on Rearrangement-Invariant Spaces
129
for some constant C > 0 and all n € N. Thus, {ipn} is bounded in X. Taking into account (8) and (9), we obtain P-MuP+
= P_MuOl/sP+^n.
(20)
Since u £ A, we have u O ^ - G ff°° + C. By [2, Theorem 2.54], the operator P^-Muo1/^P+ is compact on L p for every p £ (l,oo). Hence, by [11, Corollary 1], it is compact on X. This means that, for the bounded sequence {i>n} C X, the corresponding sequence {P-Muo1/-P+t()n} contains a convergent subsequence. From (20) we deduce that the sequence {P-MuP-^
(21)
R(MbUMOl/M)
(22)
:X->X
are bounded; (b) the operator (21) is Fredholm if and only if the operator (22) is Fredholm. If one of these operators is Fredholm, then their indices coincide. Proof. This statement is proved similarly to [9, Lemma 2.7]. By analogy with (18) one can prove that R{MbUMOl/JJ)R{UMoJJ)y
= R{Mb)
(23)
(a) By Proposition 2.5(a), M O l / _ £ B(X). Due to Lemma 1.1, Mb e B{X). Thus, the operator (22) is bounded. On the other hand, by Lemma 2.6, the operator R{UMOJJ)
: T>(R(A)) -> X
(24)
is also bounded. From above and (23) we infer that the operator (21) is bounded too. Part (a) is proved. (b) By Lemma 2.6, the operator (24) is invertible. Therefore, by [5, Ch. 4, Theorem 6.1], from (23) we conclude that the operators (21) and (22) are Fredholm only simultaneously and their indices coincide. • Lemma 3.3. If 6 £ L°° and u £ A, then the operator R(A) : V(R{A)) -» X
(25)
is Fredholm if and only if the operator (21) is Fredholm. If one of these operators is Fredholm, then their indices coincide.
130
Alexei Karlovich
Proof. This statement is proved by analogy with [9, Lemmas 2.4 and 2.5]. By Lemma 3.1, the operator P-MUP+ is relatively compact with respect to the operator MUP+. From this fact and the definition of relative compactness (see [8, Ch. 4, Section 1.3]) one can easily obtain that the operator P_MUUP- = P-MUP+U is relatively compact with respect to the operator MUP+U = MUUP^.. Due to Lemma 1.1, R{Mt>) is bounded on X. Therefore, it is not difficult to prove that the operator P^MUUP~ is relatively compact with respect to the operator R(A) = R(Mb) + MUUP_. Hence, the operator P_MUUP- is also relatively bounded with respect to the operator R(A) (see [8, Ch. 4, Section 1.3]). Thus, the operator P_MUUP- : T>(R(A)) —• X becomes bounded and compact (see [8, Ch. 4, Section 1.1, Remark 1.4 and Section 1.3, Remark 1.12]). By [5, Ch. 4, Theorem 6.3], the operator (25) is Fredholm if and only if the operator R(A) - P-MUUP- : V(R{A)) -> X
(26)
is Fredholm and the indices of (25) and (26) coincide. From (1), (5), and (6) we get for any
(R{A) - P-MUUP~)(I
- P+MuUP-)
(27)
In view of Lemma 2.4, the operator (7) is bounded and continuously invertible. From above and (27) it follows that the operator (26) (and thus, the operator (25)) is Fredholm if and only if the operator (21) is Fredholm. In that case the indices of the operators (25), (26), and (21) coincide (see [5, Ch. 4, Theorem 6.1]). • Now we are in a position to prove the main result of this paper. Theorem 3.4. If b G L°° and u G A, then the operator (25) is Fredholm if and only if u G L°° and the operator R(Mb) : X ^ X
(28)
is Fredholm. If one of these operators is Fredholm, then their indices coincide. Proof. The proof is developed by analogy with [9, Theorem 2.8]. Necessity. By Lemma 3.2(a), the operator (21) is bounded. If the operator (25) is Fredholm, then the operator (21) is Fredholm, due to Lemma 3.3. Therefore, by Lemma 3.2, the operator (22) is bounded and Fredholm. Hence, by [7, Theorem 6.8], essmi\b(t)O1/Z(l/t)\>0. Then 0 < e s s i n f O,,~(l/t)
= essinf (l/u(t))
= (esssupw(£))
The latter condition is obviously equivalent to u G L°°. Therefore, u G L°°. In this case R(A) is bounded on X. Thus, V{R(A)) = X. So, the operator (28) is Fredholm. The necessity part is proved. Sufficiency. Assume that u G L°° and the operator (28) is Fredholm. Then the first condition guarantees that R(A) G B{X), and so, V(R(A)) = X. This means
Singular Integral Operators on Rearrangement-Invariant Spaces that the operator (28) coincide with the operator (25) is Fredholm and its index coincide with the Theorem 3.4 generalizes [9, Theorem 2.8]. It Lp, 1 < p < oo, because the class A is essentially
131
(21). By Lemma 3.3, the operator index of the operator (28). • is new even for Lebesgue spaces wider than the class
QC+ := {/ is measurable : logu € Ll, uOx/~ G (H°° + C) f) (H55 + C ) } , which was considered in [9]. References 1. C. Bennett, R. Sharpley, Interpolation of Operators, Pure and Applied Mathematics 129 Academic Press, Inc., Boston, MA, 1988. 2. A. Bottcher, B. Silbermann, Analysis of Toeplitz Operators, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1990. 3. D. W. Boyd, Indices of function spaces and their relationship to interpolation, Canad. J. Math. 21 (1969), 1245-1254. 4. D. E. Edmunds, W. D. Evans, Spectral Theory and Differential Operators, Oxford Mathematical Monographs. Oxford Science Publications. The Clarendon Press, Oxford University Press, New York, 1987. 5. I. Gohberg, N. Krupnik, One-dimensional Linear Singular Integral Equations, Vol. 1. Operator Theory: Advances and Applications, 53. Birkhauser Verlag, Basel, Boston, Berlin, 1992. Russian original: Shtiintsa, Kishinev, 1973. 6. K. Hoffman, Banach Spaces of Analytic Functions, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, 1962. 7. A. Karlovich, Singular integral operators with piecewise continuous coefficients in reflexive rearrangement-invariant spaces, Integral Equations and Operator Theory 32 (1998) 436-481. 8. T. Kato, Perturbation theory for linear operators, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1995. 9. V. G. Kravchenko, A. B. Lebre, G. S. Litvinchuk, F. S. Teixeira, Fredholm theory for a class of singular integral operators with Carleman shift and unbounded coefficients, Math. Nachr. 172 (1995) 199-210. 10. L. Maligranda, L.-E. Persson, Generalized duality of some Banach function spaces, Nederl. Akad. Wetensch. Indag. Math. 51 (1989) 323-338. 11. R. Sharpley, Interpolation theorems for compact operators, Indiana Univ. Math. J. 22 (1972/73) 965-984.
This page is intentionally left blank
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
133
Spectrum as the Support of Functional Calculus Vladimir V. Kisil 1 School of Mathematics, University of Leeds, Leeds LS2 9JT, UK
Abstract We investigate the new definition of analytic functional calculus in the terms of representation theory o/SL(2,R). We avoid any usage of its algebraic homomorphism property and replace it by the demand to be an intertwining operator. The related notion of spectrum and spectral mapping theorem are given. The construction is illustrated by a simple example of calculus and spectrum of non-normal nxn matrix. Key words: Functional calculus, spectrum, intertwining operator, spectral mapping theorem, jet spaces 2000 MSC: 47A60, 46H30
0. Introduction United in the trinity functional calculus, spectrum, and spectral mapping theorem play the exceptional role in functional analysis and could not be substituted by anything else. All traditional definitions of functional calculus are covered by the following rigid template based on algebra homomorphism property: Definition 1. An functional calculus for an element a € 21 is a continuous linear mapping ^> : ^4 —> 2t such that 1
On leave from Odessa University.
134
Vladimir V. Kisil
(i) $ is a unital algebra homomorphism $(/•o] = a for a fixed function VQ, e.g. vo(z) = z. Most typical definition of the spectrum is seemingly independent and uses the important notion of resolvent: Definition 2. A resolvent of element a £ 21 is the function R(X) = (a — Ae)"1, which is the image under <E> of the Cauchy kernel (z — A)" 1 . A spectrum of a € 21 is the set spa of singular points of its resolvent R(X). Then the following important theorem links spectrum and functional calculus together. Theorem 3 (Spectral Mapping). For a function f suitable for the functional calculus: /(spa) = sp/(a).
(1)
However the power of the classic spectral theory rapidly decreases if we move beyond the study of one normal operator (e.g. for quasinilpotent ones) and is virtually nil if we consider several non-commuting ones. Sometimes these severe limitations are seen to be irresistible and alternative constructions, i.e. model theory [10], were developed. Yet the spectral theory can be revived from a fresh start. While three components—functional calculus, spectrum, and spectral mapping theorem—are highly interdependent in various ways we will nevertheless arrange them as follows: (i) Functional calculus is an original notion defined in some independent terms; (ii) Spectrum (or spectral decomposition) is derived from previously defined functional calculus as its support (in some appropriate sense); (iii) Spectral mapping theorem then should drop out naturally in the form (1) or some its variation. Thus the entire scheme depends from the notion of the functional calculus and our ability to escape limitations of Definition 1. The first known to the present author definition of functional calculus not linked to algebra homomorphism property was the Weyl functional calculus denned by an integral formula [1]. Then its intertwining property with afHne transformations of Euclidean space was proved as a theorem. However it seems to be the only "non-homomorphism" calculus for decades. The different approach to whole range of calculi was given in [4] and developed in [7] in terms of intertwining operators for group representations. It was initially targeted for several non-commuting operators because no non-trivial algebra homomorphism with a commutative algebra of function is possible in this case. However
Spectrum as the Support of Functional Calculus
135
it emerged later that the new definition is a useful replacement for classical one across all range of problems. In the present note we will support the last claim by consideration of the simple known problem: characterization a n x n matrix up to similarity. Even that "freshman" question could be only sorted out by the classical spectral theory for a small set of diagonalisable matrices. Our solution in terms of new spectrum will be full and thus unavoidably coincides with one given by the Jordan normal form of matrix. Other more difficult questions are the subject of ongoing research.
1. Another Approach to Analytic Functional Calculus Anything called "functional calculus" uses properties of functions to model properties of operators. Thus changing our viewpoint on functions we could get another approach to operators. We start from the following observation reflected in the almost any textbook on complex analysis: Proposition 4. Analytic function theory in the unit disk D is a manifestation of the mock discrete series representation p\ o/SL(2,K): Pi(g) • f(z) ~ —^-r
^ r ) . a-0z f (\a-(3zj
a P \_p ~ a)J e SL(2,K).
where (
(2)
The representation (2) is unitary irreducible when acts on the Hardy space H2. Consequently we have one more reason to abolish the template Definition 1: H2 is not an algebra. Instead we replace the homomorphism property by a symmetric covariance: Definition 5. An analytic functional calculus for an element a £ 21 and an 21module M is a continuous linear mapping <& : .4(0) —> A(O, M) such that (i) $ is an intertwining operator $Pi = Pa* between two representations of the SL(2, R) group p\ (2) and pa defined bellow in (9). (ii) There is an initialisation condition: $[VQ] = m for VQ(Z) = 1 and m G M, where M is a left 2l-module. Note that our functional calculus released form the homomorphism condition can take value in any left 2t-module M, which however could be 21 itself if suitable. This add much flexibility to our construction. The earliest functional calculus, which is not an algebraic homomorphism, was the Weyl functional calculus and was defined just by an integral formula as an oper-
136
Vladimir V. Kisil
ator valued distribution [1]. In that paper (joint) spectrum was defined as support of the Weyl calculus, i.e. as the set of point where this operator valued distribution does not vanish. We also define the spectrum as a support of functional calculus, but due to our Definition 5 it will means the set of non-vanishing intertwining operators with primary subrepresentations. Definition 6. A corresponding spectrum of a G 21 is the support of the functional calculus <£, i.e. the collection of intertwining operators of pa with prime representations [3, § 8.3]. More variations of functional calculi are obtained from other groups and their representations [4,7].
2. Background in Complex Analysis from SL(2,R) Group To understand the functional calculus from Definition 5 we need first to realise the function theory from Proposition 4, see [5,6,8,9] for more details. Elements of SL(2, R) could be represented by 2 x 2-matrices with complex entries such that:
,-(a\
9-=f
a
i . W-itf-..
\-/3 a)
\-0aJ
There are other realisations of SL(2,R) which may be more suitable under other circumstances, e.g. in the upper half-plane. We may identify the unit disk D with the left coset T\SL(2, R) for the unit circle T through the important decomposition SL(2,R) ~ T x B with K = T—the only compact subgroup of SL(2, M.):
where u> = arga,
u=
flct~l,
\u\ < 1.
Each element g £ SL(2,R) acts by the linear-fractional transformation (the Mobius map) on D and T H2(T) as follows: -i g
:z^
*Z~P —,
a-(3z
x. where
-i g
("
~P\
=
.
\_p aJ
,A^ (4)
Spectrum as the Support of Functional Calculus
137
In the decomposition (3) the first matrix on the right hand side acts by transformation (4) as an orthogonal rotation of T and D; and the second one—by transitive family of maps of the unit disk onto itself. The standard linearization procedure [3, § 7.1] leads from Mobius transformations (4) to the unitary representation p\ irreducible on the Hardy space:
*G0 • /(*) - ~ \ f (^l)
where ^ = [& A .
(5)
Mobius transformations provide a natural family of intertwining operators for p\ coming from inner automorphisms of SL(2,K) (will be used later). We choose [7,8] K-invariant function vo(z) E 1 to be a vacuum vector. Thus the associated coherent states v{g, z) = pi(g)vo(z) = (u-
z)~l
are completely determined by the point on the unit disk u = (3a~x. The family of coherent states considered as a function of both u and z is obviously the Cauchy kernel [5]. The wavelet transform [5,7] W : L 2 (T) -> H2(B) : f{z) i-> Wf(g) = (/, vg) is the Cauchy integral:
yVf
^ = hff^zdz-
(6)
T
Other classical objects of complex analysis (the Cauchy-Riemann equation, the Taylor series, the Bergman space, etc.) can be also obtained [5,8] from representation pi but are not used and considered here.
3. Representations of SL(2,K) in Banach Algebras A simple but important observation is that the Mobius transformations (4) can be easily extended to any Banach algebra. Let 21 be a Banach algebra with the unit e, an element a £ 21 with ||a|| < 1 be fixed, then g:a^g-a
= (aa-Pe){ae-(3a)-\
5
GSL(2,M)
(7)
is a well defined SL(2,R) action on a subset A = {g-a \ g G SL(2,M)} C 21, i.e. A is a SL(2,]R)-homogeneous space. Let us define the resolvent function R(g,a) : A —> 21 by the familiar formula R(g, a) — (ae — (3a)~l then fli(fli, a)i*i(s 2 , s r ' a ) =
fli(fli(fe,a).
(8)
The last identity is well known in representation theory [3, § 13.2(10)] and is a key ingredient of induced representations. Thus we can again linearise (7) (cf. (5)) in the space of continuous functions C(A,M) with values in a left 2t-module M, e.g.M = 21:
138
Vladimir V. Kisil Pa(gi) •• f(g~X • a) i-> R{gi1g~1,a)f(g^1g~1
• a)
(9)
For any m £ M we can again define a if-invariant vacuum vector as fm(c;~1 • a) = m ® v$(g~l -a) S C(A, Af). It generates the associated with vm family of coherent states vm(u,a) = (we — a)~1m, where u £ ED. The wavelet transform defined by the same common formula based on coherent states (cf. (6)):
Wmf(g) = {f,Pa(g)Vm), is a version of Cauchy integral, which maps L2(A) to C(SL(2,R),M). It is closely related (but not identical!) to the Riesz-Dunford functional calculus: the traditional functional calculus is given by the case: $:/>->• W m /(0)
for M = 21 and m = e.
The both conditions—the intertwining property and initial value—required by Definition 5 easily follows from our construction.
4. Jet Bundles and Prolongations of px Spectrum was defined in 6 as the support of our functional calculus. To elaborate its meaning we need the notion of a prolongation of representations introduced by 5. Lie, see [11,12] for a detailed exposition. Definition 7. [12, Chap. 4] Two holomorphic functions have nth order contact in a point if their value and their first n derivatives agree at that point, in other words their Taylor expansions are the same in first n + 1 terms. A point (z,«(")) = (z,u,ui,...,«„) of the jet space J" ~ D x C n is the equivalence class of holomorphic functions having nth contact at the point z with the polynomial: . . (w — z)n (w — z) PnM=Unj - - + • • • + Ml 1 , ' + U. n! 1!
, . 10
For a fixed n each holomorphic function / : D —> C has nth prolongation (or n-je£)Jn/:B-^C™ + 1 :
U(z) = (f(z),f'(z),...JinHz)). The graph r l
(11)
of j n / is a submanifold of JT" which is section of the jet bundle over
ED with a fibre C n + 1 . We also introduce a notation Jn for the map Jn : f' <-* T^J1' of a holomorphic / to the graph Tj1 of its n-jet j n / ( z ) (11).
Spectrum as the Support of Functional Calculus
139
One can prolong any map of functions ip : f(z) H-» [tpf](z) to a map ip^ of n-jets by the formula ^n\jnf) = Jn^f)-
(12)
For example such a prolongation p™ of the representation p\ of the group SL(2,R) in H2{p) (as any other representation of a Lie group [12]) will be again a representation of SL(2,R). Equivalently we can say that Jn intertwines pi and pj : JnPi(g) = p[n)(g)Jn
for all g G SL(2,R).
Of course, the representation p™ is not irreducible: any jet subspace Jfc, 0 < k < n is p]™ -invariant subspace of JJn. However the representations p^ are primary [3, § 8.3] in the sense that they are not sums of two subrepresentations. The following statement explains why jet spaces appeared in our study of functional calculus. Proposition 8. Let matrix a be a Jordan block of a length k with the eigenvalue A = 0, and m be its root vector of order k, i.e. ak~1m ^ akm = 0. Then the restriction of pa on the subspace generated by vm is equivalent to the representation PI
5. Spectrum and the Jordan Normal Form of a Matrix Now we are prepared to describe a spectrum of a matrix. Since the functional calculus is an intertwining operator its support is a decomposition into intertwining operators with prime representations (we could not expect generally that these prime subrepresentations are irreducible). Recall the transitive on D group of inner automorphisms of SL(2,R), which can send any A G D to 0 and are actually parametrised by such a A. This group extends Proposition 8 to the complete characterisation of pa for matrices. Proposition 9. Representation pa is equivalent to a direct sum of the prolongations p\ of p\ in the kth jet space Jfc intertwined with inner automorphisms. Consequently the spectrum of a (defined via the functional calculus $ = Wm) labelled exactly by n pairs of numbers (Aj, ki), A; £ D, i;, 6 Z + , 1 < i < n some of whom could coincide. Obviously this spectral theory is a fancy restatement of the Jordan normal form of matrices. Example 10. Let Jfc (A) denote the Jordan block of the length k for the eigenvalue A. On the Fig. 1 there are two pictures of the spectrum for the matrix
140
Vladimir V. Kisil
Fig. 1. Classical spectrum (a) of a matrix vs. the new version (b) with its mapping (c).
a = J 3 (Ai) © J 4 (A2) © Jx (A3) © J 2 (A 4 ), where
Ai = ^e-/ 4 ,
A2 = ^
6
,
A3 = j^e"^ 4 , A4 = jje"-/ 3 .
Part (a) represents the conventional two-dimensional image of the spectrum, i.e. eigenvalues of a, and (b) describes spectrum spa arising from the wavelet construction. The first image did not allow to distinguish a from many other essentially different matrices, e.g. the diagonal matrix diag(Ai, A2, A3, A 4 ), which even have a different dimensionality. At the same time the Fig. l(b) completely characterise a up to a similarity. Note that each point of spa on Fig. l(b) corresponds to a particular root vector, which spans a primary subrepresentation.
6. Spectral Mapping Theorem As was mentioned in the Introduction a resonable spectrum should be linked to the corresponding functional calculus by an appropriate spectral mapping theorem. The new version of spectrum is based on prolongation of pi into jet spaces (see Section 4). Naturally a correct version of spectral mapping theorem should also operate in jet spaces. Let 4> : ID —> D be a holomorphic map, let us define its action on functions [4>*f](z) = f((j>(z)). According to the general formula (12) we can define the prolongation <j)* onto the jet space J n . Its associated action Pi4>* = 4>* Pi o n the pairs (A, k) is given by the formula:
^*>=(*(^d^]).
<13>
where degA <j> denotes the degree of zero of the function (z) — 0(A) at the point z = X and [x] denotes the integer part of x.
Spectrum as the Support of Functional Calculus
141
Theorem 11 (Spectral mapping). Let 4> be a holomorphic mapping <j): D —*• D and its prolonged action 4>i defined by (13), then sp
The explicit expression of (13) for 4>i , which involves derivatives of <j> upto nth order, is known, see for example [2, Thm. 6.2.25], but was not recognised before as form of spectral mapping. Example 12. Let us continue with Example 10. Let
This page is intentionally left blank
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
143
Generalized Normality in Topological Products and Related Structures 1 Anatoli P. Kombarov and Andrew N. Yakivchik* Faculty of Mechanics and Mathematics, Moscow State University, Moscow 119992, Russia
Abstract We survey recent progress in generalizing the results that provide necessary conditions for (hereditary) normality of topological products, hyperspaces, function spaces and other structures (these results include the well-known theorems by Katetov, Zenor, Noble, Tamano, Keesling-Velichko) to the case where the normality is replaced with a more general property. Key words: Topological product, Exponential space, Function space, Normal functor, Weak normality, 5-normality, 'P-normality, Subnormality 2000 MSC: 54B10, 54B20, 54C35, 54D15
Introduction The property of normality of a topological space, being, unlike weaker separation axioms up to Tychonoff's T 3 i , neither productive nor hereditary, is involved in a plenty of remarkable results: a fairly strong and important topological property is often implied by the normality of some topological products, their subspaces, or other structures (hyperspaces etc.); they are recalled in the sequel. * Corresponding author. Email addresses: kombarovSmech.math.rnsu.su (Anatoli P. Kombarov), anyak9mech.math.msu.su (Andrew N. Yakivchik). 1 The work was supported by Russian Foundation for Basic Research.
144
Anatoli P. Kombarov, Andrew N. Yakivchik
The problem that we will discuss here is: What happens to these results when normality is replaced with a more general property? It is worth to note that there are different ways of generalizing the property of normality, particularly because of its dual nature: indeed, equivalently any two disjoint closed sets are separated by putting them into disjoint open sets, and by mapping them into 0 and 1 by a continuous real-valued function (by virtue of the well-known Urysohn lemma). One can consider the following ways to generalize the normality: (i) relax the requirement on the separating function (weak normality), (ii) restrict the class of closed sets to be separated (5-normality, V-normality), (iii) allow the separating sets to be more general than the open ones (subnormality). Below we recollect some recent results in this trend obtained within the last few years. Some open problems are pointed out. Most of the special topological notions relevant to our subject are recalled in course of the paper and indexed at the end. For the explanation of other terms not defined here, see [6] or [18].
1. Weak normality Throughout this section, all spaces are assumed to be Tychonoff. Definition 1 ([1]). Let V be a class of spaces (resp. Z be a space). A space X is weakly normal over the class V (resp. over Z) if for any two closed sets A,B C X such that A (1 B = 0 there exists a continuous mapping f:X —> Y = f(X) G V (resp. f-.X^-Z) such that f{A) n f(B) = 0. By default, V is the class of separable metric spaces (resp. Z = R"). The concept of weak normality was introduced by A.V. Arhangel'skii in connection with the theory of cleavable spaces. A space is cleavable (over V, over Z) if arbitrary disjoint sets A, B are taken to disjoint sets in R" (in Y € V, in Z)]. The (standard) cleavability of a space X has an important application in functional analysis; it is equivalent to the possibility of pointwise approximation of an arbitrary real-valued function on X by a countable family of continuous functions, see [2]. By the Urysohn lemma, every normal space is weakly normal (over M). Also, cleavable spaces are evidently (hereditarily) weakly normal. Remark 2. Weak normality is preserved neither by discrete sums (of more than c spaces, see [33]) nor by perfect mappings.
Generalized Normality in Topological Products
145
1.1. Tamano's theorem on X x 0X Tamano's theorem of 1960 (from [29]) says: A space X is paracompact iff the product X x (3X (X x bX for some/every compactification bX of X) is normal. A.N. Yakivchik proved [33] that this result holds true when the normality is relaxed to the weak normality (even over the class of metrizable spaces). Theorem 3. For a space X and its (arbitrary) compactification bX, if X x bX is weakly normal over the class of all metrizable spaces then X is paracompact. Recall that the Hewitt-Nachbin number q{X) does not exceed r if the remainder f3X \ X is the union of G r -sets in f3X; thus, q(X) < LO means the realcompactness oiX. Theorem 4 ([33]). Let X be a pseudocompact space andbX be its compactification. If X x bX is weakly normal over W then q(X) < r. The last theorem lets one easily find a space XT of weight r + which is not weakly normal over RT; namely, XT = r + x ( r + + l). Another result resembling Tamano's theorem was found by Y. Yajima [32] who characterized the Lindelofness of a space X as follows: Theorem 5. A space X is Lindelof iff the subspace (X x 0X) U (j3X x X) of {(3X)2 is normal. Problem 6. Is it possible to characterize Lindelof property by weak normality? 1.2. Morita's P-spaces K. Morita (1964) proved that, for a space X, the following are equivalent [21]: (i) X x M is normal for any metrizable space M; (ii) X is a normal P-space. We now recall Morita's definition of P-spaces. Definition 7 ([21]). A space X is called a P-space iff for any family of open sets GSo...sk C GSo...SkSk+1 C X, Si e S, there exist closed sets FSo..,Sk t h a t X = \Jkeuj GSo...Sk implies X = \Jk&ui FSo...Sk.
C GSo...Sk such
It is also appropriate to recollect two covering properties which are of special importance for studying normality and its generalizations. Definition 8. A space X is countably paracompact (resp. countably metacompact)
146
Anatoli P. Kombarov, Andrew N. Yakivchik
if every countable open cover of X has a locally finite (resp. point-finite) open refinement. An equivalent formulation of the countable paracompactness of a space X is that every countable open cover {Gi}i&LJ of X has a closed refinement {Fi}iEuj where Fi c Gi. Hence, every normal P-space is countably paracompact. Problem 9. Suppose that X x M is weakly normal for every metrizable space M. Is it true that X is a P-space? Such a space X may appear to be neither normal nor countably paracompact, as shown by the following Example 10 ([33]). Let X = ((CJI + 1) x (u + 1)) \ {(wi,w)} be the Tychonoff plank. Then X x P is weakly normal for every first countable paracompact space P . 1.3. Products with the unit interval and Dowker spaces In 1951, C.H. Dowker [5] proved that, for a space X, the following are equivalent: (i) X is normal and countably paracompact; (ii) X x [0; 1] is normal; (iii) X x (u> + 1) is normal. Recall that a space X which is normal but not countably paracompact (hence X x [0; 1] fails to be normal) is called a Dowker space. For a survey of Dowker spaces see, e.g., [26]. Dowker's result cannot be verbally extended to the weak normality. It can easily be observed that for every weakly normal space X and every countable space K the product I x i f i s weakly normal. However, there is still a hope to accomplish this without clause (iii), i.e., for the products with a closed interval. Problem 11. If a space X is (weakly) normal, is then the product X x [0; 1] weakly normal? A good positive approximation to this problem was found by P. Szeptycki in 1995. The following two results are contained in [28]. Theorem 12. If X is weakly normal and countably metacompact then X x [0; 1] is weakly normal. Theorem 13. If Y = Ylieu^i ~^~ •*•) w^h the box product topology (M.E. Rudin's Dowker space, 1971, [25]) then Y x [0; 1] is weakly normal.
Generalized Normality in Topological Products
147
1.4. Large powers N. Noble's theorem of 1971 [22] affirms that the normality is not multiplicative "in large": If X is a space and XT is normal for any cardinal T (for some r >
max{aJi,w(X)}) then X is compact. A.P. Kombarov [13] carried over this result to the weak normality. Theorem 14. If XT is weakly normal for any cardinal r (for some cardinal r > max{wi, w(X)}) then X is compact. The proof is based on the facts that, firstly, the space uf1 (A.H. Stone's example) is not weakly normal and, secondly, every countably compact weakly normal space is normal. 1.5. Hyperspaces For a space X, by exp(X) we mean the hyperspace of non-empty closed subsets of X endowed with the Vietoris topology. If X is a space such that exp(X) is normal, then X is compact. This result was proved by J. Keesling (under CH, [12]) and N.V. Velichko (in ZFC, [31]). It is known [10] that if exp(X) is normal then X is countably compact. Hence, the next theorem, due to Kombarov [14], is a strengthening of Velichko's theorem: Theorem 15. / / exp(X) is weakly normal and X is countably compact then X is compact. Actually, in Theorem 15 [Theorem 14] one needs weak normality of exp(X) over the class of all normal spaces where any countably compact subspace are closed (particular cases are metrizable spaces, normal sequential spaces) [and all points are Gg\. Nevertheless, the requirement of countable compactness of X in Theorem 15 cannot be omitted: obviously, exp(w) is weakly normal because it admits a one-toone continuous mapping onto the Cantor set D".
2. Other generalized normality properties All spaces considered from now on are Hausdorff. 2.1. S-normality Recall that a (necessarily closed) subset F of a space X is a regular Gs-set if it is the intersection of the closures of countably many open neighborhoods of F in X.
148
Anatoli P. Kombarov, Andrew N. Yakivchik
Definition 16 (J. Mack [20]). A space X is 5-normal if for any two disjoint closed sets A,BcX where A is a regular G^-set, there exist disjoint open neighborhoods. Every countably paracompact space is <5-normal. Moreover, a space X is countably paracompact iff X x [0; 1] is 5-normal [20]. C. Good and I.J. Tree in [8] proved that there exist: 1) a (5-normal Moore space which is not countably paracompact; 2) a (5-normal space which is not countably metacompact.
2.2. V-normality
Definition 17 (A.P. Kombarov, 2000, [16]). Let V be a class of spaces. A space X is V-normal iff any two disjoint closed subsets one of which belongs to V have disjoint open neighborhoods. The property of P-normality becomes more general as V is taken narrower. If V is the class of all countable spaces, this property is the pseudonormality introduced by C.W. Proctor (1970, [24]). Compact-normality is equivalent to regularity. Every Tychonoff (5-normal space is Lindelof-normal, and hence a-compact-normal, pseudonormal.
2.3. Subnormality This is a generalized normality property introduced by T.R. Kramer in 1973 [17]. Definition 18. A space is subnormal if every two its disjoint closed subsets are contained in disjoint G<;-sets. Evidently, subnormality generalizes both normality and perfectness. Similar to the latter and unlike the former, it is inherited by countable unions of closed subsets. In 1998 Yajima [32] obtained the following generalization of Dowker's theorem: Theorem 19. A space X is countably subparacompact (or, equivalently, subnormal and countably metacompact) iff X x [0; 1] is subnormal. Recall that a space X is called countably subparacompact [17] if every countable open cover of X has a countable closed refinement.
Generalized Normality in Topological Products
149
3. Hereditary generalized normality 3.1. Theorems by Katetov and Zenor and hereditary S-normality First, let us recall these two classical theorems: If X x Y is hereditarily normal then either every countable subset in X is closed or Y is perfectly normal (M. Katetov, 1948, [11]). If X x Y is hereditarily countably paracompact then either every countable discrete subset in X is closed or Y is perfectly normal (P. Zenor, 1971, [35]). In 1999, Kombarov [15] proved the following theorem, which is a common generalization of these results. Theorem 20. If X x Y is hereditarily S-normal then either all countable subsets in X are closed or Y is perfectly normal. In the same paper of 1948, M. Katetov [11] proved that if the cube X3 of a compact space X is hereditarily normal then X is metrizable. For the hereditary normality of the square X2, this was an open problem very famous and long-standing since, but finally its independence on ZFC has been proven. Counterexamples had been found under MA + -.CH (P. Nyikos, 1977, [23]) and in CH (G. Gruenhage and P. Nyikos, 1993, [9]); and only recently P. Larson and S. Todorcevic [19], using forcing techniques, proved the consistency of the affirmative solution. Some analogous results for hereditary 5-normality of products were published by Kombarov in 1999-2000. Theorem 21 ([15]). If X is a countably compact space and X3 is hereditarily S-normal then X is metrizable (and compact). Problem 22. Is a compact space X metrizable if X 3 is hereditarily pseudonormal? Theorem 23 ([16]). (MA + -.CH) If X is a countably compact space and X2 is hereditarily 5-normal then X is compact. The latter is deduced from Theorem 20 and the fact that a countably compact perfect regular space is compact under MA + -iCH. 3.2. Fa -6-normality We say that a space X has property Fa-V if every FCT-subset of X has V. Fcr-5-normality is a simultaneous generalization of normality and F^-countable paracompactness. Zenor's theorem of 1976 (see [36]) claims: If X x Y is i^-countably paracompact then either all countable discrete subsets of X are closed or Y is normal. It has
150
Anatoli P. Kombarov, Andrew N. Yakivchik
been generalized as follows:
Theorem 24 (A.P. Kombarov, 1999, [15]). IfXxY
is Fa-8-normal then either
all countable subsets of X are closed or Y is normal and countably paracompact. This also yields the following generalization of the Keesling-Velichko theorem: Theorem 25 ([15]). If exp(X) is Fa-S-normal then the space X is compact. Note that S-normality does not suffice here, because exp(wi) is S-normal. Another application of Theorem 24 concerns spaces CP(X) of continuous realvalued functions in the topology of pointwise convergence (i.e., inherited from Tychonoff product topology of M.x). V.V. Tkachuk proved in [30] that if CP(X) is i^-countably paracompact then it is normal. Theorem 26 ([15]). If CP(X) is Fa-8-normal then it is normal. And, there is another generalization of Noble's theorem: Theorem 27 ([15]). If XT is Fa-5-normal for every cardinal r (for some r > max{tjJi,w(X)}) then X is compact. 3.3. Katetov's theorems and hereditary subnormality For hereditary subnormality of finite products, Yakivchik obtained the following results [34]: Theorem 28. Let r be an uncountable cardinal. If the product X x Y is hereditarily subnormal then either every subspace of X of cardinality < T has countable pseudocharacter or every closed subset ofY is a GT-set. Example 29. For any space P of cardinality u>i with at most one non-isolated point (in particular, for the compact space P = A{u){)), every finite power Pk is hereditarily subnormal. Problem 30. Let X be a compact space such that X2 (X 3 , Xk for finite k) is hereditarily subnormal. Is it then true that w(X) < a>i? That x(X) < LO\1 It can be observed that a compact space X such that X2 is hereditarily subnormal cannot have two different uncountable regular cardinals as local characters at points in closed subspaces of X.
Generalized Normality in Topological Products
151
Problem 30 has quite recently got almost complete affirmative solution. T. Banakh proved [3] the following result (we formulate its particular case). Theorem (i) if X2 of X (ii) if X3
31. For a compact space X: is hereditarily subnormal then the hereditary Lindelof number hl(X) does not exceed ui\, and hence x(^0 < w i / is hereditarily subnormal then either X is perfectly normal or w{X) <
(Hi) if X4 is hereditarily subnormal then w(X) < u)\. It remains unknown whether the hereditary subnormality of X 3 for compact X implies the inequality w(X) < u>i. Theorem 32. Suppose that P is a regular space and P = Q U D where Q is an Fa-discrete space (i.e., the union of countably many discrete closed subspaces) and D is discrete expandable in P (i.e., there exists a discrete family {Vy}y££, of open subsets of P where Vy 3 y). Then the product X x P of a space X with P is hereditarily normal in each of the following cases: 1) X is hereditarily Lindelof; 2) X is metrizable. Problem 33. Is Theorem 32 true when X is hereditarily paracompact and perfectly normal? 3.4. Hyperspaces A well-known result of M.M. Choban (1971, see [4]) says: If exp(X) is hereditarily normal then X is a metrizable compact space. Some analog of this theorem happens to be true for the case of hereditary weak normality: Theorem 34 (A.P. K o m b a r o v , 1997, [13]). If X is a countably compact space and exp(X) is hereditarily weakly normal then X is a perfectly normal hereditarily separable compact space. Hence, if X is countably compact and exp(exp(X)) or exp(X x X) is hereditarily weakly normal then X is a metrizable compact space. Problem 35. Is a compact space X metrizable, if exp(X) is hereditarily weakly normal? Theorem 36 (A.P. Kombarov, 2000, [16]). (MA + -.CH) //exp(X) is hereditarily Lindelof-normal then X is a metrizable compact space.
152
Anatoli P. Kombarov, Andrew N. Yakivchik
Problem 37. Does Theorem 36 hold in ZFC? 3.5. Normal functors For the definition of a normal functor (of degree n) and a survey of covariant functors, see [27]. M. Katetov's theorem on the cube was extended in 1989 by V.V. Fedorchuk [7] as follows: Theorem 38. If X is a compact space and T{X) is hereditarily normal where T is a normal functor of degree > 3 then X is metrizable. In 2000, the analogous result for the countably paracompact case was proved similarly by T.F. Zhuraev [37]: Theorem 39. If X is a compact space and J~(X) is hereditarily countably paracompact where T is a normal functor of degree > 3 then X is metrizable. A simultaneous generalization of the two previous results has been recently obtained by A.P. Kombarov: Theorem 40. Let X be a compact space and T be a normal functor of degree > 3. If J-{X) is hereditarily a-compact-normal then X is metrizable. Problem 41. In the last theorem, is it enough to assume that !F{X) is hereditarily pseudonormal? If exp 3 (X) is hereditarily tr-compact-normal and X is compact then X is metrizable. It does not suffice to consider countably compact X, because exp3(wi) is (even) hereditarily Lindelof-normal. 3.6. Hereditarily weakly normal products X x Y The results below have visual (rather than logical) relevance to Katetov's theorem. Theorem 42 (A.N. Yakivchik, 1997, [33]). Let r be an infinite cardinal. If X xY is hereditarily weakly normal over the class of all spaces with pseudocharacter < r then either every subset of X with cardinality < r is closed or every compact subspace of X has tightness < r. Theorem 43 ([33]). If X x T+ is hereditarily weakly normal over the class of all
Generalized Normality in Topological Products
153
spaces with pseudoweight < T then every subset of X with cardinality < r is closed. References 1. A.V. Arhangel'skii, Divisibility and cleavability of spaces, in: Recent Developments of General Topology and its Applications. International Conference in memory of Felix Hausdorff, Math. Res. 67 (Akademie-Verlag, Berlin, 1992) 13-26. 2. A.V. Arhangel'skii, D.B. Shakhmatov, On pointwise approximation of arbitrary functions by countable families of continuous functions, Trudy Semin. Petrovskogo 13 (1988) 206-227 (in Russian). 3. T. Banakh, On topological spaces with hereditary subnormal product, preprint. 4. M.M. Choban, Note sur topologie exponentielle, Fund. Math. 171 (1971) 27-41. 5. C.H. Dowker, On countably paracompact spaces, Canad. J. Math. 3 (1951) 219-224. 6. R. Engelking, General Topology. Heldermann-Verlag, Berlin, 1989. 7. V.V. Fedorchuk, On Katetov's theorem on the cube, Moscow Univ. Math. Bull. 44 (4) (1989) 102-106. 8. C. Good and I.J. Tree, On 5-normality, Topology Appl. 56 (1994) 117-127. 9. G. Gruenhage and P. Nyikos,, Normality in X2 for compact X, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 340 (1993) 563-586. 10. V.M. Ivanova, On the theory of spaces of subsets, Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR 101 (1955) 601-603 (in Russian). 11. M. Katetov, Complete normality of Cartesian products, Fund. Math. 35 (1948) 271-274. 12. J. Keesling, On the equivalence of normality and compactness in hyperspaces, Pacific J. Math. 33 (1970) 657-667. 13. A.P. Kombarov, Weak normality of subsets of exp(X), Topology Appl. 76 (1997) 157-160. 14. A.P. Kombarov, Weak normality of 2X and XT, Fund. Prikl. Mat. 4 (1) (1998) 135-140 (in Russian). 15. A.P. Kombarov, On i^-^-normality and hereditary <5-normality, Topology Appl. 91 (1999) 221-226. 16. A.P. Kombarov, On Lindelof-normal spaces, Topology Appl. 107 (2000) 117122. 17. T.R. Kramer, A note on countably subparacompact spaces, Pacific J. Math. 46 (1973) 209-213. 18. K. Kunen and J.E. Vaughan, eds., Handbook of Set-Theoretic Topology. NorthHolland, Amsterdam, 1984. 19. P. Larson and S. Todorcevic, Katetov's problem, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 354 (2002) 1783-1791 (electronic). 20. J. Mack, Countable paracompactness and weak normality properties, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 148 (1970) 265-272. 21. K. Morita, Products of normal spaces with metric spaces, Math. Ann. 154 (1964) 365-382.
154
Anatoli P. Kombarov, Andrew N. Yakivchik
22. N. Noble, Products with closed projections II, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 160 (1971) 169-183. 23. P. Nyikos, A compact nonmetrisable space P such that P2 is completely normal, Topology Proc. 2 (1977) 359-363. 24. C.W. Proctor, A separable pseudonormal nonmetrizable Moore space, Bull. Acad. Polon. Sci. 18 (1970) 179-181. 25. M.E. Rudin, A normal space X for which X x I is not normal, Fund. Math. 73 (1971) 179-186. 26. M.E. Rudin, Dowker spaces, in: K. Kunen and J.E. Vaughan, eds., Handbook of Set-Theoretic Topology (North-Holland, Amsterdam, 1984) 761-780. 27. E.V. Shchepin, Functors and uncountable powers of compacta, Soviet Math. Surveys 36 (3) (1981) 1-71. 28. P.J. Szeptycki, Weak normality in Dowker spaces, Topology Proc. 20 (1995) 289-296. 29. H. Tamano, On paracompactness, Pacific J. Math. 10 (1960) 1043-1047. 30. V.V. Tkachuk, Methods in the theory of cardinal invariants and the theory of mappings in application to function spaces, Siberian Math. J. 32 (1991) 93-107. 31. N.V. Velichko, On a space of closed subsets, Siberian Math. J. 16 (1975) 484486. 32. Y. Yajima, Analogous results to two classical characterizations of covering properties by products, Topology Appl. 84 (1998) 3-7. 33. A.N. Yakivchik, Weakly normal topological spaces and products, Topology Appl. 76 (1997) 193-201. 34. A.N. Yakivchik, Subnormality in subspaces of products, Topology Appl. 107 (2000) 197-205. 35. P. Zenor, Countable paracompactness in product spaces, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 30 (1971) 199-201. 36. P. Zenor, Countable paracompactness of FCT-sets, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 55 (1976) 201-202. 37. T.F. Zhuraev, Normal functors and the metrizability of compact Hausdorff spaces, Moscow Univ. Math. Bull. 55 (4) (2000) 6-9.
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
155
Nonstandard Universe based on Internal Set Theory Taras Kudryk a , Wladyslav Lyantse a and Vitor Neves b a
b
Lviv National University, 1 Universytetska st., 79602 Lviv, Ukraine Department of Mathematics, University of Aveiro, 3810-193 Aveiro, Portugal
Abstract This paper is an invitation to look what occurs when tools of Robinson's and Nelson's Nonstandard Analysis act simultaneously. For instance, in this case we have several kinds of infinitesimals in our disposal. Key words: Standard, internal, external, shadow, infinitesimal, galaxy, hull, Loeb measure 2000 MSC: 03H05, 46S20
1. Preliminaries We suppose that the reader is familiar with NSA (the Nonstandard Analysis of Robinson, see [9] or [2]) and 1ST (the Internal Set Theory of Nelson, see [6] or [4], or [5]). Multiple standardness was studied by E. Gordon and Y. Peraire in a series of interesting papers (see, for instance [3], [7], [8]). Note that none new definition of standardness is introduced in this article. You can see also the following papers [10], [11], or the book [12] discussing similar topics. To avoid misunderstandings let us fix notation and terminology. We determine the standard Mathematics as based on the ZFC (Zermelo-Fraenkel with Choice) set theory, but as the background of the whole Mathematics we accept Email addresses: tkudrykfifranko.lviv.ua (Taras Kudryk), wlancSlitech.lviv.ua (Wladyslav Lyantse), [email protected] (Vitor Neves).
156
Taras Kudryk et al.
the Internal Set Theory (which includes the ZFC axiomes). Thus "to be standard" means "to be uniquely determined by tools of ZFC (without the predicate st = " to be standard" and related with st axioms of Idealization, Standardization and Transfer) and standard data". This is a recurrent definition with the empty set 0 as the beginning. We realize our considerations in some fixed model of set theory. The uniqueness of interpretation allows do not differ a symbol (name of an entity) and the entity itself. We emphasize that the 1ST recognizes internal sets only (i.e. such that are elements of standard sets). Since x G {x} and {x} is standard, whenever x is so, each standard item is internal. Write "si(x)" for "x is standard". A predicate of the ZFC-language without occurence of st(-) is called internal, whereas one which contains st(-) is called external. The subset construction B — {x G A : p(x)} in our 1ST Mathematics is allowed for A and p internal only. Nevertheless one uses the following denotation: st E := {x G E : st(x)}; stE (the collection of standard elements of the set E) is not a genuine set, but an "external" set. One uses stE to write formulas, for instance, "x G stE", "stE = stF, which mean respectively "x G E A st(x)", "(\/x)(st(x) => x G E <*=> x € F)", and so on. An internal predicate without occurence of nonstandard constants is said to be standard. (Obviously, standard predicates belong to the ZFC-language.) For a standard predicate p the Nelson's transfer principle holds: 3 j ; p(i) => 3 st x p(i),
V st ij)(i)=>Vxp(x);
(1-1)
understand "Bcc" as "for some internal x" and "Vx" as "for any internal x". An essential corollary of (1.1) is the following: st(E) A E ^ 0 => stE ± 0.
(1.2)
Notice also an essential corollary of the Nelson's idealization principle: st(E) A cardS > card N^E\stE st
^ 0.
(1.3)
st
The presence of nontrivial parts E and E \ E according to (1.2) and (1.3) is an important feature of the Internal Set Theory. Now a few words about the construction of the Robinson's Nonstandard Universe W and the Transfer Map *. Initial data for these are as follows: S - the set of individuals, 0, - the set of indices, T - a fixed free ultrafilter on 0,. We accept the following 1.1 Main assumption. The initial data S, 0, T are standard (in the sense of 1ST). Besides, in order that W and * be nontrivial we assume that cardO > cardS1 > cardN. Recall that the standard universe 5 is the superstructure S := \Jn€N Sn,
S0:=S,
V n G N Sn+l := Sn U 2 s ".
To each "block" Sn of S there corresponds a set *Sn defined by the conditions (i) each function / G S% determines an element / G *Sn, (ii) let h, h G S*?, then fx = f2 iff h =r f2 (i.e., {w G Q : A H = /2(w)} G 7),
Nonstandard Universe based on Internal Set Theory
157
(iii) let / G ( 2 s " ) n , then / is the set of g G *Sn such that g e? f (i.e., {UJ G 0. :
g(u) G f(u)} S .F), (iv) for f € S$ f = {g E Sg : g =jr f} and *S 0 is the set of all such / . The nonstandard universe W is defined as the bounded ultrapower:
W:=S"/F = Unm*Sn. The transfer map * transforms S into W as follows: if E G Sn and n > 1, then *E := {/ G *S n _i : / £? E}; ii E £ So = S, then *E = / where / G *S 0 and / =jr E. *E is said to be the star-version of E G S. 1.2 Remark. On account of injectivity of the map * one can identify each individual with its star-version: VsGSo *S = S (1.4) But for n > 0 the restriction of * to Sn \ So is not surjective. That is why an E G S\S cannot be identified with its star-version *E. 1.3 Remark. It may well happen for two individuals that each one is an element of the other. (Recall that all items in Internal Set Theory are sets.) It is necessary to keep in mind that after identification (1.4) for s,t G S the formula s G t is meaningless. Indeed, both *s and *t are classes of functions, which excludes the relation *s G *t. Let a be an assertion of the ZFC-language which states something about E G S. Denote by *a the assertion obtained from a by the replacement of E by *E. Then the Robinson's transfer theorem holds: a <^=>* a.
(1.5)
For instance, for E G S \S define!? := {*x : x £ E}; ~E is the pointwise image of E by the map *. Theorem (1.5) implies that WE G S \ S~E C *E, but *E \"E ^ 0 -^=> cardi? > cardN. In the framework of NSAU is a counterpart of stE of 1ST. An essential corollary of assumption 1.1 is the following statement: 1.4 Proposition. The superstructure S, the ultrapower W, the transfer map * are standard (in the sense of 1ST). If E G s t ( 5 \ S), then *E and'E are standard. For instance, *Sn is standard for each n G st N. Notice that for n G N \ s t N Sn and *Sn are internal. 1.5 Warning. The terminology in Robinson's NSA is somewhat different, namely an E G W is said to be standard iff it is the star-version of some F G S. To avoid misunderstandings, we call an E G W such that E = *F, for some F G S, R-standard (standard in the sense of Robinson).
2. Numbers Let us look what numbers are available in the universe W constructed within 1ST. As usually, by N, Z, Q, R, C we denote standard sets of natural, integer, rational,
158
Taras Kudryk et al.
real and complex numbers respectively. Their star-versions *N, . . . , *C are called respectively sets of hypernatural, . . . , hypercomplex numbers. For convenience assume that C c S . This implies st
CcC=Cc'C;
and similarly for N, . . . , K. Notice that (in our terminology) *N,..., *C are standard and s t N,..., st C are strictly external. Begin with naturals and hypernaturals. Consider each n G N as a (finite) ordinal, i.e. a transitive set, totally ordered by the membership relation G. So for n G N we have n := {0,... ,n — 1}. Since N C 5, in view of remark 1.3 this cannot be transferred to *N. But it can be used that the restriction of G to N is identical to the ordinary inequality relation <. Temporararily denote the last by X. We have X G S, therefore the star-version * I really exists. Because I c f t x N c S x S , X C *X and * I n (N x N) = X. These relation allow to denote X and *X by the unique usual symbol <. Since (N, <) is a linearly ordered set, by the transfer theorem (1.5) (*N, <) is also so. But (*N, <) is not totally ordered (though (N, <) is a totally ordered set). The cause is that for E G S \ S the star-version of 2E is not 2* £ , but *{2E) = 2'E n W. This involves that some sets A c *N can be simultaneously internal and R-external. For instance, the set *N \ N is standard, nonempty and does not contain a minimal number. Even for n G * N \ N the nonempty internal set {k G *N \ N : k < n} lacks the minimum. Call a number n G N \ s t N infinite, and a number n G *N \ N R-infinite (Robinson's infinite). Of course, if p is R-infinite, then Vn G N n < p. The main purpose of natural numbers is to be values of the measure card. Let E be some internal set and n G N. We write caidE = n iff there exists a bijection / G En (i.e. d o m / = n = {0, ...,n — 1}, i m / = E). By restricting the map card to S\S, we get card G S. Thus there exists a star-version "card G W; *card as well as card are standard. The domain of *card is W \*S. 2.1 Proposition. There exists a standard R-infinite hypernatural number. Proof. Since N and *N are standard, *N \ N is so. Because *N \ N ^ 0, by (1.1) (*N\N) ^ 0 .>
st
2.2 Remark. A standard n G *N \ N can be demonstrated explicitly. For / , g G N n define / =? g = {u) G fi : f(w) = g(uo)} G T. Then each / G N n uniquely determines a hypernatural number / , namely the equivalence class / := {g G N n : g =? / } . If / is essentially unbounded, i.e., (Vn G N) ({to Gil: f{u>) > n } e f ) , then / G *N \ N and / is standard whenever / Gst(Nn). > 2.3 Remark. A standard hypernatural number can be even greater than an Rinfinite one. Indeed, let n,p G s t ( * N \ N ) and n < p. If the set {x G *N : n < x < p} is infinite, for instance with p = n 2 , by Nelson's theorem (1.3) it contains nonstandard elements. It is easy to demonstrate such elements explicitly. Standard hypernaturals entirely fill in some galaxies.
Nonstandard Universe based on Internal Set Theory
159
It is also interesting to mention the existence of e x t r a infinite hypernaturals, i.e. the existence of p G *N such that V n £ st (*N) n < p. This follows from the Idealization principle: VstflnX3y VxGX (xG*NAyG*NAx<2/)^ => 3yVxG s t (*N) (ye
*NAx
Pass to the reals and hyperreals. The arithmetical operations, the order and their star-versions are denoted identically by +, •, <. For x, y G *K define x « y = V n € s t N \x - y\ < - , I := {x G M : x ss 0}, (2.1) In x~y = VneN \x - y\ < -n , *I := {x G *R : x ~ 0}, (2.2) 1 st x « y = Vn G (*N)|x - yl < - , e I : = { i e * R : i « 0}. n Elements of I and *I (»I is not a star-version of I) are called respectively infinitesimals and R-infinitesimals, and ones of e I extra infinitesimals. *I is standard in the sense of 1ST whereas I and e I are strictly external. In view of the standard archimedean principle, we have Vx,yGR. x~y=>x = y.
(2.3)
Of course, V i e J Vy G I \» I |a;| < \y\. For x G *R define x|
F := {x G E : |z| < oo},
x| <* oo = 3n G N \x\ < n,
»F := {x G *E : |x[ <* oo},
st
x| < oo = 3 n G (*N) |x| < n, e¥ := {x G *R : |x| < oo}. Elements of the strictly external sets F ande F respectively are called finite and e x t r a finite. The set *F is standard and its elements are called R-finite. »F (F) is a subring of the ordered field *M (M) and *I (I) is an ideal of the ordered ring *F (F). Similarly for e I ande F. Permanence principles do not reach the sets of extra infinitesimals and extra finite numbers. It is known that for each x G F there exists a unique y Gs t R such that x « y. This y is called the shadow of x and denoted by °x. Also to each x G »F there corresponds a unique j / e R such that x ~ y. This y is called the R-shadow of x and denoted by °x. Thus, VXGF
°X G stM, X W °X,
VXG*F
°XGR, X ~ ° X .
(2.4)
2.4 Proposition. Let x G *K and \x\
Proof. If x G *R and |x|
160
Taras Kudryk et al.
2.5 Remark. If x £ *M. and |x|
°x := [a;] +* (x - [x]).
(2.6)
st
Notice that *R = *Z + *[0,1[, Vx G *R °x G *Z + [0,1[, ° i « i , ° i e * Z + [0,1[, °x ~ x. The map x — i > °x is strictly external and x — i > °x is standard. 2.7 Proposition. (External) sets *R/ « and *Z + st[0,1[ are ordered additive groups. The extended shadow map is an isomorphism of theirs, i.e. Vx,y £ *R Vn G *Z °(x + n) = °x + n, °(x + y) = °x + °y, x < y => °x < °j/. Proof. Let x = m + £, where m £ *Z, ^ € *[0,1[. Then by (2.6) °x = m + °£. For n £ *1 we have [x + n] = TO + n. Therefore °(x + n) = m + n + °£, i.e. the first equality holds. Using it it is quite easy to prove the rest. >
2.8 Warning. In general °(xy) ^ °x°y. 2.9 Remark. By usual means one can form the set of standard hyperrationals from the set of R-infinite hypernaturals which is even more rich than Q but that is not the same that *Q.
3. Metric spaces In the sequel {X, d) will denote a standard metric space such that X is infinite and C U X C S. From this assumption it follows (see (1.4)) that stX C X = 'X C *X. *X and *d as well as X and d are standard. We write d instead of *d, because d C *d. For xi,x? £ *X define (see (2.1), (2.2)) x\ « xi = d(x\,X2) ~ 0, x\ ~ X2 = rf(xi,X2) ~ 0, xi « X2 = d(xi,X2) ~ 0. Notice that (2.3) implies Wxx,x2£X
x\ ~ x2 =>• xi = X2-
(3.1)
3.1 Remaric. We cannot consider (*X,d) as a metric space, because values of d on *X x *X are hyperreals. Nevertheless *X is a standard topological space with the topology *r which is the star-version of the topology r induced by the distance d on X. {*X, d) is said to be a hypermetric space. 3.2 Definition. For any x £ *X form equivalency classes h(x) := {£ £ X : £ « x}, */i(x) := {$ G *X : £ ~ x}, e /i(z) = {^ G *X : ^ « x}. The sets ft(x) and th(x) are called respectively the halo and the R-halo of x. eh(x) is the extra halo.
Nonstandard Universe based on Internal Set Theory
161
3.3 Remark. Of course, the map *X 9 I H */I(X) G 2*x is standard. Therefore, if x G st(*X), then the R-halo *h(x) is standard. But for x G *X \ X it is possible that h(x) = 0. Notice that from (3.1) it follows that */i(x) n X = {x} whenever xeX. 3.4 Definition. Denote by X the quotient of *X relative to ~: X := *X/ ~ = {x : x G *X, x = *h(x)}. For Xi,x2 G X, £i G Xi, £2 € x2 put d(xi,x 2 ) := °d(£i>£2); here ° is the R-shadow map (see (2.6)). (The independence of d(xi, x2) from £i G Xi, £2 £ %2 follows from (3.1).) 3.5 Proposition. The function d is an almost distance, i.e. it has properties of a genuine distance except that its values are reals modulo *N. Proof, is an immediate check-up. Warning. The quotient X/ « cannot be formed in the framework of 1ST although it has a clear naive sense. 3.6 Remark. The almost distance d defines on X a standard separable topology f: a set E G 2X is f-open iff for each x G X there exists a real r > 0 (at least infinitesimal) such that for f G X the inequality d(£, x) < r implies £ G £. The standard topological space (X, r) is called the ns-hull of (X, cf). 3.7 Definition. Let / G *(XX) = W fl *X*X and x G *X. The function / is said to be R-continuous at the point x iff VfG*X
Z ~ x => f(0 Z f(x).
(3.2)
(Notice that it is well known that an R-standard function / is continuous at a R-standard point x G *X iff it is R-continuous at this point.) Let / G *(XX) be R-continuous at each point x G *X. For x G *X and ( 6 i : = »/i(x) put
/(*) :=nO-
(3-3)
It is clear that (3.3) determines / as a map X into X. This map is called the ns-hull of/. 3.8 Proposition. The ns-hull f of an R-continuous function f G *{XX) is continuous in respect to the topology f. Proof. Let £ be a positive real. For x G *X consider the set Exe of positive reals S such that d(x,0 < 5 implies d(f(£),f(x)) < s, i.e. from °d(£, x) < 5 it follows that 0 d(f(O> f(x)) < £- For (3.2) the set Ex^£ contains each positive R-infmitesimal 5. By R-overspill it contains some positive real S. > Consider another variant of continuity. Let (X,d), (Y,d) be standard metric spaces such that C U X U Y C 5. For a function / G Yx we have / C */, that is why we write / instead of */.
162
Taras Kudryk et al.
3.9 Proposition. Suppose that f G si(Yx) VZ,£G*X
and
£ « x =• / ( 0
~ /(x).
(3.4)
Then f is constant on each connected component of X. Proof. For a fixed x0 G s t X denote £ := {£ G X : /(£) = /(x 0 )}. Then £ is standard and closed. If x,£ G X and £ « x then by (3.1) and (3.4) /(£) = /(x). Therefore for each x G st i? h(x) C iJ, hence £ is open. > 3.10 P r o p o s i t i o n . Let f G W n * y * x , x G * X . Suppose that V I G ' I ^ ~ I 4 /(£) ~ / ( x ) - TV&en / is continuous at the point x in the usual sense, i.e. for each positive real e there exists a positive real 8 such that for any £ G *X the inequality d(£,x) < S implies d(f(£),f(x)) < e. Proof. For a real e > 0 put E := {r G *R : r > 0 and d(£,x) < r => d(f(£),f(x)) < e}. By the principle of internal definition E G W. Since {r G *I : r > 0} C E, by the R-overspill .E contains a ball of the space *X with center x and radius 6 *> 0. >
4. Galaxies Define some more equivalencies on *X. For x\, X2 G *X put x i ~ X2 s d[x\, X2)
Nonstandard Universe based on Internal Set Theory
163
X2- Then for any two R-galaxies Gi, Q2 their ns-hulls (Qi,d), (&2,d) are isometric metric spaces.
Proof. Let Q\ = *G(a?i), Q2 = *G{x2) and let / be an isometric map X on X such that f(xi) = X2- Since / C */, we write / instead of */. For the NSA-transfer principle (1.5) / is an isometry *X on *X. Therefore / is R-continuous, hence has the ns-hull/. For arbitrary &,& G *X we have d(/(6),/fe)) = M/(£i), /(&)) = °d(^i,^2), whence V 6 , 6 G**
d(/(|i),/(6)) = d(|i,£ 2 ).
(4-1)
In particular, the restriction of / to an arbitrary ns-hull Q is an isometric map G on ^. Let £ € &, then by (4.1)^2,,/(£» = d(/>i),/(I)) = d(*i,O, i-e. d(x2,f(O) e K. We see that V£ G & /(£) € S2- Evidently f~l exists and is an isometric map Q2 on Q\. > 4.6 Corollary. For a standard normed space X and points xi,a;2 G X put V ^ £ l /(£) = ^ + X2 — x\. The shift / is an isometry X onto X such that /(xi) = X2 • Therefore the ns-hulls Q\, Q2 of arbitrary galaxies Q\, Q2 of the space X are isometric. Thus it is sufficient to investigate the principal galaxy Q = *G(x), x G X, only. >
5. A standard R-infinite-dimensional Hilbert space Let rn be a fixed standard R-infinite number: TO G st (*N\N). Denote by CTO the linear space of complex valued functions x defined on TO = {0,1,... ,TO — 1}. Arithmetical operations in C m are defined pointwise. 5.1 Definition. A function x G C m is said to be integrable iff for any real e > 0 there exists a finite set A C m (obviously, "e is real" means "e G R", and "A is finite" means "cardA G N") such that for arbitrary finite E\:E2 C m we have Ac£in£2=> |V
jx(i)|-V
\x(t)\ <e.
(5.1)
The subspace of integrable functions x G C m is denoted by i\ (m) or shortly by l\. 5.2 Remark. For a; G C m put suppx := {t £ m : x(t) 7^ 0}. The support suppa; of x G i\ is enumerable: Va; G l\ cardsuppx < cardN. Indeed, if cardsuppa; > cardN, then there exists a real e > 0 such that card { t e r n : \x{t)\ > e} > cardN. Thus x does not satisfy condition (5.1). > 5.3 Definition. For x G i\ by J x denote the sum of the absolutely convergent series £ t 6 s u p p x z(£). 5.4 Remark. If x G £1, then for any real e > 0 there is a finite set A C m such that for any finite set E C m A C -E =>• | / x — X^eB^Wl < £- Notice that the
164
Taras Kudryk et al.
integral J x is a linear positive functional on £\, bounded relative to the norm
Nli:=J>l=£tesuppxl*(*)l5.5 Definition. By £2(m) or shortly by £2 we denote the space of square integrable functions x G C m with the inner product
{x\y):= J xy = YJt<mx{t)W)-
(5-2)
5.6 Remark. £2 is a standard nonseparable (complete) Hilbert space. The Kronecker deltas (Ss)S£m form an orthonormal basis of £2: Vx G £2 x = ^2s&mx(s)Ss. There is a natural standard decomposition of £2 as an orthogonal sum of its separable subspaces. At first let us decompose m. 5.7 Definition. The restriction of the equivalence *~ to m := { 0 , 1 , . . . , m — 1} determines the quotient set [i := m/ *~. For each ml G \i put ^(m1) = {x G £2 '• suppa; C m'}. 5.8 Proposition. For each m' G /x £2(1^') is a closed separable (i.e. £2{m') has orthonormal bases of cardinality cardN, for instance (5 s ) s6m ' / ) subspace of £2 and
e2=l2(m) = ®m,eite2(m').
Proof. For v G m let mv denote the equivalence class mv := {t G m : t *~ v). Observe that rriQ = N, m m _ i = (m —1) —N and for v G m\(moUm m _i) vnv = v+Z. This proves our assertion. >
6. Shift on £2(m) Denote by 3 the shift operator defined on £2(Z) by Vx G £2{1) Vt G Z 3a;(i) = x(i + 1). Notice that 3 is unitary. For x G ^ ( Z ) and 0 <
{
x(t+l) for t < m-1, x(0)
for t = m - 1.
(6.1)
6.1 Proposition. TTie operator 2) is unitarily equivalent to a (nonenumerable) orthogonal sum of copies 3 m ' , rn' £ fi = m/ *~, 0/ i/ie operator 3 •' 2J ~ © m ' g m 3m' • 7n particular, the spectrum ofty is purely continuous and fills in the circle {e%v : 0 < ip < 2TT} with the multiplicity card/x.
Nonstandard Universe based on Internal Set Theory
165
Proof. Let TO' G /J, \ (TOO U m m _ i ) . Then the subspace ^{m') of £2^) is invariant under 2). Denote 2J' = Z)\e2(m>) and for v G TO', t 6 Z, x £ ^2(Z) put 3"a;(t) = x(t + i'). Then 3 " is a unitary map ^2(Z) —> ^2(?ro') which transforms 3 in 2)':
3^3 = qj'3". Now let TO" = TOO U mm_\ and let 2J" = %)t2(m")- The map t H> m - 1 + t transforms Z_ := {t e Z : £ < 0} onto m m _ i . Observe that mo = N. Therefore the operator 3o : = I^2(m0) + 3 m ~ : is a unitary map £2(Z) —*• ^ 2 (m") which transforms 3 in 2J": 3o3 = 2)"3o- Because 2J = (©2)') © 2J", our assertion is proven. > 6.2 Remark. Another point of view on the shift 2) defined by (6.1) is natural, too. Consider £2{m) as a Hilbert space (not over C but) over the field *C of hypercomplex numbers. Now the sum in (x\y) = ^2t€m x(t)y(t) (see (5.2)) is simply the starversion of the sum of a finite set of summands. Under this treatment 2) is also standard, unitary and its spectrum consists of eigenvalues po, • • • ,pm-i which are roots of the equation pm = 1. The normed eigenfunction x which corresponds to the eigenvalue p is the following: \/t € m x(t) = -i=/9*-
7. Shift and Loeb measure Consider another approach to the same subject. Let as before m G s t ( * N \ N ) . Denote by £ the normed counting measure defined on the R-finite algebra 2lo =
W n2m by VA e $[0 £A = ±(*caid)A; notice that IA G *Q and Im = 1. To
the R-finite measure space (m,2t 0 ,^) there corresponds the standard Loeb measure space (m, 21, C). The starting condition is 2t0 C 21; V ,4 G 2t0 £ A = *£A. The cr-algebra 21 and the cr-additive measure C are obtained by the usual standard procedure of extension. The relation between C— and £— integrals is as follows. A function £ £W D (*C) m is said to be S-integrable iff Jm |£| d£ := ± Y,t&m If (*)l < * oo and for n e *N \ N m E|€(t)|>n IfWI ~ °- A Unction ^ G #• n (*C) m is said to be a lifting for a function x G (*C) m iff x(t) = °£(t) C-a.e. It is proven that a function x G (*C) m is (^-measurable and) £-integrable iff it has an S-integrable lifting. If it is so, then After this introduction denote by H the Hilbert space 1/2(^,21, C) with the scalar product Vx, y G H (x\y) = fmx(t)y(t) C(dt). If £ and r] are square Sintegrable liftings for x and y, then (x\y) = °(f |»7), where (^77) = ^ E t 6 mf( i ) r ?( i )Now define the shift 2J on H by Vx G H W G (m - 1) 2)x(t) = x(t + 1); this is meaningless for t = TO — 1, but never mind: the Loeb measure of an one-point set is: £{t} = ° ^ = 0 . Moreover, because C is cr-additive, we have £N = C(m — N) = C(t + Z) = 0. Besides, define on the linear space if0 = W fl (*C)m the shift 2J0 by Vt G (TO - 1) 2Jo£(O = £(< + 1) and 2J0f (m - 1) = 4(0). Let ^ G Ho be a lifting for x G if. Then 2J0^ is a lifting for 2Jx, i.e. 2Jx(i) = °2J0£(i) £-a.e. We see that
166
Taras Kudryk et al.
V x G H 2J:r G H. Because 2)o is a unitary map of Ho relative to scalar product (6.1), 2) is a unitary map H —> H. Denote *cr := {p G *C : pm = 1},
a:={reC:
\r\ = 1}.
7.1 Proposition. The circle a is the spectrum of the shift 2J in H = L2(rn,Qi,£). For p G »<7 denote V£ G TO x p (£) := °(p*). TTien a:p is an eigenfunction
of 2)
corresponding to the eigenvalue r = c'p. The family (x p ) pe>(T is complete in H. Proof. The set »
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
167
The Beurling Theorem for Entire Functions of Finite Order Konstantin G. Malyutin Deparment of the mathematics, Ukrainian Academy of Banking, Sumy, Ukraine
Nazim Sadyk Department of mathematics, Istanbul state university, Turkey
Abstract We extend the result of Beurling on the closure in Hp of the linear manifold F(z) • {polynomials of z} to the classes of entire functions of finite order. Key words: Beurling theorem, entire functions of finite order 2000 MSC: 30D20, 30D55 The following theorem (for p = 2 proven by Beurling, the general case was considered by T. Srinivasan and J.K. Wang [4]) is well known. Beurling theorem. Let F = IFQF 6 Hp, p > 0, where Ip is the inner function of F. Then the closure in Hp of the linear manifold F(z) • {polynomials of z} is IF • Hp.
In this paper we generalize the Beurling theorem to the classes of entire functions of finite order. Denote by E the set of all entire functions on the complex plane C. For real constants p > 0, a > 0, we define the Banach space £ £ : = { / : / € E, ||/|| Pi<7 = sup \f(z)\exp(-o-\z\>>) < w} zee and set E^ = [J Eap. The set E^ is a linear locally convex space with the topology CT>0
of inductive limit. The sequence of entire functions {/„} converges in the space E^ Email address: kgmSacademy.sumy.ua (Konstantin G. Malyutin).
168
Konstantin G. Malyutin, Nazim Sadyk
as n —> oo to a function / if and only if {/„} converges to a function / uniformly on every compact subset of C and there exists K > 0 such that |/ n (^)| < exp(K\z\p) for all z e C . The space E^° is a topological algebra with respect to the product of the functions. Linear continuous functional I on the space E^ is such that oo
oo
fc=O fc=0 l
l k
where lim k- 'P\ck\ /
= 0 [2].
k —*oc
Lemma. Let f =£ E^°. Then there exists a sequence of polynomials Pn{z) such that Pn(z) converge in E^° as n —> oo to f. OC
Proof. Let f(z) = J2 hzk. Then we set fc=0 n
^hzk.
Pn(z) = k=0
oo
Let I be a linear continuous functional on E°f. Then l(f—Pn) =
J2 ctbk converge k=n+l
as n —> oo to zero. Let / be any entire function, let {an} be the set of all zeros of the function / , and let J/(z) be canonical product of the set {an} (if the set {an} is empty then If(z) = 1) [3]. We shall say that Ij(z) is the interior factor for / . The function Qf(z) = f(z)/I/(z) is called the exterior factor of / .
Theorem. Let f = IfQf G E™. Then the closure in £^° of the linear manifold f(z) • {polynomials of z) is If • E^°. Proof, a) IfE™ includes this closure. Let g G E™, and let {Pn{z)} be the sequence of polynomials such that fPn converge in £p° as n —> oo to g. Let ak be a zero of the function f(z). Since fPn converges to g uniformly on every compact set, the f(a,k)Pn(ak) converges as n —+ oo to giflk)- Since we have f{ak)Pn(ak) = 0 for all k = 1,2,..., g(a,k) = 0, k = 1, 2,..., follows then. We just prove G := g/Ij G E^°. The following argument we shall call "standard argument". Let C(£,p) be a disc of radius p about £. Let {C(£n,pn)} be a sequence of discs. The number L = lim sup - ^ pn ^ ° ° r\U\
is called the upper density of the set (J C(£,n,pn) [3]. n-l
(1)
The Beurling Theorem for Entire Functions of Finite Order
169
If / e ££° then for all s > 0 there exists Ke > 0 such that \n\f(reie)\>-K£r", for all re%6 £ CE, where Ce is a set of upper density e and Ks is the constant dependent on e [1]. Thus, there exists a set C£ of upper density e such that \n\G(reie)\ < KErp
(2)
for all reie £ CE. Let z = re10 & Ce and let pn be the radius of the disc centered at £„, denoted C(£n,Pn), such that z e C(£n,pn). It follows from (1) that pn < j^r. By the maximum modulus principle the relation (2) is true (probably with other constant) for all z e C . b) The closure of f(z) • {polynomials of z] includes If • £^°. It is equivalent to prove that the linear manifold Qj(z) • {polynomials of z) is dense set in E^°. Really, if g G E^ and fPn —>• g in E^° then g = If G as in a). We prove that G belongs to the closure in E^° of the manifold Qf{z) • {polynomials of z}. There exists K > 0 such that \f(z)Pn(z)\ < exp[ff 1 r p ] for all z = re10. By "standard argument", we find K\ > 0 such that
|Q/(z)P n (*)|<exp[Jir 1 r'']. By Stieltyes-Vitali theorem, the sequence {QfPn} converges uniformly on every compact set, it is clear to the function G and G G £^°. Let g be any function of E™. Then g/Gf € ££°. Let {Pn(z)} be the sequence of polynomials converges in E^ to g(z). Then QjPn convergent to Q/g. Acknowledgements. The authors would like to thank the Referee for pointing out mistakes in earlier versions of the paper. References
1. A.F. Grishin, Continuity and asymptotic continuity of subharmonic functions, Mat. Fix., Anal, Geom. 1 (1994) 193-215 (Russian). 2. A.F. Leontyev, Generalization of series of exponents. Nauka, Moscow, 1981 (Russian). 3. B.Ya. Levin, Distribution of zeros of entire functions. GITTL, Moscow, 1956 (Russian). Revised English transl.: Amer. Math. Soc, Providence, Rh. I., 1980. 4. T. Srinivasan, J.K. Wang, On closed ideals of analytic functions, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 16 (1965) 49-52.
This page is intentionally left blank
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
171
Dvoretzky's Theorem by Gaussian Method Ivan Matsak a and Anatolij Plichkob a
Kyiv State University of Technology and Design, 2 Str. Nemirovich-Danchenko, Kyiv 04011 Ukraine b Institute of Mathematics, Cracow University of Technology, Cracow, Poland
Abstract A complete proof of the Dvoretzky theorem, accessible to graduate students, is given. Key words: Dvoretzky theorem, Gaussian random variables, Gaussian measures 2000 MSC: 46B20, 46B09, 28C20, 46G12 In this note we give a complete proof of the well known Dvoretzky theorem on the almost spherical (or rather ellipsoidal) sections of convex bodies. Our proof follows Pisier [18],[19]. It is accessible to graduate students. In the references we list papers containing other proofs of Dvoretzky's theorem.
1. Gaussian random variables Let £ be a real valued random variable (r.v.) on a probability space (Q,B,P). Put E£ := Jn £(w)dP. If £ > 0, then E£ = /0°° P{£ > t}dt = / 0 °°(l - P{£ < t})dt [6], 15.6. Definition 1. An r.v. g with a distribution function P{g
1 = -7=
/"*
u2 exp(—-)du , t e R ,
is called a standard Gaussian r.v. Its characteristic function is (see f.e. [3], 17.2) t2 4>{t) := Eexp(ii5) = exp(- —) . Email addresses: inforl8valtek.kiev.ua (Ivan Matsak), aplichko3kspu.kr.ua (Anatolij Plichko).
172
Ivan Matsak, Anatolij Plichko
Proposition 1. Let (
n
Eexp(it^2aj9j) = J^Eexp(itojgj) = j=i
i n
a2t2
IIexP(—1~)
=ex
t2
n
t2
P(-y^ a ?) = e x p ("^")
i.e we obtain the characteristic function of standard Gaussian r.v. However, the distribution of an r.v. is uniquely determined by its characteristic function [3], 10.3. Hence, Y^i aj9j i s a standard Gaussian r.v. • Proposition 2. There exists a constant c > 0 such that for any independent standard Gaussian r.v. (gj)™ Emax|aj| > c(lnn) 1/2 . Proof. By definition, /•oo
E max \gj | = / [1 - P{max \gA < t\]dt = i
f°[l-(P{M <*})"]<** =
Jo /•OO
/ [1 - (1 - P{|ff| > i])n)dt > (for any a > 0) > Jo f [ l - (1 - P{| 5 | > t})n]dt > a[l - (1 - P{\g\ > a})"]. Now t2
/~2~ f°°
P{\g\ > a} = yj- J
eM~\)dt>
Take a = (Inn) 1 / 2 . Then for sufficiently large n [2
((Inn)1/2 + 1)2
ft
mnN
1
P{|,| > a} > yj- ex P (-iL_^__± ) > ^_ e x p ( _ _ ) > _ .
Dvoretzky's
Theorem by Gaussian Method
173
Hence, for some c > 0 E m a x | 5 i | > ( l n n ) 1 / 2 ^ - (1 - - ) " ] > ( I n n ) 1 / 2 •{!--) j
n
e
> c- ( l n n ) 1 / 2
for sufficiently large n . •
2. Standard Gaussian random vectors and Gaussian measures A random vector ~~g = (<7j)™ with independent standard Gaussian components gj we call a standard Gaussian random vector. Theorem 1. Let g be a standard Gaussian random vector and let U be an orthogonal matrix in M n . Then U~g is a standard Gaussian random vector as well. Proof. Let
=
M?) = 0(7) = exp(-i f>?) . But the distribution of a random vector is uniquely determined by its characteristic function ([3], 10.6). Therefore, U( g ) is a standard Gaussian random vector. • Definition 2. A measure 7(^4) := ~P{g 6 A} {A C K is Borel) is called a Gaussian measure (generated by a standard Gaussian r.v. g). Of course, different standard Gaussian r.v. generate the same Gaussian measure A Gaussian random vector ~~g generates a Gaussian measure 7n(^4) = P{lf £ ^4} in K n . The fundamental property of Gaussian measure is its invariance under rotations. More exactly, Theorem 1 implies Corollary. Let a Gaussian random vector g generate a Gaussian measure "/n and let U be an orthogonal matrix in W1 . Then U~g generates the same measure j n .
Lemma 1. J*R exp(ai)c?7(t) = exp ^- .
Proof.
174
Ivan Matsak, Anatolij Plichko 2 f f i t / exp(at)d-y{t) = / exp(at)—= exp(- — )dt =
1 -/=
f /
ex
,a2-{t-a)2,J P( 7,
2
, 1 / , i2w a2 ) * = exp( — )-== / e x p ( - - ) d t = exp— . D ta
Proposition 3. Let~f = (h,...,
/„) € R n . T/ien
/" exp(7,7}rf7n(T) = exp(J||7|J2)Proof. Let 7 = (
e x P ( 7 , ? ) d 7 n ( T ) = /" exp(V M)d7 n ("t > ) =
^R"
JR"
' ^
(by the Fubini theorem) = = TT / exp(fltl)d/y(ti) i JTS.
=
(by Lemma 1) = f[exp{±f?) = exp(|||7||l) . •
3. Some mathematical analysis Definition 3. A vector function x(6) = {x\(8),... ,xn(6)) from R to R™ is said to be differentiable in a point 9 if there are usual derivatives x[ (9),..., x'n(9). A vector function x'{6) = (x[(6),... ,x'n(0)) is called a derivative of x{9). A mapping F(x) from R™ to R is called differentiable in a point x if there exist a linear functional (denote it by F'(x) and its using to y e R n by (F'(x),y)) such that F(y) - F(x) = (F'(x), y-x)+
o(\\y - x\\)
i£\\y-x\\^0. Proposition 4. Let a vector function x(9) be differentiable in a point 6 and let a map F : R n —> R be differentiable in x(S). Then the usual function F(x(9)) is differentiable in 9, moreover [F(x(9))}' =
{F'(x(8)),x'(9)).
Proof. Indeed, F(x(ti)) - F(x(9)) = (F'(x(9)), x{0) - x{0)) + o(\\x{0) - x(6)\\) Now, divide by 1? — 9 and pass to limit. •
Dvoretzky's Theorem by Gaussian Method
175
Proposition 5. Let $(£) be a convex measurable scalar function and let f(x) be an integrable function on a measurable space (A,T,,fj,). Then *[ / f(x)dfi] < - ^ l *\n(A) • f{x)]d» . JA V\A) J A Proof. Let, first, / be a simple function taking values ti on sets Ai. Then
To finish the proof one can use a passage to limit. • Recall also the Markov (or Chebyshev) inequality fA f(x)dfi > t • fj,{x : f(x) > t} which (in the case of strictly increasing function Phi) we can write in the form tx{x : f{x) >t} = fi{x : 0>(f(x)) > $(t)} <
JA
)}
^
** .
(1)
4. Sobolev inequality T h e o r e m 2 . ("Sobolev inequality"). Let F :Rn —> K be a differ-entiable map and let $ be a convex measurable function in M.. Then f *[F(x)-
[
F(y)dln(y)]dln(x)<
f
f
<S>£{F'(x),y)]dln(y)dln(x)
.
Proof. For fixed elements x,y eRn and 9 G [0, f ] put x(9) = x • sin 0 + y • cos 9. Then, by Proposition 4, F(x) - F(y) = F(x£))z
- F(x(0)) = [' [F(x(9))]'d9 = [ * {F'(x(9)),x'(9))d9 . Jo Jo
This equality and Proposition 5 give $[F(x) - F{y)\ = $>l[2(F'(x(9)),x'(9))d9} Jo
< - [' *£(F'(x(9)),x'(9)}]d9 2 K Jo
.
Integrating the last inequality over x and y we obtain / f
f
- r
I
$[F(x) - F(y)]dln{y)dln{x)
<
$£(F'(x(9)),x'(9)}]d9dln(y)dln(x).
(2)
176
Ivan Matsak, Anatolij Plichko
Now observe that x'(9) = x cos 9 — y sin 9 , that for every fixed 9 the map (x, y) —> (x(9),x'(9)) is a rotation in R n x M.n an that (this is the crucial point) j n x 7 n is invariant with respect to this map. Thus the right-hand side of (2) is equal to
/
/
^(F'(xly)}dln(y)dln(x).
(3)
By Proposition 5, /
$[F(x)- I F(y)dln(y)]dln(x) < [
f $[F(x) - F(y)}dln(y)dln(x) . (4)
From (4),(2) and (3) we get the theorem. •
5. Gaussian random elements in normed spaces. Second weak moment Definition 4. We say that X is a standard Gaussian random element (r.e.) in a normed space E if there are linearly independent elements (ej)™ in E and independent scalar standard Gaussian r.v. (5*)™ such that X = J2™ 9iei • Definition 4 is connected with the definition of standard Gaussian random vector (Section 2) in the following way. Consider a map T : R n —> E : n
T(ai,...,an)
= ^2atet
.
(5)
1
This map generates a standard random vector Kn.
T~1X(LJ)
= (gi(ui),... ,gn(ui)) in
Proposition 6. Let (X^)™ be independent identically distributed standard Gaussian r.e. in a normed space E and let Y2T at = -'•• Then J ] " a^X^ is a standard Gaussian r. e. with the same distribution as X^.
Proof. Let Xk = £"=1 9kiet. Then m
m
22 akXk = ^ 1
fc=i
n
n
m
a
k ^2 gkiei = ^£2(^2 ak9ki)ei • i=i
j=i fc=i
Since (gki)k,i all are independent and (by Proposition 1) for every i , SfcLi afc5fci is a standard Gaussian r.v., hence ^ZfeLi ak^k is a standard Gaussian r.e. with the same distribution as Xk. • Definition 5. The second weak moment of r.e. X in a normed space E is, by definition, a = a(X) := sup (E/2(X))1/2 . ll/ll=i,/e£* Proposition 7. Let X = Y^i 9iei be a standard Gaussian r.e. in a normed space E and let T be defined by (5). Then a = ||T||.
Dvoretzky's Theorem by Gaussian Method
177
Proof. Obviously, without restriction of generality, one can suppose lin(ei)™ = E. Let (fi) be the biorthogonal to (e») functional. Then for / G E* we have / = Y,i Cifi and a= sup ( E < X > e i , f > / 2 ) 2 ) 1 / 2 = sup (E(]T> Cl ) 2 ) 1/2 = 11/11=1 i i II/II=I V
c 1/2 r C2E 1/2 SU SU T T D sup ( J 2 & = P ( E ' ) = P ii */n = II *II = II II • ii/n=i i ii/n=i i i[/n=i 6. Tail behavior (the concentration of measure phenomenon)
Theorem 3. (Maurey-Pisier; [19], Theorem 4.7). Let X = YX 9iei Gaussian r.e. in a normed space E. Then for any t > 0
be a
P{|!|X|| - E||X||| >t}< 2 e x p ( - ^ ) . Proof. Let T be the operator of Section 5. Then (6) is equivalent to r ot2 n e R : HITill - / \\Tx\\dJn\ >t}< 2 e x p ( - ~ ) . ln{x
standard (6)
(7)
Put F(x) = \\Tx\\ and suppose temporary that || • || is differentiable. Since for any x, y e R" li^O-i^UIITtx-^II^IITIHIz-ylb, Il-^'(a;)l|2 < o" for every i e R " (recall, a = \\T\\ !). Thus, by Proposition 3, for any Ael
I exp[^(F'(x),y)}d^(y) = exp[J A ^ F ' t o H l ] < e X p[^) 2 a 2 ] . (8) Taking in Theorem 2 $(<) = exp(Ai), we get /
exP[A{F(x) - / f
f
F(y)dln(y)}]dln(x)
<
eM^{F'(x),y)}dln(y)dln(x)<
(by (8)) < /
(9)
exp[|(^) 2 ]d 7 n (x) = . 1 . \TCO~,
2
I
exp[-(^-)2] • Using the Markov inequality (1), taking there $(t) = exp(Ai) , f(x) = F(x) — / R n F{y)drin{y) and fj, = in{x), we get from (9) ln{x
: F(x) - JF{y)dln{y)
> t} < e x p [ i ( ^ ) 2 - At] .
178
Ivan Matsak, Anatolij Plichko
Putting A = T~\2 we obtain ln{x
: F(x) - J F{y)dln{y) > t} < e x p [ - ^ ^ ] .
Clearly, the same inequality holds for —F, so we finally obtain (7), and hence (6), for differentiable norms. To finish the proof, observe that in the finite dimensional space lin(ej)™ one can approximate any norm by differentiable one as exact as need. • Remark. The estimation (6) is an important result in theory of Banach valued Gaussian r.e. It demonstrates that the distribution of \\X\\ is concentrated near E||X|| as dense as the distribution of Gaussian r.v. a • g near 0. In a somewhat different form: P{|||X[|-m||X||l>i}<2(l-$(^)),
(10)
(where mj[X|| is the median of \\X\\ and $(£) is the distribution function of g), the concentration phenomenon is presented in books Ledoux-Talagrand ([14], 3.1) and Lifshits ([15], Chapt.12). In fact, the concentration phenomenon in the form (10) was contained as far as in Borell [2] and Sudakov-Tsirelson [21]. In connection with Theorem 3, note also papers Fernique [7], Landau-Shepp [13] and Skorokhod [20], where for the first time were established exponential integrability of the norm for Gaussian r.e., and Yurinskii [24], where for the first time was proposed the martingale approach to estimations of probabilities of large deviations for the norm of sums of independent r.e. in Banach spaces.
7. Levy's inequality Recall that an r.e. X in a normed space E is called symmetric if P{X G ^4} = P{X G -.4} for any Borel set A C E. Theorem 4. (Levy's inequality; [11], II.3). Let (Xj)™ be symmetric independent r.e. in a normed space E and S = Y^i Xi • Then for every t > 0
2P{||5|| >0>P{max||Xi|| > t} . i
Proof. Put r = r(w) = min{i : ||Xi|| > t}. Then P{||S||>t}>£p{||S||>t,T = i}. Now since (Xi,...
,Xn) and (—X\,...,
-Xi-\,Xi,
—Xi+\,...,
(11) —Xn) are identically
distributed and r depends on {||Xj||}™ only, we have P{||5|| > t , r =i} = P { \ \ X i - i y > t , r = i},
Dvoretzky's
Theorem by Gaussian Method
179
where Ri = S — Xi. This equality and (11) imply 2 P { | | 5 | | >t}> £ P { | | S | |
> t
,
T=
i} + P { | | * -IU\\>t,T
= i}.
(12)
By triangle inequality
2HJM < ||X4 + Ri\\ + | | * -Ri\\ = \\S\\ + | | * - Ri\\ . Hence P{||5|| >t,T = i} + P { | | * - iJiH > t , T = i} > P{||5|| > t \ / | | * -Ri\\>t,T P { 2 | | * | | >2t,r
= i}> P{\\S\\ + | | * - i?i|| > 2 t , r = i} >
= i} = P { | | * | | > t , r = i} = P { r = i} .
This inequality and (12) imply n
2P{||5|| > t } > V p { T = i}=P{max||*|| > t} . D ^—' i=l
i
Corollary There exists c > 0 sitcft t/ioi for any normed space E and any standard Gaussian r.e. X = ^ " ^ e , in E E\\X\\ >c-min||ei|| -(lnn) 1 / 2 . Proof. Evidently, standard Gaussian r.e. are symmetric. Hence one can use Levy's inequality taking S = X and * = giCi. We have for any t 2P{\\X\\ > t} >P{ma.x\\giel\\
> t} .
^
Integrating over t we receive E||X|| > -EmaxllfteiH > - min || ei || • E m a x ^ l > Z
^
Z i
i
(Proposition 2) > c • min ||ej|| • (Inn) 1 ' 2 . D i
8. Dvoretzky-Rogers t h e o r e m T h e o r e m 5. (Dvoretzky-Rogers, [5]). Let || • || be a norm on MN and let D be the ellipsoid of maximal volume inscribed in the unit ||-||-6an B. Then there exists a basis (ei)f, orthonormal with respect to D, such that 1 > ||ej|| > 2~(~N~1^(-N~^ , i = 1,...,N-1 . Proof. We choose the basis (ei) inductively in the following way. Let ei be a vector in D with maximal norm (clearly ||ei|| = 1). Given e i , . . . ,e,, choose e^+i in Dt~\ (e\,..., ei)1- with maximal possible norm (_!_ is the orthogonal complement with respect to D).
180
Ivan Matsak, Anatolij Plichko
Then for any x € lin(e»,..., ejv) n D
INI < INI •
(13)
Now consider the ellipsoid V*" 1 ^ 2
N
TN a2
i=i
Of course, this ellipsoid depends on i and scalars a and b which we shall choose late on. If X)j=i ajej ^ ^ then Y^L~ a,jej € aD and thus || 2 i ~ ajej\\ < a- I n the same wa
y' II Y!j=ia3ei\\ ^ & a n d tnus > by ( 13 ): II YH ajej\\ < Hei\\Choosing a = 1/2 , 6 = l/(2||ei||), we get that U C B. On the other hand
so necessarily 1
1
2^'(2||ei||)^-1 or He,!! > 2-( JV " 1 )/( JV - 1 ). • Corollary 1. Let E be an N-dimensional normed space and N = [y]. Then there exist {ei)i C E such that ||ej|| > | and for any (a^ C K
IIE«^II<(E«?)1/2i
(14)
i
Corollary 2. For even/ N-dimensional normed space E there exists a sub space E C E of dimension N = [y] and E-valued standard Gaussian r.e. X with E||X|| = 1 and cr2(X) < c/lnN, where c > 0 is an absolute constant. Proof. Let X = ^2i 9iei where (gi) are independent Gaussian r.v. and (e^) are from Corollary 1. Then, by (14),
a(X) := sup ^f(X)Y'2 111/1 = 1
= sup (f> 2 (e 8 )) 1 / 2 = sup || V V e J 1 / 2 < 1 . 111/1 = 1 ~l
l|o||2 = l
On the other hand, by Corollary of Theorem 4 E||X|| > ci(lnTV)1/2 > c 2 (lniV) 1/2 . Now put X = X/E||X|| . •
9. Two geometric lemmas
~y
Dvoretzky's Theorem by Gaussian Method
181
Lemma 2. Let || • || be any norm on R n with unit ball B and unit sphere S. Let 8 > 0. There is a 5-net A C S with cardinality cardA < (1 + ~)n . o
(15)
Proof. Let A be a maximal subset of S such that \\a — b\\ > 8 for all a, b G A , a ^ b. Clearly, by maximality, A is a <5-net of S. To majorize c&idA we note that balls a + f-B , a G A are disjoint and included into (1 + |)£?. Therefore £
vol(a + | f i ) < vol((l + ^)B) = (1 + |)»volB ;
hence cardA • (^)"voLB < (1 + ^)™volB . This inequality implies (15). • Lemma 3. For each e > 0 there is a 5 = S(e) , 0 < S < 1, «n£/i ifte following property. Let || • || fee an arbitrary norm on W1 with the unit sphere S. Let A be a 8-net in S and let X\,..., xn be elements of a normed space E . If for every a= (ai,...,an) GA n
1-6 < \\^2akxk\\
then for every a G S n
( 1 + e ) " 1 < |l^a f c xfc|| < 1 + e;. I
Proof. There is a 0 in A such that \\a — a°\\ < 8 hence a — a0 + \\a' with |Ai| < 8 and a' G S. Continuing this process we obtain a = a0 + Xia1 + X2a2 + • • • with aj G A and |Aj| < Sj. It follows that
HEa fc x fe ||<^^||f:4^ll<^. 1
j>0
fe=l
Similarly ii V -
IV^ o \\}_,akxk\\ I I>^ I \\^4x k\\
ii
6(1 + 6) ^ , - ^—^ > l - 6. - -8(1f +- 8)f = y -1-38y .
Hence, if 8 > 0 is chosen small enough so t h a t 1-35 1 ~i T - T~,— 1 —6 1+ e
and
, 1+ 8 1 ^i 1 < 1 + £ > 1 —8
we obtain the announced result. Note that one can find a suitable 8 depending only on £ (and independent on n). •
182
Ivan Matsak, Anatolij Plichko
10. Dvoretzky's theorem Theorem 6. (Dvoretzky). For each e > 0, there is a number r\ = jj(e) > 0 with the following property. Every normed space E of dimension N contains a subspace of dimension n = [ryln JV] which is (1 + s) 2 — isomorphic to V^. Let us present first the idea of proof. We take independent copies X\,..., Xn of r.e. X from Corollary 2 of Dvoretzky-Rogers theorem, n sa lniV, which is determined on a probability space (fi,S, P ) . Let Cl(n,e) be the set of all ui in Q. such that for every a = (ai,... ,an) in the unit sphere S of Euclidean space R n
(l +
1
n
e)- <\\Y/^Xl(u;)\\
We will show that P{fi(n, e)} > 0 provided that n is not too large and precisely provided n < r]/a2. This clearly yields Theorem 6. Now the Proof. Let E be the subspace and X be an r.e. from Corollary 2 of Theorem 5. Let X\,... ,Xn be independent copies of X (n we choose late on). Then for any a = ( a i , . . . ,an) in S the r.e. J^i ak^k has the same distribution as X (Proposition 6). Thus we have E|| X)"akXk\\ = 1. Therefore, by Theorem 3, for any S > 0 2r ! > 2
™
Fi2
P{||| ^> fc X fe |( - 1| ><&} < 2 e x p ( - ^ ) < 2 e x p ( - - ) . Let A be as in Lemmas 2 and 3 with ||a|| = ||a||2- Then preceding inequality implies P{3aG.4: ||| 5]a fc X fc || - 1| > 6} < 2(card^)exp(
-) <
l
(by Lemma 2) < 2 ( 1 + .In.
2exp(— exp
.
52.
2n S2 exp( -) < o o~z .In <52. n
T)
^) = 2exp
(16)
-) .
Now let 8 = S(e) be the function of e, given by Lemma 3. Let we choose n so that
Then the probability (16) is not greater than 2exp(—^j-). Clearly, we can always assume that a is small enough (say a < (5/2), otherwise there is nothing to prove. Hence we can assume that the right side of (16) < 1. We than obtain that with positive probability, for every a G A
\\\J2akXk(u)\\-l\<6
Dvoretzky's Theorem by Gaussian Method
183
i.e. n
1-6
< ||^OfeX f c (w)|| < 1 + 5 . i
By Lemma 3 (recall, we choose S = 6(e)\), we conclude that with positive probability for all a £ S n
(l + er^U^afcXfcMU^l + e. I
Therefore, there exists UIQ £ fl such that for Xk = Xk(uJo) and for every a G 5 n
1
(l + e)-
By homogenity of the norm it means that lin(:Efc)™ is (1 + e)2-isomorphic to Zj • To satisfy (17) put S3 (recall, a2 < c/lniV, by Corollary 2 of Theorem 5). • Acknowledgement. The first version of this note was written when the second author visited Politecnico di Milano. He express his thanks to P.Terenzi for hospitality and valuable remarks. The authors also express they thanks to M.Ostrovskii for valuable references.
References 1. Y. Benyamini and J. Lindenstrauss, Geometric Nonlinear Functional Analysis. V.I, Colloq. Publ. Amer. Math. Soc, Rhode Island, 2000. 2. C. Borell, The Brunn-Minkowski inequality in Gauss space , Invent. Math. 30 (1975) 207-216. 3. H. Cramer, Mathematical Methods of Statistics. Princeton Univ. Press, N.J., 1946. 4. A. Dvoretzky, Some results on convex bodies and Banach spaces. Proc. Int. Symp. on Linear Spaces, Jerusalem, 1961, 123-160. 5. A. Dvoretzky and C.A. Rogers, Absolute and unconditional convergence in normed linear spaces, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 36 (1950) 192-197. 6. W. Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and its Applications. V.II, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1966. 7. K. Fernique, Integrabilite des vecteurs gaussiens, C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris, ser. A 270 (1970) 1698-1699. 8. T. Figiel, A short proof of Dvoretzky's theorem on almost spherical sections, Compositio Math., 33 (1976), 297-301. 9. T. Figiel, J. Lindenstrauss and V.D. Milman, The dimension of almost spherical sections of convex bodies, Ada Math. 139 (1977) 53-94.
184
Ivan Matsak, Anatolij Plichko
10. Y. Gordon, On Dvoretzky's theorem and extensions of Slepian's lemma, Israel Semin. Geom. Aspects Fund. Anal, Technion preprint series No. MT-636 (1983) (4) II.l.l-H.1.25. 11. J.P. Kahane, Some Random Series of Functions. D.C. Heath and Co, Lexington, 1968. 12. J.L. Krivine, Sous-espaces de dimension finie des espaces de Banach reticules, Ann. of Math. 104 (1) (1976) 1-29. 13. H.J. Landau and L.A. Shepp, On the supremum of a Gaussian process, Sankhya 32 (1970) 369-378. 14. M. Ledoux and M. Talagrand, Probability in Banach Spaces. Isoperimetry and Processes. Springer, Berlin, 1991. 15. M.A. Lifshits, Gaussian Random Functions. TViMS, Kyiv, 1995 (Russian). 16. V.D. Milman, New proof of the theorem of Dvoretzky on sections of convex bodies, Funkts. Anal. Prilozh. 5 (5) (1971) 28-37 (Russian). 17. V.D. Milman and G. Schechtman, Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces. Lect. Notes in Math. 1200 (1986). 18. G. Pisier, Probabilistic methods in the geometry of Banach spaces, Lecture Notes in Math., 1206 (1986) 167-241. 19. G. Pisier, The Wolume of Convex Bodies and Banach Space Geonetry. Cambridge Univ. Press, Cambridge e.a., 1989. 20. A.V. Skorokhod, A note on Gaussian measures in a Banach space, Teor. Veroyatn. Prim. 15 (1970) 519-520 (Russian). 21. V.N. Sudakov and B.S. Tsirel'son, Extremal properties of half-spaces for spherically invariant measures, Zap. Nauch. Sem. L.O.M.I. 41 (1974) 14-24 (Russian). 22. A. Szankowski, On Dvoretzky's theorem on almost spherical sections of convex bodies, Israel J. Math. 17 (1974) 325-338. 23. L. Tzafriri, On Banach spaces with unconditional bases, Israel J. Math. 17 (1974) 84-93. 24. V.V. Yurinskii, Exponential bounds for large deviations, Teor. Veroyatn. Prim. 19 (1974) 152-153 (Russian).
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
185
On the Inverse Problem of Scattering Theory for a Differential Operator of the Second Order Khanlar R. Mamedov, Hamza Menken Mersin University-Turkey
Abstract Direct and inverse problem of scattering theory (IPST) are investigated for the differential equation -y" + q(x)y = X2y on half line containing a spectral parameter in the boundary condition y'(0) + (a0 + iaiX + a2X2)y(0) = 0. Key words: Sturm-Liouville operator, inverse problem of scattering theory, scattering function, scattering data 2000 MSC: 34B24, 34A55
1. Introduction Consider the Sturm-Liouville equation on the half line -y" + q(x)y = X2y (0 < x < oo)
(1)
with the spectral parameter dependent boundary condition y'(O) + (a o + iaiA + a2A2)2/(O) = O. Email addresses: hanlarSaport .ru;[email protected] (Khanlar R. Mamedov,), hmenkenSmersin.edu.tr (Hamza Menken ).
(2)
186
Khanlar R. Mamedov,, Hamza Menken
Here q(x) is real-valued function satisfying the condition
/ (l + x)\q{x)\dx
(3)
and ao, ai, a.2 are real numbers with a\ > 0, a.i > 0. In this paper, we study the inverse problems of scattering theory (IPST) for the boundary problem of (1), (2). Before we discuss our problem we shall recall some works which has the spectral parameter dependent boundary condition. The boundary problems with spectral parameter dependent boundary condition for second order ( or higher order) of differential equations are interesting with their applications, and we refer to [4], [13], [14]. The many spectral properties of such this boundary problems were investigated with different methods by the many authors. About this subject it was given more informations and references in [18], and also in [17]-[5]. The other interesting problem with spectral parameter dependent boundary condition for equation (1) is the inverse problems of spectral analysis, so that it is the construction of the differential operator associated the equation (1) with respect to some spectral characteristics (to two spectres, spectral function, scattering data, etc. ). In finite interval and half line, this problem with spectral parameter dependent boundary condition were investigated with different methods in [l]-[6]. In [16], on the half line the inverse problem was investigated with respect to spectral function for the boundary problem -y" + q(x)y = Ay, y(0) = 8(\)y'(0) where 9(X) is an arbitrary analytic function whose imaginary part is non-negative and q(x) is a real-valued function. Similar problem was investigated in [6] in case
fc=l
A f c
"A
where the numbers a, 6, Afc, pk (k = 1, 2,...) are real coefficients and pu > 0. Also, in the similar cases, on the finite interval too, it is obtained results with respect to two spectres and spectral function, and now the problem on half line that we study is about the inverse problem of scattering theory. In [11],[12] it was considered the boundary problem without any spectral parameter in the boundary condition -y" + q{x)y = X2y,
(0 < x < oo)
(4)
2/(0) - 0 (5) where q{x) is a real valued function satisfying the condition (3), and the inverse problem of scattering theory of the boundary problem (4), (5) was solved. That the boundary value problem (4), (5) has bounded solutions u(X,x) for —oo < A < oo and A = iXk {k = 1, n), moreover, as x —> oo u(X, x) = e'iXkX - S(X)eiXx + o(l), ( - oo < A < oo)
On the Inverse Problem of Scattering Theory for a Differential Operator 187 and
u(i\k,x) = mke-iXkX(l
+ o(l)), (k = l^n),
respectively. Thus, the collection {S(A) (—00 < A < 00); A&; mt {k = l,n) } provides a complete description of the behavior at infinity of all radial wave functions. The collection of quantity {S(A) (—00 < A < 00); A&; m,k (k = l,n) } that specify the behavior all radial wave functions u(X, x) at infinity, will be referred to as scattering data of the boundary value problem (4), (5). In terms of the scattering data, the potential q(x) is recover uniquely (see [17], p. 217). In [8], the inverse problem of scattering theory of the boundary problem -y" + q(x)y = X2y, (0 < x < 00) y'(0) = %(0) was solved where h is any real number. Similar problems for the boundary problem (1), (2) they are considered in [9] and in this paper. The some properties of scattering data were investigated in [10]. According to [12], for any A from closed upper-half plane, the equation (1) has a solution e(A, x) described by e(A,z)=elAx+ /
K(x,t)eiXtdt
(6)
Jx
and for the kernel function K(x, t) the inequality
\K(x,t)\ < ^(^)ex P |a 1 (x) - < n ( ^ ) } holds where
a{x) = I
\q{t)\dt, 0^)=
Jx
I
a(t)dt.
Jx
Moreover,
K{x,x) = -J
q{t)dt.
The solution e(A, x) is an analytic function of A in the upper half plane Im A > 0 and is continuous on the real line. The following estimates hold through the half plane Im A > 0,
\e(X,x)-eiXx\ < L^-cnix+^expi-lmXx
+ o-jix)}
(7)
and \e'(X,x) -iXeiXx\
< a(x)exp {-Im Xx + 0\{x)}
(8)
for real A ^ 0, the functions e(X,x) and e(—X,x) form a fundamental system of solutions of the equation (1) and their Wronskian is equal to 2iA :
W{e(X,x),e(-X,x)}
= e'{X,x)e(-X,x) - e{X,x)e'(-X,x) = 2iX.
(9)
188 2.
Khanlar R. Mamedov,, Hamza Menken Main Results
Let u>(x, A) be a solution of the equation (1) satisfying the initial-value conditions ui(X, 0) = 1,
u>'(\, 0) = - ( a 0 + iaiX + a2X2).
Theorem 1. The identity ——-— 2i\u{\,x) e'(A,O) + (ao + iaiA + Qf2A2)e(O,A)
=
^ ^ y _ v '
5(A)e(A y K
'
x) ' '
(10) '
v
holds for all A ^ 0, where = 1 j
e'(X, 0) + (q 0 + faiA + a2A2)e(A, 0) e'(A,O) + (ao + iaiA + a2A2)e(A,O)
and 5(A) = 5(-A). Proof. Since two function e(—X,x) and e(A,x) form a fundamental system of solutions to equation (1) for all A ^ 0, we can write LO(X, A) = ci(X)e(X,x) +c 2 (A)e(A,x) where m C l ( j
_ e'(A, 0) + (a 0 + iaiX + ct2A2)e(A, 0) ~ -2iX
and ... C2(A) =
e'(A,O) + (a o + iaiA + a2A2)e(A,O) 2iA •
Then, w(a. A) =
i U 0 ) + (ao+ ia,A+ a a A » ) ^ 0 ) e ( A > ^ + —2zA 2 | e'(A,0) + (Qo + ia 1 A + Q 2 A )e(A,0)--—2?A
Let £(A, 0) = e^A, 0) + (a 0 + ioc\X + a2A2)e(A, 0). Since q(x) is real, it follows that e(-A,0) = e(A,0), and hence that £(A,0) ^ 0 for all real A ^ 0. To prove this we assume that there is a non-zero Ao G (—00,00) such that E(X0,0) = e'(A0,0) + (a 0 + i^X + a 2 A 2 )e(A 0 ,0) = 0 or e'(A0,0) = - ( a o + i a i A + a 2 A 2 )e(A 0 ,0). From the formula (9) we get e'(A0,0)e(Ao,0) - e(A0,0)e'(A0,0) = 2iXo or -2iaiA 0 |e(A 0 ,0)| 2 = 2iA0.
On the Inverse Problem of Scattering Theory for a Differential Operator 189 Since a\ > 0 we have a construction, hence we have that E(X, 0) ^ 0 for all real A ^ 0. According to the formula (11) we obtain „ , , 2iA^A'^ ^ ^ = J(X^) - S(X)e(X,x) y y J y e'(A,0) + (ao+iQiA + a 2 A 2 )e(A,0) ' ' ' ; where 1
, '
=
e'(A, 0) + (q 0 + jaiX + a2A2)e(A, 0) e'(A,0) + (ao + iaiA + a2A2)e(A,0)
and £(A,0) = e'(-A, 0) + (a 0 - «*i A + a 2 A 2 )e(-A, 0) = E(-X, 0),
5(A) = 5FA). This proves the theorem. • T h e o r e m 2. The function E(X, 0) may have only a finite number of zeros on the half plane Im A > 0, they are all simple and lie on the imaginary. Proof. From the proof of Theorem 1, since -E(A, 0 ) ^ 0 for all real A ^ 0, the point A = 0 is the possible real zero of the function E(X,0). Since the function E(X, 0) is analytic in the upper half plane Im A > 0 we have that the zeros of E(X, 0) are at most countable. Now to show that the set of the zeros of E(X, 0) is bounded we assume, by way of contradiction, that this set is bounded, so that there exist the numbers A& such that these numbers satisfy the relation E(Xk, 0) = 0 for Im A& > 0 and |Afc| —> oo or e'(Afc,0) = -(ao + ia\X + a2A2)e(Afc,0). From the relation (8) and last statement we have that lim e(Afc,0) = 0 as \Xk\ —• oo. On the other hand, k—»oc
according to (7) it follows that lim e(Afc, 0) = 0. This contradiction shows that the k—>oc
set {A*;} is bounded. Hence, the zeros of the function E(X, 0) is bounded and is form at most countable set having 0 the only possible limit point. In [9], it was shown that the zeros of the function E(X,0) are simple and are purely imaginary. Now we shall prove that the function E(X,0) has finitely many zeros in the half plane Im A > 0. This is obvious if -E(0,0) =/= 0, because under this assumption, the set of zeros cannot have limit points. To verify that the number of zeros of E(X, 0) is finite in the general case too, we show that the distance between neighboring zeros is bounded away from zero. We let 5 denote the infimum of the distances between two neighboring zeros of .E(A, 0), and show next that S > 0. Otherwise, we could exhibit a sequence of zeros, iiXk \ and {iXk} of the zeros the function E(X,0), such that lim (Afc - Afc) = 0, Afc > Afc > 0, and maxA^ < M. Then it follows from estimate (9) that, for A large fc enough, the inequality e(iX,x) > \e~Xx holds uniformly with respect to x G [A, oo) and A £ [0, oo) whence
190
Khanlar R. Mamedov,, Hamza Menken oc _
/
e-2AM
e{i\k,x)e{iXk,x)dx >
g M
.
(12)
A
On the other hand, according to the formula (11) in [9] we have oc
0 = (Afc - Afc) / e(iXk, x)e(iXk, x)dx + a 2 ((A fc - Afc) • o
•e(iXk, 0)e(iAfc, 0) + axe{iXk, 0)e{iXk, 0).
(13)
Letting k —> oo, we get a 1 |e(iA fc ,0)| 2 = 0. This relation gives a contradiction if a.\ > 0. If ot\ = 0, from the formula (13) we write oc
0 = / e(i\k, x)e(iXk,x)dx o
+ e(iXk,0)e(iXk, 0) =
A
= o
A
e(iXk,x) \e(i\k,x) - e(iXk,x)\ dx + / e(iXk,x)e{iXk,x)dx + o oc
+ / e(iXk, x)e(iXk, x)dx +
e(iXk,0)e(iXk,0).
A
Taking limit as k —> oo, we get oo
0 > lim
k^ooJ A
e(iXk,x)e(iXk,x)dx.
But this contradict with the inequality (12). Thus, the assumption is not true, so that 5 > 0. Thus the function E(X,0) has finitely many zeros. This completes the proof. • Theorem 3. The function 1 — S(X) is the Fourier transform of a function Fs(x) of the form FS(X) = FP(X)+FP(X), where Fg(x) sup
Fs2\x)
£
L\(—oo,oo),
whereas Fg (x)
< oo.
— oc
Proof. From the formula (6) it follows that oo
fK(O,t)eiXtdt,
e(A,0) = l + o
6
L2{—oo,oo) and
On the Inverse Problem of Scattering Theory for a Differential Operator 191 oo
e'(A, 0) = iX - K(0,0) + I"Kx{0, t)eiXtdt. o We shall use the following notations for shortly: <po(X) = a0 + iaiX + a2X2 - q0;
go = K(0,0);
Ki(t)=Kx{0,t)+aoK(0,t);
K2(t) = axK{Q, t) + a2Kt(0,t);
K3(t)=aiK(O,t)-a2Kt{O,t) and oo
^(-A) = IK^ty^dt,
j = 1,2,3.
o Then we have _ s(x)
1
2iA(l + a2q0) + Xx(-A) + zAJf2(-A) - K^X) - iXK3(X)
=
<po{X)+iX{l +
a2qo)+K1(-X)+iXK2(-X)
Every one of the functions ~
iX(l + a2q0)
fl(X)
=
7TT
Vo(X) ~ MX)
~
£!(-A)+a£2(-A) 7^-T
, 72 (A) =
,
fo{X) K1(X) + iXK3(X) =
MV
•
is the Fourier transformation of a summable function. Hence we have 1-S(A)=
where
^ 1 + K(-X) _ _ _ _ /(A)=2/ 1 (A) + / 2 (A)-/ 3 (A), ^ ( - A ) = /1(A) + / 2 (A).
We can rewrite the formula (14) as form
1 - 5(A) = /(A) [{l + (1 - MAiV-^t-A)}' 1 - l] + +/(A)-/(A)| ^ 1—-\ (15) T-[ l + |l-/i(AiV- 1 ) J ft:(-A)| 1 + AX-A)J where 1, h(X)=
2-|A|, 0,
* / |A| < 1 if 1 < A < 2 if
|A| > 2
192
Khanlar R. Mamedov,, Hamza Menken
is the Fourier transform of the function h(x) € Li(—00,00). Also, h(\N~l) Fourier transform of the function h^ix) = Nh(xN), and i\imJ\f(x)-hN*f(x)\\Li=O
is the
(16)
for all f(x) G Li(—00, 00), where h^ * f(x) is the convolution of functions hpf(x) and f(x) from L\{—00, 00). Note that the convolution h^* fix) of functions h^ix) and f(x) from Li( —00, 00) is denned as h^ * fix) = f hff(x — t)f(t)dt.
In general,
— oc
recall that the Fourier transform of the convolution 00
/ * g(x) = J f{x- t)g{t)dt —00
of two functions from L\{—00, 00) equals the product /(A)g(A) of their Fourier transforms, and the norm of the convolution does not exceed the product of norms:
II/^IIL^II/IILJMI^Consequently, if ||/|| L l < 1, then the series
-f(x) + f*f(x)-f*f*f(x)
+ ...
converges in the metric of L\{—00,00), its sum belongs to this space and its Fourier transform is equal to
-/(A) + {/(A} 2 - {/(A} 3 +... = {1 + /(A}" 1 - 1 . We conclude, from (16) and the previous argument that for N large enough, the function 1 + < 1 - h{\N~l) \ / ( - A ) - 1 is the Fourier transform of function from Li(—00, 00). It follows that the sum of the first two terms in the right-hand side of (15) is also the Fourier transform of a summable function Fg (x). Finally, since hiXN'1) = 0 for |Aj > 2N, the third term in the same formula vanishes for |A| > 2N and is bounded. As such, it is the Fourier transform of a bounded function Fg (x) S Li{—00, 00), and the theorem is proved. • Using the identity (10), Theorem 2 and Theorem 3, as in [9], we obtain GelfandLevitan-Marcenko's basic equation which has important role in the solution of IPST /•OC
F[x + y)+ K(x, y)+
K{x, t)F(t + y)dt = 0, (x < y < 00) Jx
where
Fix) = Y,™2ke-XkX + — / k=\
(1 -
Si\)yXxdx
J
-°D
and "the norming constants" are
m-k> = T \eix,i\k)\2dx+ai\la2Xk JO
|e(Q,iAfc)|2.
l
*k
On the Inverse Problem of Scattering Theory for a Differential Operator 193 The collection {S'(A) (—00 < A < 00); A&; rrik {k = l,n) } which is defined as above is defined as the scattering data of the boundary problem (1), (2). Theorems on uniquely construction of the boundary problem (1), (2) with respect to the scattering data are given in [9].
References 1. P. A. Binding, P. J. Browne, B. A. Watson, Inverse spectral problems for SturmLiouville equations with eigenparameter dependent boundary conditions, J. London Math. Soc. 2 (62) (2000) 161-182. 2. P. A. Binding, P. J. Browne, B. A. Watson, Sturm-Liouville problems with boundary conditions rationally dependent on the eigenparameter I, Proc. Edinburg Math. Soc. 45 (2002) 631-645. 3. P. A. Binding, P. J. Browne, B. A. Watson, Sturm-Liouville problems with boundary conditions rationally dependent on the eigenparameter II, Journal of Comp. and Appl. Math. 148 (2002) 147-168. 4. C. T Fulton, Singular eigenvalue problems with eigenvalue-parameter contained in the boundary conditions, Proc. Soc. Edinburgh Sec. A 87 (1980) 1-34. 5. N. Y. Kapustin, E. I. Moiseev, A remark on the convergence problem for spectral expansions corresponding to classical problem with a spectral parameter in the boundary condition, Diff. Equations 37 (12) (2001) 1677-1683. 6. V. I. Kopilov, Levitan-Gasymov inverse spectral theorem for Sturm-Liouville problem with a spectral parameter in the boundary condition, Functional Analysis, Linear Spaces. Ulyanovsk (1983) 73-82. 7. N. B. Kerimov, Kh. R. Mamedov, On a boundary value problem with a spectral parameter in the boundary conditions, Sib. Math. J. 40 (2) (1999) 281-290; translation from Sib. Mat. Zh. 40 (2) (1999) 325-335. 8. B. M. Levitan, The inverse scattering problem of quantum theory, Math. Notes 17 (4) (1975) 611-624. 9. Kh. R. Mamedov, Uniqueness of solution of the inverse problem of scattering theory with a spectral parameter in the boundary condition, Math. Notes 74 (1) (2003). 10. Kh. R. Mamedov, H. Menken, Levinson's type formula for boundary problem with a spectral parameter in the boundary condition, Ukr. Math. J. (to appear). 11. V. A. Marchenko, Reconstruction of the potential energy from the phases of the scattered waves, Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR 104 (5) (1955) 695-698. 12. V. A Marchenko, Strum-Liouville Operators and Applications. Birkhauser Verlag (1986). 13. A. G. Megrabov, Inverse problems of scattering for planar waves with free boundary or dependent non-homogeneous surface, Proc. Geom. Math. Problems 4, Novosibirsk (1979). 14. S. V. Meleshko, Yu. V. Pokornyj, On a vibrational boundary value problem, Diff. Uravn. 23 (8) (1987) 1466-1467.
194
Khanlar R. Mamedov,, Hamza Menken
15. V. N. Pivovarchik, Direct and inverse three-point Sturm-Liouville problem with parameter-dependent boundary conditions, Asymptotic Anal. 26 (2001) 219238. 16. E. A Pocheykina-Fedotova, On the inverse problem of boundary problem for second order differential equation on the half line, Izv. Vuzov 17 (1972) 75-84. 17. E. M. Russakovskii, The matrix Sturm-Liouville problem with spectral parameter in the boundary conditions, Algebraic and operator aspects, Trans. Moscow. Math. Soc. 57 (1996) 159-184. 18. A. A. Shkalikov, Boundary problems for ordinary differential equations with parameter in the boundary conditions, J. Soviet. Math. 33 (1986) 1311-1342.
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
195
On the Automorphisms and Multipliers Related to Generalized Integration Operators Swietlana Minczewa-Kamiriska a institute of Mathematics, University of Rzeszow, Rejtana 16 A, 35-310 Rzeszow, Poland
Abstract We give necessary and sufficient conditions for multipliers of a convolution of the generalized integration operator to be topological automorphisms in the space of continuous functions. Moreover, an equivalent form of the conditions is found in terms of cyclic elements of the considered integration operator. Key words: Generalized integration operator, convolution of generalized integration operator, commutant, multiplier, cyclic element. 2000 MSC: 45D05, 45E10, 45P05, 46E15
1. Introduction Due to the Titchmarsh theorem, the convolutional algebra of continuous functions on the positive half-line has no divisor of zero which makes it possible to construct the field of the convolution quotients, called Mikusiriski operators, the objects interesting both for their mathematical elegance and numerous applications (see [8]). Though the Titchmarsh theorem is not true on the whole real line, the space of continuous functions (on an arbitrary interval A containing 0, bounded or not) remains an annihilators-free convolutional algebra with respect to the Duhamel convolution and there is an interesting interplay between the Duhamel convolution, the multipliers (in the sense of Larsen [6]) and continuous automorphisms of this algebra commuting with the Volterra integration operator (see [2] and [9]).
196
Swietlana Minczewa-Kaminska
Together with a general notion of the Dimovski convolution introduced in [1], embracing the Duhamel convolution as a particular case, it appeared a problem of mutual relations between this notion, the generalized integration operator and the multipliers of this convolution in various classes of functions. Several papers (see e.g. [2], [9], [3]) were devoted to a study of many aspects of this problem. In this paper, we are interested in giving a convolutional representation of multipliers of the Dimovski convolution in the space C(A) of continuous functions on A. The main result (Theorem 12) is a characterization of the topological automorphisms on C(A) among multipliers of the Dimovski convolution. We also give (see Theorem 14) necessary and sufficient conditions for continuous functions to be cyclic elements of the generalized integration operator in C(A). We begin with some general definitions. Let X be a linear space over the field C of complex numbers and let L: X —> X be a linear operator. A bilinear, commutative and associative operation ©: X x X —> X is said to be a convolution of the linear
operator L if L(x®y) = {Lx)®y,
x,y G X
and the pair (X, ©) is called a convolutional algebra. The convolutional algebra (X, ©) is annihilators-free if x ® y = 0 for all x G X implies y = 0. An element d of (X, ©) is a divisor of zero of the convolution © if d ^ 0 and d ® a = 0 for a certain a E l , f l / 0 . A linear operator L: X ^ I i s said to be a convolutional operator if there exists an r G X such that Lx = r © x,
x G X,
(1)
where © is a convolution of L. Definition 1. A linear operator M : X —> X is said to be a multiplier of the convolutional algebra (X, ©) if M(x ®y) = (Mx) © y for all x, y G X. Due to [7], the multipliers of annihilators-free convolutional algebra (X, ©) are linear operators on X and form a commutative ring. By [6], if a linear topological space X has the closed graph theorem property, the convolutional algebra (X, ©) is annihilators-free and the convolution © is separately continuous, then every multiplier of (X, ©) is a continuous operator. Definition 2. An operator A: X —» X, where X is a linear topological space, is called a topological automorphism of X if it is a linear operator and a homeomorphism on X. Let XD be a subspace of a linear space X and let D : XQ —> X be a linear operator. A linear operator R : X —> Xp is said to be a right inverse of D, if DRx = x for each x G X. According to Dimovski [1], if a convolutional operator L given by (1) is a right inverse operator of D, then each multiplier M of the convolutional algebra (X, ©) has the form
On the Automorphisms and Multipliers Mx = D(m ® x),
where m := Mr.
197 (2)
In this paper we will assume that X = C(A), where A is an arbitrary (finite, infinite, closed, open, or half-open) interval containing zero, i.e. X is a Banach space in case A is a compact interval and is a Frechet space in case A is a noncompact interval.
2. Dimovski convolutions in C(A) We will study the right inverse operator of the differentiation D = d/dt with a given boundary value condition, i.e. the operator L = L$ which assigns to each / € C(A) the solution y = Lf of the boundary value problem y' = f,
$(?/) = 0,
where $ is a nonzero linear continuous functional on C(A). By [1, p. 69], a linear continuous operator R : C(A) —> C(A) is a right inverse of the differentiation D = d/dt iff it admits a representation of the form t
Rf(t)= J f(T)dT + T(f) 0
with a continuous linear functional T on C(A). Consequently, the operator L$ is represented in the form:
L*f(t) = Jf{T)dT-$ljf(T)dT\,
(3)
under the condition that the restriction of $ to C rl (A) is I — L$>D (necessary for $ to be so-called defining projector of L$ - see [1, p. 40-41]). The linear continuous operator L$ given by (3) will be called the generalized integration operator. By the Dimovski convolution, we mean the operation *: C(A) x C(A) —> C(A) defined for a given nonzero linear continuous functional $ on C(A) and f,g& C(A) by the formula:
(ftg)(t):=^x{Px{f,g)},
(4)
where the symbol $ x means that $ acts on x only and t
Ix(f,g):=Jf(x + t-T)g(T)dT.
(5)
X
In [1, p. 62], Dimovski introduced the above convolution * and proved that * is a bilinear, commutative, associative and separately continuous operation on C(A)
198
Swietlana Minczewa-Kamiriska
and the algebra (C(A), * ) is annihilators-free. One can prove that * is a convolution of the generalized integration operator L$ given by (3). Example 3 . If <&(/) = /(0), the generalized integration operator L$ given by (3) coincides with the Volterra integration operator I given for / G C(A) by t
lf(t):= Jf(T)dT 0
and the Dimovski convolution * in C(A) coincides with the Duhamel convolution * defined for f,g £ C(A) by t
(f*9)(t):= Jf(t-T)g(r)dT.
(6)
o All multipliers of the Duhamel convolution in C(A) and all automorphisms among them are described in [2]. Example 4. In case $ = E, where E(f) ~ ^(/(0) + / ( l ) ) and [0,1] C A, the generalized integration operator L$, called in this case the Euler integration operator, is of the form l
t l
LEf{t) = J f{T)dr- -J o
f{r)dT o
and the convolution * in C(A) is given by l
v t
iS*m = \ Jf(t-T)g(r)dT-Jf(l+t-r)g(T)dT . Lo
t
Example 5. In case $ = B, where B(f) := JQ / ( r ) dr and [0,1] C A, the generalized integration operator L
t
LBf(t) = J f(r) dr - J(1 - T)f(r) dr 0
0
and the convolution * in C(A) is of the form
On the Automorphisms and Multipliers
if*9)(t) = jljf(x 0
199
+ t~T)g(r)dr[dx.
[x
)
3. Multipliers of Dimovski convolution Let us normalize <3? £ (C(A))', $ 7^ 0, by imposing on $ the condition ${1} = 1.
(7)
Then operator L$ defined in (3) is a convolutional operator of the form L*f = {1} * / ,
/ e C(A),
where {1} denotes the constant function on A. By the Riesz-Markov theorem (see [5], Theorem 4.10.1), $ has a compact support, i.e. there are a compact interval [a,0\ C A and a function ui of bounded variation on [a, /3] such that 0
*(f)=Jf(x)du(x). a
The case where a; is a jump-function is described in [3]. We will assume further on that u> £ AC[a,0\ and v := to' € BV[a,/3]. In this case (see [9], p. 50) there exists a * e (C(A))', * 7^ 0, such that
*(/) = ** I / /W dr I = W)> / eC(A)-
(8)
Then the convolution * given by (4) maps C(A) x C(A) in C (A) and the derivative of the convolution (/ * g) defined in (4) is of the form
(f*gy(t)=f(tMg)+9m(f) -*{l}(/*fl)W+*x{4(/.ff)}.
(9)
where * is the Duhamel convolution defined by (6) and I\. is given by (5) (see [1, p. 67]). Lemma 6. ([1, p. 75]) The operation * : C(A) x C(A) -> C(A) given by
(f*9)(t) := f(tWg)+9m(f)
- *{1}(/ * g)(t) + * s {£(/)5)}
(10)
is a convolution of the generalized integration operator of the form L*/ = //-*(/ 2 /)
(11)
200
Swietlana Minczewa-Kamirlska
with \I/ £ (C(A))'. The operator L* is a convolutional operator of the form L * / = r* f with r := 1{1} — \I/(Z2{1}) and (C(A), *) is a convolutional algebra with a unit, i.e.{l}if = fforfeC(A). Now we will characterize all multipliers of the convolution * defined by (4) with $ of the form (8).
Theorem 7. A linear continuous operator M : C(A) —> C(A) is a multiplier of £/ie Dimovski convolution * given by (4) with $ of the form (8) iff
Mf(t) = f(tMm)+m(tWf) -tt{l}(m * / ) ( « ) + ^ { I ^ m , / ) } ,
(12)
where m := M{\] £ C(A). Proof. It is clear that every operator M of the form (12) satisfies the identity M(f
* g) = (Mf) * g for / , g £ C(A). On the other hand, if M is a multiplier of
the convolution * of the form (4), then equations (2) and (9) imply (12).
•
Corollary 8. A linear continuous operator M: C(A) —> C(A) is a multiplier of i/ie convolution * wii/i $ given by (8) iff Mf = mi f where m := Af{l} G C'(A) and * is defined by (10). Lemma 9. If the multiplier M of the convolution * , given by (12) with * £ (C(A))', satisfies the condition ^>(lm) = 0, i/ten
*(ZM/) = 0,
/ £ C(A).
(13)
Proof. It follows from the assumptions that
*(ZM/) = - * t * x J /" m(r) dr /" /(a) da I +tttttx{h(t,i ) } ,
lo
o
J
"|
x
where t
h(t,x) =
rt+x-T
17I(T) o
rt+i-T
I f(a)da dr — I m{r) j f(a)da L t-r Jo LX-T
dr.
Since h(t,x) = —h(x,t), the assertion follows from the Fubini theorem.
•
On the Automorphisms and Multipliers
201
Define the operator T, for / £ C(A), by Tf(t) := m ( i ) $ ( / ) - M>{l}(m * /)(*) + * s {^(m, / ) } .
(14)
Lemma 10. Let A be a compact interval. Then T, given by (14) with m £ C(A), is a compact operator in the space C(A). Proof. The assertion follows due to the Arzela-Ascoli theorem, applied to each of the addends in the representation (14) of the operator T (see [9]). • From Lemma 10 one can easily conclude the following assertion: Corollary 11. Every operator T of the form (14) with m £ C(A) is compact in C(A) also in case A is a noncompact interval. Theorem 12. A multiplier M of the convolutional algebra (C(A), * ) with $ given by (8) is a topological automorphism on C{A) iff the following conditions hold: (a) (b)
M{1} is not a divisor of zero of the convolution * ; *(Zm) ^ 0, where m := M{1}.
Proof. Due to Lemma 2 in [2], it suffices to show that conditions (a) and (6) are necessary and sufficient for M of the form (12) to be invertibile. Assume that M is a one-to-one linear mapping and condition (a) is not fulfilled, i.e. M{1} * / = 0 for some non-zero function / £ C(A). But then the operator M defined in (12) is not injective, contrary to the assumption. If (b) does not hold, then (13) follows by Lemma 9, which contradicts (7) and so the surjectivity of the operator M. Assume (a) and (b). By (a), (9) and (7), it follows that M is an injection. To prove that M is a surjection consider the equation m*f = g.
(15)
Since M is an injection and T given by (14) is compact, equation (15) has a unique solution / for a given g £ C(A), according to (b) and the Fredholm alternative. •
4. Cyclic elements of L in C(A) In this part, we suppose that $ e (C(A))' is of the form (8) with * £ (C(A))' and denote, for simplicity, the generalized integration operator L$ by L. We will use the convolution * to characterize explicitly the cyclic elements (in C(A)) of the operator L. We start from a general definition:
202
Swietlana Minczewa-Kamiriska
Definition 13. For an arbitrary linear continuous operator S on C(A), a function k € C(A) is said to be a cyclic element of the operator 5 if the span of {Snk}%'=1 is dense in C(A). Theorem 14. A function k G C(A) is a cyclic element of the operator L in the space C(A) i/f k is not a divisor of zero of the convolution * and *5>(lk) ^ 0. Proof. First assume that k is a cyclic element of L and a divisor of zero of the convolution * . Then there exists a j € C(A), g ^ 0 such that k * g = 0. Hence L(k t g) = 0 and so (Lnfc) * g = 0 for all n e No := N|J{0}. Consequently, / * g = 0 for every / G C(A), but this contradicts the identity Lg = {1} * g. Let now k be a cyclic element of L and >3>(£fc) = 0. Let An be the Appell polynomials, i.e. An(t) := £ n { l } for t & (—00,00) and n € No- Since Lfc = {1} * k, we have Ln+ k = An(t) * k for n e No or, due to formula (9),
Lnk(t) = An(t)$(k) + k(t)$(An) -*{l}(^ n *fc)(i) + * x {/*(A n ,fc)}
(16)
for t G (—00,00). This is an equation analogous to (12). By Lemma 9, the condition ty(Ik) = 0 implies $(Lnfc) = 0 for n = No- Therefore, {1} cannot be approximated by means of linear combinations of Lnk, in view of (7). This proves the necessity of the condition ^f(lk) ^ 0. Let now k € C(A) satisfy the condition ty(lk) j^ 0 and be not a divisor of zero of the convolution * . We will show that A; is a cyclic element of L in C(A). Fix / e C(A). We look for a function g £ C(A) such that /(*) = $ ( % ( t ) + *(*)$(
.
(17)
The operator T, given by
Tg(t) := k(t)$(g) - *{l}(fc * g)(t) + <SX {ll(k,g)} , is of the form (14). By Lemma 10 and Corrolary 11, the operator T is compact. Since ^(lk) =£ 0, equation (17) is a Fredholm integral equation of the second kind. But k is not a divisor of zero of the convolution * , so the function g = 0 is the unique solution of the homogeneous equation k* g = 0, which guarantees the existence of a unique solution g of (17). Let {gn}^Lo be a sequence of polynomials converging almost uniformly to g in C(A), which can be represented in the form gn = Y^j=o ajn-^j f° r « £ No, where Aj are the Appell polynomials. Let fn := ^ n _ 0 a^nlJk. By (16), we can write
fn(t) = $(k)gn(t) + k(t)$[gn(t)) - *{l}(k * gn)(t) + * x {/*(fc, gn)} . Hence the sequence {fn}^Lo converges almost uniformly to the function / in C(A), due to (17). Therefore, k is a cyclic element of L in C(A). •
On the Automorphisms and Multipliers
203
The above characterization allows us to reformulate Theorem 12 as follows: Theorem 15. A multiplier M of the convolutional algebra (C(A), * ) with $ defined in (8) is a topological automorphism on the space C(A) iff the function m := M{1} € C(A) is a cyclic element of the operator L. References 1. I. Dimovski, Convolutional Calculus ( Kluwer Acad. Publ., Dordrecht, 1990). 2. I. Dimovski, S. Mincheva, Automorphisms of C which commutes with the integral operator, Integral Transforms and Special Functions 4 (1996) 69-76. 3. I. Dimovski, A. Kamiriski, S. Mincheva, The commutant of an integration operator with multipoint functional, Fractional Calculus & Applied Analysis 4 (2001) 245-254. 4. I. Dimovski, S. Grozdev, Bernoulli operational calculus, in: Mathematics and Education in Mathematics, (Sofia, 1980) 30-36 (in Bulgarian). 5. R. Edwards, Functional Analysis. Theory and Applications. Holt, Rinehart and Winston, New York, 1965. 6. R. Larsen, An Introduction to the Theory of Multipliers. Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1972. 7. L. Mate, Multiplier operators and quotiend algebra, Bull. Acad. Polon. Sciences, Ser. Math. Astr. et Phys. 13 (1972) 523-526. 8. J. Mikusinski, Operational Calculus, vol. I—II, PWN-Pergamon Press, Warszawa, 1983, 1987. 9. S. Mincheva, Automorphisms commuting with integration operators in some functional spaces, Institute of Mathematics and Informatics, Bulgarian Academy of Sciences (Sofia, 2000) 1-151 (Ph.D. Dissertation; in Bulgarian).
This page is intentionally left blank
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
205
On Some Classes of Mappings Preserving of Measure Oksana A. Ochakovskaya Institute of Applied Mathematics and Mechanics NAS Ukraine, Donetsk, Ukraine
Abstract Main result in the present paper contains the conditions which give that certain oneto-one mapping is a measure-preserving transformation. Some of these conditions can not be relaxed. Key words: Measure-preserving transformations, ergodic theory 2000 MSC: 28D05
1. Introduction Measure-preserving transformations plays an important role in ergodic theory and related questions (see, for instance, [1], [2] and the bibliography therein). In the present paper we study such transformations acting from W1 into R™. Throughout, we assume that n > 2. Denote by Cfe(]Rn,Kn) the collection of all Ck - mappings from Rn into Rn. For
r > 0, y G Rn we set Br(y) = {x&Rn : \x-y\ < r}, Sr{y) = {x G Rn : \x-y\ = r}, where | • j is the Euclidean norm in R n . We write m(G) for Lebesgue measure of the set G C W1. Let / * g be a convolution of functions / and g. Denote by XG the characteristic function of the set G C R™. For r > 0 let Vr(M.n) be a collection of all functions / £ C(Wn) with zero integrals over each ball with radius r. We set also A n = {t > 0 : t = | , where J%(a) = J%{/3) = 0, j3 ± 0}, where Jv is the Bessel function of order v. Let En = {x G Rn : xn > 0}.
206
Oksana A. Ochakovskaya
2. Main results Theorem 1. Assume that the injective map F G C 1 (M ra ,R n ) satisfies the following conditions: a)m{F(Bl{y))) = m{Bl{y)) for all y&Rn; b) there exist a positive numbers Mq, q = 1, 2,... such that
f ; ( m f M*) ' = 00
(1)
and
J
\m(F(Br(y)))-m(Br(y))\(l
+ \y1\ + ... + \yn_1\)'>dy1...dyn_1<Mqea^
(2)
R"-i
/or some a > 0 and all yn G R1, g € N. TTien m(F(G)) = m(G) for each Lebesgue measurable set G C K™. Theorem 2. for every r > 0, a > 0 and every a sequence {Mq}q*Ll of positive numbers such that °° / A""1 > inf Mq9 ) < oo (3) i/iere eiisis a one-to-one mapping F € C1(En, En) with positive Jacobian such that m{F(Bx(y))) = m(B1{y)) for all B1(y) C En and f \m{F(Br{y)))-m(Br(y))\{l
+ \y1\ + ... + \yn-1\)idy1...dyn-l
<Mqe~a^
(4)
R»-l
for all yn > r, q € N. Moreover m(F(B)) ^ m(B) for some ball B C En. Theorem 3. For each r G Ara there exists an one-to-one mapping $ £ C°°(]Rra,]Rn) wii/i positive Jacobian such that m($(Bi(y))) = m(B\(y)) and m($(Br(y))) = m(Br(y)) for all y e I " . Besides, m(${B)) ^ m(B) for some ball B C W1.
3. Proofs To prove the main results we require the following auxiliary statements: 1) Let f G Vr(Mn) and assume that there exist a positive numbers Mq,q = 1,2,... satisfying (1) such that the following inequality holds
J \f(Xl,...,xn)\(l
+ \Xl\ + ... + \xn-1\)«dx1...dxn^1
for some a > 0 and all xn G R 1 , q G N. Then / = 0.
<Mqea^
(5)
On Some Classes of Mappings Preserving of Measure
207
2) For every a > 0 and every a sequence {Mq}qxLl of positive numbers satisfying (3) there exists a real-valued function fa £ Vr(Rn) nC°°(R n ) such that
J l/afo, ...,z n )|(l + |*i| + ... + \xn.l\)"dx1...dxn.1
< Mqe'ax-
for all xn > 0, q G N. Besides, the function S^f- is nonzero and bounded in En. The proof of this statement can be obtained by repeating the arguments from the paper [3]. We proceed now to the proof of the main results. Proof of Theorem 1. Using the formula m(F(G)) = J \J(F, x)\dx, where J(F, x) G
is the Jacobian of mapping F, we can rewrite the condition a) in Theorem 1 as / (\J(F, x) - 1) dx = 0 for all y eRn
(6)
Bi(y)
Besides
m(F(Br(y)))-m(Br(y))=
J
(| J(F,x)\ - l)dx = v *XBr = 0,
(7)
BAy)
where v(x) = \J(F,x)\ - 1. Thus the function / = v * XBT satisfies the condition (5). Hence, / = 0 on W1. Taking into account that r ^ A n , by two-radii theorem (see, [4]) we obtain that v = 0. This means that m(F(G)) = m(G) for every Lebesgue measurable set G C W1. The proof of Theorem 1 is now complete. Proof of Theorem 2. Let a > 0, r > 0 and assume that the sequence {Mq}^L1 M ear satisfies (3). Then the sequence M'q = -2— also satisfies (3). We set (2 -|- r)Q(n — l)q
ip(x) = fa(x) where fa is a function in Lemma for the sequence M'. Then —— < C for all x s En. We consider the mapping F(x) = (Fi(x),...,Fn(x))
\
n™/2rn~l
OX\
= (x± +
-\
——, x 2 ,..., x n ), where N > max < C, —-—-r— >. Then we have •^ I 1 V"2 ) J We now claim that F is one-to-one mapping. Let x,x' € En such that x =fi x'. If (x2,—,xn) ^ (x'2i..-,x'n) we see that F{x) / F(x'). Otherwise, (x 2 ,...,x n ) = (x 2 , •••,x'n) and X\ ^ I'J. In this case the F(x) ^ F(x') since the function F\(x) = xi H
!-T— is increasing with respect to variable xi. Indeed, from the definition of dFi 1 dip N we have the inequality —— = 1 + —: 7:— > 0. This yields that F is one-to-one. dxi N dxi We now prove the condition b). Setting sq(x) = (1 + |xi| + ... + |x ra _i|) 9 for x = (xi, ...,x n ) £ IRra, we obtain
208
Oksana A. Ochakovskaya f \m(F(Br{y)))
- m(Br(y))\sq(y)dy1...dyn_1
=
R"
J Jf~g^dx
= J
sq{y)dy1...dyn-1.
Using Green's theorem we estimate the left part of last equality by the expression
•jj /
I
/ \if(yi'--,yn-i,yn+Xn)\sq(y-x)dy1...dyn-1\ 1
Sr(0) V K " where da(x) is the surface element of sphere Sr(0). Further, for x € 5 r (0) and y £ R™"1 we have
sq(y-x)<(n-l)"(2
da(x)
(9)
/
+ ry8q(y)
Then (9) can be estimated by the expression
^ ( n - l ) ? ( 2 + r)« J ( J
\
5 r ( 0 ) R™-1
•sg{y)dy1...dyn-i)d*(x) < Mqe~a^+X^
<
Mqea^e~a^
Bearing in mind that
P. Billingsley, Ergodic Theory and Information. John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1965. I.P.Kornfeld, J.G. Sinay, S.V. Fomin, Ergodic theory. Nauka, Moskow, 1980. (In Russian). O.A. Ochakovskaya, Functions with zero integrals over balls with fixed radius, Mathematical Physics, Analysis, Geometry 10 (3) (2002) 43-51. V.V. Volchkov, A definite version of the local two-radii theorem, Math. Sb. 186 (6) (1995) 15-34; English transl. in Sbornik Math. 186 (1995).
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
209
Extreme Problems and Scales of the Operator Spaces Igor V. Orlov Taurida National V. Vernadsky University, Simferopol, Ukraine
Abstract The repeated compact-normal differentiability of the Euler-Lagrange functional is proved. The sufficient extreme conditions for such a functional in the case of one and two variables are obtained. Key words: Euler-Lagrange functional, locally convex space, inductive scale of spaces, extreme problems, nuclear space, normal derivative, compact extremum 2000 MSC: 58C20, 46T20, 46A03
Introduction The extreme problems for integral functional play an important role in the modern nonlinear analysis and its application. Diverse methods are employed for the investigation of these problems (see, e.g. [1-3]). One of the fundamental difficulties arising in these questions is absence, with the exception of trivial cases [16], the second strong derivative for general integral functionals. The other aspect of the problem above is that extremae of such functionals are seek, as a rule, on some compact set. These cases exclude application of the classical Frechet extreme conditions and enclose the investigation in the framework of the (in any case generalized) variational calculus. In the present work, on the contrary, the notion of strong differentiability is rather weakened. As a result, the modified Frechet extreme conditions are extended to the extremae of integral functionals on compact sets. The obtained results are new both in the general case of integrand function taking values in locally convex space (LCS) and in the classical scalar or Banach case.
210
Igor V. Orlov
The work consists of two sections. In the first section the extreme theory for the normally differentiable and if-differentiable functions in LCS is constructed. The normal differentiability and the repeated if-differentiability of Euler-Lagrange functional are proved. It allowed to obtain the sufficient if-extreme conditions for such a functional. In the second section the sufficient extreme and if-extreme conditions for the two variables functions in the products of the nuclear spaces are obtained. It allowed to obtain the sufficient if-extreme conditions for two variables Euler-Lagrange functional.
1. .K"-extremae of the integral functionals As it was shown by I.V.Skrypnik [1], the integral functionals of the classical Euler-Lagrange functional type 6
$(j/) = J f(x,y(x),y'(x))dx
(1)
a
are not, in general, twice Frechet differentiable. It is shown by M.Z.Zgurovsky and V.S.Melnik that the derivatives of such functionals are T-differentiable (see [19,7]). We'll show that the functional (1) satisfies a much more strong requirement of the repeated if-differentiability, even in the case of mapping y(-) into LCS. It allows us to apply the classical extreme conditions in terms of ii'-derivatives for investigation of the compact extremae (or, iiT-extremae, def. 17) for such a functional. The introduced below notion of normal and (further) compact - normal differentiability (or, X-differentiability) is jointly connected to decompositions of the operator spaces into the inductive scales of LCS. In what follows, E, Ei,F, F^ are LCS with the corresponding defining systems of semi-norms {|| • \\t}teT, {\\ • I k k e i o {|| • || s } s e5, {|| • || Sj }^es 3 -, inductively ordered in ascending order of the semi-norms; (E; F) is a space of the linear continuous operators acting from E to F; (Ei,E2',F) is a space of the bilinear continuous operators acting from E\ x E2 to F. Definition 1. Let A G (E;F). Assume, for any s G S, nA(S)
= {t£T
: \\A\\'t := sup ||Ar|| s < + 0 0 } .
The multivalued mapping UA '• S —> ray(T), here ray(T) is the set of rays in T, is called the normal index, or n-index of the operator A; the quantities ||A||| are called the co-norms. The main properties and examples of normal indices are considered in [8,9].
Extreme Problems and Scales of the Operator Spaces
211
Definition 2. Let J\f = Af{E; F) be set of the normal indices of operators from (E; F). Put, for every n G M, (E; F)n = {A G (E; F) : nA^n}. Provide the every (E; F)n with the projective topology rn relative to the defining systems of semi-norms {|| • ||t}ten(s)>s £ S. The inductive scale of LCS {ETF):={((E;F)n,rn)}neM
(2)
is called the normal decomposition of the space (E; F). An information about inductive scales of LCS see in [17,4]. Note that the scales under consideration below are more general than the classical interpolational scales and the S.G.Krein-Yu.I.Petunin scales [5,6]. By analogy with the decomposition (2), one can introduce the normal indices and decompositions into the inductive scales of LCS for the space of linear continuous operators, acting from Ei to {E^F):
(Ei;(E2;F)], and for the space of bilinear continuous operators, acting from E\ x E2 to F : (EX,E2-F).
Proposition 3. (The canonical isomorphism of normal indices for the linear and bilinear operators [10]). The canonical relation B{hi,h,2) = {Ahi)li2 between the linear operators A : E\ —» {E2\ F) and bilinear operators B : Ei x E2 —• F generates an isomorphism of the corresponding normal indices. In addition, the corresponding spaces of scales {E\; (E2; F)) and ((E\,E2\F) are isometrically isomorphic; that allows to say about an isometric isomorphism of the normal decompositions: (E^iE^F))
- (EltE2;F).
(3)
Definition 4. Let a mapping if : E —> F be defined in some zero neighborhood of E. Say that ip{h) = o(h) if Vs € S3t e T : (||¥>(/0||7l|ft||t) ~> ° a« h -> °Definition 5. A mapping / : E —> F defined in some neighborhood of x G E is called normally differentiable at the point x if Af(x,h) = Axh +
212
Igor V. Orlov
proposed above is well known in infinite-dimensional differential calculus. This approach is closed to the names of D.H.Hyers, H.R.Fisher, S.Lang, E.Binz and a number of other mathematicians (see, e.g., survey [1]). The distinction of our approach is consideration of the first normal derived mapping as a mapping from E to the scale (E;F).As the result, beginning with the continuous differentiability the proposed approach essentially differs from the abovementioned one and leads to some new applications. At first, let formulate the "normal form" of the mean value theorem [9].
Proposition 6 (Normal form of the mean value theorem). Let E and F are real LCS, [a; b] C E,D be finite or countable subset of [a; b], f : [a; b) —> F. If f is continuous on [a;b] and normally differentiable on [a;b]\D, here n/(x) =4 n G N for x G [a; b]\D, then for all s £ S and t G n{s): \\f{b)-f{a)\\s^
sup
||/'(x)||M|6-a||t.
(4)
xe[a;fa]\D
A typical situation for which the upper bound (4) is applicable, is the continuous normal differentiability, that is the continuity of the mapping f':E—> (E;F). Definition 7. Let a mapping / : E —> F be continuously normally differentiate at a point x £ E. Then the derived mapping f : E —> (E; F) can be considered at some neighborhood of x as the mapping to some LCS (E;F)n, n G J\f. If / ' : E —> (E; F)n is normally differentiable at a point x then we'll say that / is twice normally differentiable at the point x; moreover f"(x) := (f')'(x). Analogously, one can defined the normal derivatives f^(x), k > 2. Note that by virtue of the canonical isomorphism (3), f"{x) can be considered as a bilinear continuous operator. So, / " : E —> (E,E; F), in addition the corresponding co-norms coincide: \\f"(x)\\%> = ||/"(x)||f lt2 . Definition 8. Say that a mapping r : E —> F defined in some zero neighborhood in E is the small mapping of the order k (k = 0,1,2,...), or r(h) = o((/i)fe), if \/seS
BtGT:
lim(||rW||7(||ft|| t ) f e )=0.
Theorem 9 (Taylor's formula in the asymptotic form). If a mapping f : E —> F is m times normally differentiable at a point x G E then m
f{x + h) = Y,
{k)
T]f
{x){h)k + o((h)n).
(5)
The proof see in [13]. Let introduce now a notion of the positive definite quadratic form in LCS [12].
Extreme Problems and Scales of the Operator Spaces
213
Definition 10. Let ip be a continuous quadratic form in LCS E generated by a bilinear form g on E2. The form ip is called nondegenerate if
inf "f',5>0 Mtj^o
(6)
|[z||tl
for some t\, £2 £ ng. If
= 0)
=> (an = 0).
Theorem 12. (Condition of positive definiteness, [12]). If ip 2> 0 on LCS E then there exist such index t s T and constant Ct > 0 that
214
Igor V. Orlov
(f\c)'(x) not depends on the choice of C). Denote by f'K(x) f'K(x)G(E;F).
this value. Thus,
Note that T-differentiability follows from if-differentiability in an obvious way. Definition 17. Say that a function / : E —> R has a locally compact extremum, or i^-extremum at a point x € E if a restriction f\c has a local extremum at x for every convex compact um C 9 x. It is easy to see that after the replacement of the positive definiteness, normal derivatives and local extremums with the .RT-positive definiteness, if-derivatives and A"-extremums, respectively, in the formulation of Propositions 13, 14 and Theorem 15, we obtain the corresponding conditions of the if-extremums. Proposition 18. / / a function f : E —> R has a local K-extremum at a point x and f is K-normally differentiable at this point then f'K = 0. Proof. Consider an arbitrary convex compactum C that is symmetric respective to x. Then local extremum of restriction f\c implies, obviously, equalities af(x,h) = 0 for any directional derivative such that x + Xh € C for sufficiently small A. So, af(x, h)=0 for any heE, whence f'K{x) = 0.D Proposition 19. If a function f : E —> R has local K-minimum at a point x and f is twice K-normally differentiable at x then not only f'K(x) = 0 but f'x(x) ^ 0. Proof. It suffices to apply Proposition 14 to each restriction f\c, here C is convex compactum that is symmetric respective to x.D Theorem 20. / / a function f : E —> R is twice K-normally differentiable at a point x, moreover f'K (x) = 0 and f'^ (x) 3> 0 then f has the strong K-minimum at x. Proof. It suffices to apply Theorem 15 to each restriction f\c, here C is convex compactum that is symmetric respective to x.O Remark 21. Actually, the condition f'x(x) 3> 0 in Theorem 15 can be replaced by a much more weak condition of -ftT-positive definiteness, namely, positive definiteness of each restriction /^(aOI-Eo n e r e &c = Span(C —x), C is any convex compactum in E containing x. As a base for proof of repeated /C-differentiability of Euler-Lagrange functional, it serves the following
Extreme Problems and Scales of the Operator Spaces
215
L e m m a 22. If a mapping g : E —> F is continuously normally differentiate on convex compact set C C E then
M ^ f b W . o
as h^O, xeC
(7)
\\h\\t
for some normal index n € N(E\ F) and for arbitrary s € 5, t 6 n(s). Proof. As far as mapping g' : C —> (E;F) is continuous then, according to definition 7, for every x G C there exists such a neighborhood U(x) and a normal index nx € N that g' can be considered as continuous mapping from Ux into (E; F)n . Choosing from the covering {U(x)}xec a finite one Ui(xi)l)U2(x2)U.. .l)Uk(xk) D C and getting a normal index n ^= nXl, nX2,... nXk, we obtain g' as continuous mapping from C into (E;F)n. Let us apply the normal form of mean value theorem (Proposition 6) to auxiliary mapping G(h) = g{x + h) — g'{x)h for the arbitrary s € S,t€
n(s), x € C: \\g(x + h)- g(x) - g\x)h\\s
< s u p ||G'(fc)IIM!>»llt= ke[0;h]
= \\G{h) - G(0)|| s ^
sup
\\g'(x+k)-g'(x)\\t-\\h\\t.
kG[O;h]
From here, by virtue of uniform continuity g' on C, it follows (7).D Generalize now the notion of Sobolev space W^ for the LCS-valued mapping. Definition 23. Let E be a complete LCS. Denote by W^da; b];E) the completion of the space Cl([a; b];E) relative to the defining system of semi-norms
(
b
6
\ 2
J\\y(x)\\2tdx + J\\y'(x)ftdx\ a
a
, t e T, /
Let us formulate the principal results of this section. Theorem 24. / / a function u = f(x, y, z) is continuously normally differentiable on [a; b] x E x E then the Euler-Lagrange functional (1) is continuously normally differentiable on W\i\a\b\\ E). Proof. For an arbitrary y(-) and h(-) from W2 ([a; b]; E) we obtain b
*fo +ft)- $(y) = J if(x,y(x) + h(x), y'(x) + h'{x))a b
-f(x,y(x),y'(x))} dx =
j^(x,y(x),y'(x))h(x)+ a
216
Igor V. Orlov b
+ ^(x,y(x),y'(x))h'(x)\ dx + Jrx(h(x), h'(x)) dx; a
here rx is the remainder term of the increment of / at the point {x, y(x), y'(x)). Let us fix e > 0 and choose for every x G [a; b] an index t = t(x) G T and 5 = 5{e, x) > 0 such that (\\h(x)\\t
+ \\h'(x)\\t
<S)=> (\rx(h(x), <e-(\\h(x)\\t
+
ti(x))\
<
\\h'(x)\\t)).
This condition holds true, by continuity, in some neighborhood U(x) of x for the same t and 5. Note that for sufficiently small ||/i||* and r\ > 0 one can choose such a compactum Kg, C [a; b] that \\h{x)\\t + \\h'(x)\\t<5 as xeKs; mes ([a; b]\Ks) < rj. Choose from the covering {U(x)\ x G Kg] a finite one U(Xl) U U(x2) U . . . U U{xn) D Kg and set 6 = min(d"(xi),... ,6(xn)), t !j= t ( x i ) , . . . ,t(xn). fulfilled for all x G Kg. Hence,
Jrx(h(x),ti(x))dx
J\\h(x)\\*dx+ \\K6
Then the condition (8) is
<e- J[\\h{x)\\t + \\ti{x)\\t]dx<
J\\h'(x)\\*dx\. \KS
(9) J
Prom here, setting 77 be sufficiently small, we get b
Jrx(h(x),ti(x))dx
a
i.e. $ is normally differentiable at every point y(-) £ W\([a; b\\ E) and its first normal derivative is 6
$'(y)h = J \^(x,y(x),y'(x))h(x) + ^(x,y(x),y'(x))h'(x)j dx. a
Let ||$'(y)||* < 00, t = t(y) G T. Using f £ Cl, compactness of [a; b] and repeating the construction above, we find t G T that does not depend on y, and such that r a II^'CJ/)!!* < °° f° ll V € W2 ([a; b]; E). Hence $ ' is continuous mapping into the
scale W2l{{a;b\;E)n
Extreme Problems and Scales of the Operator Spaces
217
Corollary 25. Under the suppositions of Theorem 24 the condition $'(?/) = 0 holds true if and only if the Euler-Lagrange variational equation
is valid for all x G [a; b]. Proof. As it was shown in [11], Corollary 6.1, the standard representation
a
here h(a) = h(b) = 0, is extended on the case of normal derivatives. Together with <&'{y)h = 0 it turns out, obviously, the validity of (10). Inverse implication is trivial. • Theorem 26. / / a function u = f(x, y, z) is twice continuously normally differentiable on [a;b]xExE then the Euler-Lagrange functional (1) is C2 -K - differentiate onW£{[a;b];E). Proof. Straightforward calculation gives: 6
($'(
h(x)) +
a
+
£k{x'y'y>) WW>h(x» + W*)'^))] + §( x '^'>
(n)
6
•(k'(x),h'(x))} dx+ f [ryx(k(x),k'(x)) • h(x) + rzx{k(x), k'{x)) • h'(x)} dx; a
here r\ and rzy are, respectively, remainder terms of the increments of df/dy and
df/dz at the point (x,y(x),y'(x)). Let C be an arbitrary convex compact set in Wj ([o; b]; E) containing y(-). Then, obviously, the sets K = {yey([a;b])\y(.)eC}
and Kx = {z € y'([a;b})\ y(-) & C}
are convex compacts in E. By virtue of df/dy G C 1 and df/dz £ Cl on convex compact set [a; b] x K x K\ one can apply Lemma 22 to rvx and r | , whence KWaQ.fc'Oc))!!' ||fc(x)||t + ||fc'(x)|| t ^ U
\\r%{k(x\k\x))f ||fc(i)||t + ||fc'(o ; )|| t ^ U
as a; € [a; 6], (fc(cc), k'(x)) —> 0, for some t G T. Taking into account the estimates \rUk(x),k'(x))
• h(x)\ ^ \K(k(x),k'(x))\\t
• \\h(x)\\t;
218
Igor V. Orlov \r*(k(x),k'(x))-ti(x)\
<
\\rUk(x),k'(x))\\t-\\h\x)\\t;
and denoting by Ry(k)h the general remainder term in (11) a calculation analogous with (9) gives
(|^(fc)h|/||ft||*. 11*11*) ^ 0 as h -> 0, k -> 0 in W%([a;b];E). It follows from here that Ry(k) = o(k) and $ ' is /f-differentiable at y(-). The continuity of §"K = (&')'K i s verified analogously with one of «E>' in the previous proof. • Corollary 27. / / under the conditions of Theorem 26 the Euler-Lagrange variational equation (10) holds at a point y(-) G Wj ([
>Ct(xy (|Mz)llt%) + IIM*)ll?(*)) for all (hi(x),h,2(x)) G E2. Using compactness of [a;b] by analogy with the proof of Theorem 24 it is possible to choose t G T and Ct > 0 in the last estimate non depending on x G [a; b]. In particular, d2 f
d2f
d2f
g£(h(x),h(x)) + 2g^-z{h(x),h'(x)) + g±(h'(x),h'(x)) > 2Cf(\\h(x)\\2t+\\h'(x)\\*) for all x G [a; b] and h(-) G W/21([a;6];S). From here, using (11), we get • 6
*'ic(v)(h,h)>Cf
J\\h{x)ftdx .a
b
+ J\\h'{x)\\2tdx
=Ct-(\\h\\t)2,
a
i.e., according to Theorem 12, $x(^) ^ 0- It remains to apply Corollary 27. • Note at the conclusion that the last results are transferred to the general EulerLagrange functional on a compact domain fi C R n .
Extreme Problems and Scales of the Operator Spaces
219
2. Extremae of functionals in the products of the nuclear spaces In this section the classical sufficient conditions for extremum of two variables function are generalized for the case of twice normally and -ftT-normally differentiable function defined in the product of the nuclear spaces. The obtained results are applied to a wide class of integral functionals. As an initial point it serves a generalization of the Young theorem on symmetry of second derivative considered as bilinear operator for the case of the second order normal derivatives. Theorem 29 ([13].). If a mapping f : E —> F is twice normally differentiable at a point x £ E then f"(x) is a symmetric bilinear operator from E x E to F. Proof. Following by standard scheme for proof of the Young theorem in Banach spaces [3]), introduce auxiliary mapping A(h, k) = f{x + h + k)- f(x + h) - f(x + k) + f(x);
A(h, k) = A(k, h).
Let n\ = (ni, 7112) be a second order normal index of f"(x); thus we consider f"(x) as a linear operator acting from E to (E; F). In addition, according to definition 7, f"(x) : E —> (E; F)ni and 7112 is normal index of f"(x) in this paire of spaces. For every s € S we have \\A(h, k) - (f"(x)k)h\\s < \\A{h, k) - f'(x + k)h + f'{x)h\\' +
+ l\f'(x +
k)h-f(x)h-(f"(x)k)h\\s.
Fix t\ G ni(s) and estimate each term from the right in (12). a). Since, by virtue of continuity / ' at x, f : E —> (E; F)ni in some neighborhood of x then the normal indices of operators f'(x + k), f'(x) and f"(x)k don't exceed ni for sufficiently small k. Hence
\\f(x + k)h-f'(x)h-(f"(x)k)h\\s< (loj ^\\f'{x
+
k)-f'(x)-f"(x)k\\'tl-\\h\\tl.
Next, by definition of the second normal derivative, f'(x + k)-f'(x)-f"(x)k
= o(k).
(14)
Let 1/12 be corresponding o-index. Then for t\ € 1^12(5) it follows from (14) {\\f'{x + k)-f{x)-f"{x)k\\'/\\k\\tl)^O
as
k-*0.
(15)
Hence, for t\ e (n\ V vn)(s) it follows from (13) and (15)
||/' ( x +k)h _ f{x)h _ (/"(aOAO/illVHfcll^ < e under ||fc||tl < d^e).
(16)
220
Igor V. Orlov
b). Consider auxiliary mapping B(h) = f(x + k + h) - f(x + h)- f'(x + k)h +
f'(x)h.
Applying the normal form of mean value theorem (Prop. 6) to B(-) on [0;/i] for ti € ni(s) we get
\\A(h, k) - f'(x + k)h + f'(x)h\\' = \\B(h) - B(0)\\s < < sup 115^)11^-11%!= sup \\f'(x + k + Xh)-f'(x + \h)O^A<1
-f'(x
0
+ k)+f'(x)\\'tl-\\h\\tl
= s u p \\[f'(x + k + Xhy
-f'{x)
- f"(x)(k
+ Xh)} - [f'{x + Xh) - f(x) -
-lf'{x
+
k)-f'{x)-f"{x)k]\\'tl-\\h\\tl.
(17)
f"(x)(Xh)]-
Since f'(x + k + Xh)- f'(x) - f"(x)(k + Xh) = o(k + Xh); < f'(x + Xh)-f(x)-f"(x)(Xh)
= o(Xh);
(18)
J'{x + k)-f'(x)-f"(x)k = o(k); moreover, it can assume V\i as o-index for each of these equalities then for t\ € vi2{s) it follows from (17) and (18)
(\\A(h, k) - f(X+k)h+/'(swivawk under \\h\\tl
(\\A(h,k)
+ n*iit,)) < £ • ii^iiti
(is)
< 52(e), \\k\\tl < 62(e). I t follows from (12), (16) and (19)
- (f"(x)k)h\\s/(\\h\\tl
+ \\k\\ t l )) < e \ \ h \ \ t l < e ( \ \ h \ \ t l + \\k\\ t l )
u n d e r t\ € ( n \ V v i z ) ( s ) ) , Wh]]^ < 62, \\k\\t! < r m n ( S i , 6 2 ) . T h e l a s t e s t i m a t e m e a n s that A(h, k) - (f"(x)k)h = o((h, k)2).
(20)
By analogous way we get A(k,h)-(f"(x)h)k
= o((k,h)2).
(21)
Finally, it follows from (20) and (21).
(f"(X)h)k-(f"(x)k)h = o((h,kf). Replacing with h 1—> Xh, k 1—> Xk in t h e last equality we receive
(f"(x)h)k
- (f"(x)k)h
as A - • 0, whence f"(x)h)k
= f"{x)k)h.
= (o(X2 • (h, k)2)/X2) ^ 0 D
Extreme Problems and Scales of the Operator Spaces
221
Corollary 30. (Schwartz theorem.) / / a mapping f : E = E\ x E2 —> F is twice normally differentiate at a point x £ E then the equality {d2f/dxidxj){x){huhj)
= {d2f/dxjdxi){x){hi,hi)
(i,j = 1,2)
holds, i. e. the mixed second order partial derivatives coincide up to the symmetry of the arguments. Proof. On the strength of [9], (16), the equality
is valid in some neighborhood of x. It follows ftp
df
and hence (f"(x) • (An, k2)) • (hlt h2) = (j^{x)ki
+ ^-2(x)k^\
• (hi,h2).
(22)
Differentiating (22) in xi (i = 1, 2) and using continuity of the evaluation Er x E -> R (see [14]) we get
(f£(s)*) • (hM = (^t^)
hl+ (^-(x)^
h2. (23)
Note that, by virtue of canonical isomorphism (3) for normal and binormal indices,
( & S t ) {X) e ^ ^ ^ - (E^EJ'F)- (U = l,2) Substituting (23) into (22), we get (f"(x) • (kltk2)) • (hlth2) = E
(s^-^fci)
h
i-
^
Then, applying Theorem 29, it follows from (24)
from here we receive that the equalities
J^-Wfahj) = /^-(aO(^) are valid for any i, j = 1,2, ki € Ei, hj € Ej.O As the following important initial point it serves a condition of positive definiteness in the product of the nuclear spaces. Since any complete nuclear LCS is isomorphic to a projective limit of the Hilbert spaces [15] then we need at first to obtain such a condition in the product of the Hilbert spaces.
222
Igor V. Orlov
Proposition 31 ([13]). Let Hi (i = 1,2) are the real Hilbert spaces, Hi = H2, B = (Bij) be a self-adjoint linear continuous operator in Hi XH2, here BZj : Hj —> Ht {i,j = 1,2). Hence, Bn = Bn, B22 = B*22, B12 = B*2V If 1) Bn 3> 0 and Bn commutes with Bi2, B2i and B22; 2) BnB22 - B12B21 > 0; then B is positive definite on Hi x H2. Proof. Let (Bn
0 \
An =
h
then
, (B^ A111 =
V 0 Bn)
0 \ ,]•
\ 0 B£)
Consider operator An±? = 1
I.
yBni?2i BnB22 J For /i = (hi, h2) G i?i x H2 we get (AnB/i, ft) = (Buhi,hi) = ((BnhuBnhi)
+ 2(BnBi2h2, h^ + (BnB22h2, h2) =
+ 2(Bi2h2, Bnhi) + (B12h2, B12h2)) +
+{{BnB22 - B2iBi2)h2, h2) = \\Bnhi + Bi2h2\\2+ + ((BnB22-B2iBl2)h2,h2)^C-\\h2\\2, Analogously, for h! = (h2, hi) we obtain (AnBh',h') = (AnBh,h)
here C> 0. > C\\hi\\2,
whence
(AuBh,h) > C-maxdl/nllMl^H 2 ) > | • \\h\\2, i.e. AnB » 0. Note that the operator Anl is positive definite and self-adjoint together with Ani?. In addition Aux and AnB commute by virtue of the equalities (BnBijBn
= Bij) <=> (BnBij = BijBn) •
As it is well known these conditions guarantee positive definiteness of the product Ai11(AuB)=B-»0
D.
Basing on the condition of positive definiteness (Theorem 12) and the canonical isomorphism (3), it is not difficult to generalize Proposition 31 for the case of the product of nuclear spaces. Theorem 32. Let Ei (i = 1,2) are the real complete nuclear LCS, Ei = £"2? E = Ei x E2, ip be a continuous quadratic form on E, generated by a symmetric bilinear form g on E2, B be a linear operator from E to E* associated with g (i.e., g{h,k) = (h,Bh)), B = [BtJ), here Btj : Ej -> E% i,j = 1,2. If
Extreme Problems and Scales of the Operator Spaces
223
1) B\\ 2> 0 and Bn commutes with B\2, B21 and B22', 2) B11B22 - B12B21 » 0; then ip is positive definite on E. Proof. Since any complete nuclear LCS is isomorphic to a projective limit of the Hilbert spaces [15] then, without loss of generality, it can suppose that Ei =E2 ^projlimtft, here H± are Hilbert spaces. Further, by canonical isomorphism theorem (Proposition 3) one can consider B as a continuous linear operator from E to E . So, one can consider B as continuous linear operator from Htl x Ht2 to H*, x H*, = Htl x Ht2 for some t\ ,t'2 € T; moreover B is self-adjoint by virtue of symmetry of g. Analogously, the conditions 1) and 2) of the Theorem are realized on some Ht" x Ht» and Ht»> x Ht2", respectively. Choosing U )? t'^t",?" (i = 1,2), we arrive to realization of the conditions of Proposition 31 on Ht1 x Ht2- Hence B is positive definite on Ht1 x Ht2, whence tp(h) = (h,Bh)>Cf\\h\\l,
(Ct>0)
for h e E* = Htl x Ht2, t = (ti,t2). Finally, applying Theorem 12 we get positive definiteness of the form f everywhere on E.O Together with Corollary 28, the last Theorem give us the sufficient extreme conditions for Euler-Lagrange functional (1) in terms of second order partial derivatives of the integrand function. Corollary 33. Let E be a real complete nuclear LCS, function f(x, y, z) be twice contituously normally differentiable on [a;b}x E x E. If the Euler-Lagrange variational equation (10) holds at a point y(-) € W2 ([a; b}; E) and for each fixed x G [a; &]: 1) ^i(x,y(x),y'(x)) 3> 0 in E2 and commutes with d2f/dydz{x,y(x),y'(x)) andd2f/dz2(x,y(x),y'(x));
2) ^(X,y(x),y'{x)).^(x,y(x),y'{x))then $ has K-minimum
[•gfz(x,y(x),y'(x))]2 ^>0 m E2;
at the point y(-).
Proof. Applying Theorem 32 to f"(x,y(x),y'(x)) we get positive definiteness of the form above at (y(x), y'(x)) for each x £ [a; b]. It remains to apply Corollary 28.
•
Next, combining the result of Theorem 32 with the sufficient extreme condition (Theorem 15) it can easily obtain a sufficient extreme condition for two variables function in the product of the nuclear spaces. Theorem 34. Let Ei (i = 1,2) are the real complete nuclear LCS, E\ = E
224
Igor V. Orlov
2) at (xi,x2)
d11f-d22f-d12f-d21f^0; then f has a strong minimum at this point.
Proof. Since, according to [13], Th.2.1, f"(xi,x2) is symmetric bilinear form on (Ei x E2)2 and for associated Hessian B = (Bij), here Btj = dijf(xi,x2), the conditions of Theorem 32 are realized then the form f"(x\, x2) is positive definite. By virtue of Theorem 15 the conditions f'(x\,x2) = 0 and f"(xi,x2) 3> 0 provide minimum for / at this point.• Example 35. Let f{x\,x2) be a twice continuously differentiable function in M2, $7 be a compact domain in R™, S(Q) be the corresponding L.Schwartz space of the quickly decreasing functions (see [2]). Consider the integral functional F{xux2)
= J f(Xl(t),x2(t))dt;
(Xi(-) € S(D),
i = 1,2).
(25)
A straightforward calculation shows that dijF(x1,x2){hj,hi)
= Jdijf(x1{t1),x2(t2))hj(tj)hi(ti)dt1dt2;
(26)
whence by Fubini theorem it follows that (dijF • dkiF)(hi,hi) = fdijf(t1,t2)dkif(ti,U2)hi(ti)hi{u2)cU;1dt2du2. n3
(27)
Hence the partial normal derivatives d^F commute. At last, it's clear from (26)(27) taking into account nuclearity of S(Q) [2] that the inequalities dnf
> 0; d11f • d22f - d12f • d21f > 0
(28)
fulfilled on the set {(xi(t),x2(t))\t £ $7} provide the conditions l)-2) of Theorem 34. Thus, together with the necessary extreme conditions dif(x1(t),x2(t)) = d2f(xl(t),x2(t)) = 0 ( t e n ) the inequalities (28) guarantee minimum of the integral functional (25) at the point
(n(-),i2(.))6 5(n)xs(n). Remark 36. In fact, we have used in the reasonings above only the fact that the spaces under consideration are projective limits of the Hilbert spaces, without taking account of nuclearity of the embeddings. Thus, Theorems 32-34 are transferred to the projective limits of the Hilbert spaces. Remark 37. By analogy with the results of Section 1, Theorems 29 and 34 are transferred to the twice continuously if-differentiable two variables functions and -R'-extremums.
Extreme Problems and Scales of the Operator Spaces
225
Theorem 38. / / a mapping f : E —> F is twice K-normally differentiate at a point x £ E then f'^ is a symmetric bilinear operator from E x E to F. Proof. It is sufficient to note that for each convex compact set C B x the equality = ((/KOIC) (f\c)' holds true. Because (f\c)' (x) is symmetric by Theorem 29 then f'j({x) is symmetric bilinear operator, too.D Theorem 39. Let Ei (i = 1,2) are the real complete nuclear LCS, E\ = E2, real function f(xi,x2) be twice continuously K-differentiate at a point (xi,x2) € Ei x Ei, moreover ditKf(xi,x2) = d2tKf(xi,x2) = 0. / / (i) dutKf > 0 and dn,Kf commutes with di2,icf, d2i,Kf, d22,Kf; (n) dniKf • d22,Kf - d12,Kf • d2i,Kf » 0; at (xi,x2) then f has a strong K-minimum at this point. Proof. Since a product C\ x C2 of two convex compact sets Ct C Ei (i = 1,2) is also convex compactum in E\ x E2 it follows that all partial if-derivatives ditxf and dijtxf can be considered as usual partial normal derivatives for each restriction f\c, here C is an arbitrary convex compactum in E. Therefore Theorem 34 provides a strong minimum of f\c at (xi, X2), i.e. a strong isT-minimum of / at this point. • Applying Theorem 39 to the Euler-Lagrange functional b
*(2/i,2/2) = / /(^2/i(z),2/2(a;),2/;(x),y2(x))t2x
(29)
a
we obtain the following Theorem 40. If a function u = f(x,yi,y2,zi,z2) is twice continuously normally differentiate on [a;b] x E x E x E x E, here E is a projective limit of the Hilbert spaces, Euler-Lagrange variational equations dy1
dx\dzJ-U'
dy2
[M)
dx\dz2)-^
are fulfilled at a point (yi(-),y2(-)) £ W^fa, &];.£ x E), d2<&K/dy\ is K-positive definite and commutes with d2Qx/dyidyj (i,j = 1,2) and the determinant dii,K*
• 922,K$
~ d12,K$
• d21tK$
(31)
is K-positive definite at {yi(-), 2/2O) then $ has a strong K-minimum at this point. Proof. Set y(-) = (yi(-),y2(-))
f(x,yi,y2,zi,z2).
: [a;b] -» E2, z = (Zl,z2)
£ E2, J{x,y,z)
=
Then the functional (29) can be considered as b
$(y) = Jj(x,y(x),y'(x))dx, a
(32)
226
Igor V. Orlov
here / G C2{[a;b] x E2 x E2). According to Theorem 24 the functional (329) is continuously normally differentiable. The conditions (30) are equivalent to
*?-*-( £.)=<>, dy
dx \&z )
that, in turn, is equivalent (see [11], Corollary 6.1) to $ (y) = 0, or dMyi,y2) = 0, d2$(yi,y2) = 0. (33) Further, by virtue of Theorem 26 the functional (32) and hence the functional (29) is twice continuously K-differentiable. It allows us, taking into account (33) and (31), to apply to this case Theorem 3 9 . • References 1. V.I. Averbuch, O.G. Smolyanov, The various definitions of derivative in linear topological spaces, Uspekhi matematicheskih nauk 23 (4) (1968) 67-116. (Russian). 2. Yu.M. Berezansky, Z.G. Sheftel, G.F. Us, Functional Analysis. Vol.2. Birkhauser Verlag, Basel-Boston-Berlin, 1996. 3. H. Cartan, Calcul differentiel. Formes differentiel. Hermann, Paris, 1967. 4. S.G. Gindikin, L.R. Volevich, Distributions and Convolution Equations. Gordon and Breach Sc.PubL, 1992. 5. S.G. Krein, Yu.I. Petunin, Scales of the Banach spaces, Uspekhi matematicheskih nauk 21 (2) (1966) 89-169. (Russian). 6. S.G. Krein, Yu.I. Petunin, E.M. Semenov, Interpolation of linear operators. Nauka, Moscow, 1978. (Russian). 7. V.S. Melnik, About T- differentiable functionals, Doklady RAN 324 (5) (1992) 928-932. (Russian). 8. I. V. Orlov, Normal indices of linear and nonlinear mappings in the locally convex spaces and scales of the spaces, Spectral and Evolution Problems 11 (2001), TNU Publ., Simferopol, 18-29. 9. I.V. Orlov, Normal indices and normal differentiation in the locally convex spaces, Ucheniye zapiski TNU 15 (1) (2002)112-121. (Russian). 10. I.V. Orlov, Normal decompositions of Operator Spaces over Locally Convex Spaces, Funktsional'niy Analiz i Ego Prilozheniya 36 (4) (2002) 78-80. (Russian). 11. I.V. Orlov, Normal differentiability and functional extremums in locally convex space, Cybernetics and System Analysis, (4) (2002) 23-34. (Russian). 12. I.V. Orlov, Quadratic forms in locally convex spaces, Dinamicheskie systemi 17 (2001), KFT Publ., Simferopol, 196-205. (Russian). 13. I.V. Orlov, Young theorem for normal derivatives and functional extremums in the products of the nuclear spaces, Uchenye Zapiski TNU, 15 (2) (2002). (Russian).
Extreme Problems and Scales of the Operator Spaces
227
14. I.V. Orlov, Normal functional indices and normal duality, Methods of Functional Analysis and Topology 8 (3) (2002). 15. H. Shaefer, Topological Vector spaces. MacMillan Company, New York London, 1966. 16. I.V. Skrypnik, Nonlinear elliptic high order problems. Naukova Dumka, Kiev, 1973. (Russian). 17. H. Tribel, Theory of the function spaces. Mir, Moscow, 1986, (Russian). 18. A.V. Uglanov, Calculus of variations in the Banach spaces, Matematicheskii Sbornik 191 (10) (2000) 105-118. (Russian). 19. M.Z. Zgurovsky, Melnik, V.S., Nonlinear analysis and infinitive-dimensional system control. Naukova Dumka, Kiev, 1999. (Russian).
This page is intentionally left blank
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
229
On some Problem of the Convolution of Bounded Functions Krzysztof Piejko a Janusz Sokol a Jan Stankiewicz b a
Department of Mathematics, Rzeszow University of Technology, Poland b Institute of Mathematics, University of Rzeszow, Poland
Abstract We consider convolution properties of regular functions subordinated to the homography jirgf • We give some extension of result from [11]. Key words: convolution, subordination, bounded functions 2000 MSC: 30C45
1. Introduction Let Ti be the class of regular functions in the open unit disc A = {z € C : \z\ < 1} and let Af be the class of functions f € Ti normalized by /(0) = 1. By S we denote the class of functions / € H which are univalent in A and normalized by /(0) = /'(0) - 1 = 0 . Let S* and Sc are the classes of starlike and convex functions: S* = {f € S : / ( A ) is starlike with respect to the origin}, Sc = {f e S : / ( A ) is convex}. The class of Schwarz functions, denoted by 0, is the class of functions ui € H, such that w(0) = 0 and \u(z)\ < 1 for z € A. Email addresses: piejkoaprz.rzeszow.pl (Krzysztof Piejko), jsokolSprz.rzeszow.pl (Janusz Sokol), jan.stankiewicz8prz.rzeszow.pl (Jan Stankiewicz).
230
Krzysztof Piejko, Janusz Sokol, Jan Stankiewicz
We say that a function / is subordinate to a function g in A (and write / -< g or f(z) -< g{z)) if there exists a function u> G f2 such that f(z) = g (u(z)); z G A. If the function g is univalent in A, then f
<=* f(0)=g(0)
A /(A)cg(A).
In this case we have OJ(Z) = g~1(f(z)). Let the functions / and g are of the form CO
OC
/(*) = $>„*», g(z) = J2bnZn, n=0
zcA.
n=0
We say that Hadamard product of / and g is the function / * g if oo
(/ *9) (*) = f(z) * g(z) = ^ OnftnZ". n=0
J. Hadamard [3] proved, that the radius of convergence of / * g is greater or equal to the product of radii of convergence of the corresponding series / and g. In particular, if /, g e H, then also f * g £?i. Because for /,
On some Problem of the Convolution of Bounded Functions
231
Theorem C. If the functions F and G are convex in A, then for all functions f and g we have f
f*g
For the classes Qi C H and Q2 C H the convolution Qi * Q2 is denned as
Qi*Q2 = {h£H; h = f*g, f e Q 1;
P(A,B) = {feX: /( Z )^i±iij. W. Janowski introduced the class P(A, B) in [4] and considered it for — 1 < B < A < 1. If A = B = 1 then the class P(l, 1) is the class of functions with positive real part (Caratheodory functions). In 1988 J. Stankiewicz and Z. Stankiewicz [11] investigated convolution properties of the class P(A, B) and proved the following theorem: Theorem D. If A,B,C,D are some complex numbers such that A + B ^ 0, C + D^O, \B\ < 1, |£>| < 1 , then P(A, B) * P(C, D) c P{AC + AD + BC, BD), moreover, if \B\ = 1 or \D\ = 1, then P(A, B) * P(C, D) = P(AC + AD + BC, BD). The equality between the class P(A, B) * P(C, D) and the class P(AC + AD + BC,BD) for 11?| < 1 and \D\ < 1 was an open problem. In this paper we prove that the above mentioned classes are different. For the proof we need the following two theorems. Theorem E. (G. Enestrom [1], S. Kakeya [5], see also A.W.Goodman [2]). If do > o,\ >
h anzn
has no roots in A = {z G C : \z\ < 1}. oo
Theorem F. (W. Rogosinski [8]). If the function f(z) = Yl a-n.zn is subordinate n=0 oo
to the function F(z) = J2 PnZn then for iV = 0 , 1 , 2 , 3 , . . . we have n=0 N
N
n=0
n=0
232
Krzysztof Piejko, Janusz Sokol, Jan Stankiewicz
2. Main result The following theorem is a fulfillment of Theorem D. Theorem 1. Let A, B, C, D are some complex numbers such that B + A =/= 0, D + C ^ 0. If \B\ < 1 and \D\ < 1, then P(A, B) *P(C, D) ± P(AD + AC + BC, BD).
(1)
Proof. The proof will be divided into three steps. First we give a family of bounded functions u>v; v = 1,2,3... having special property of coefficients. Afterwards we construct, using iov, a function belonging to the class P(AD + AC + BC, BD) and finally we will show that such function is not in the class P(A, B) * P(C, D). Now we use a method of E. Landau [6] and we find some functions UJ"', v = 1,2,..., which are basic in this proof. We observe that
i ^ - ( 7 l b ) ' = ( | > ' * ) ' - 1 + ' + 'J+ '> +"-where po = l and
Pk
1 •3 • • (2k — 1) = — 2 4 _ ' \ 2 k ';
k = 1,2,3,...
(2)
For some v 6 N we set i/
= 1 +P1Z +P2Z2+PsZ3 + • • •+p1/ZV
KV(Z) = Y^Pk^ fc=0
and note that K2v{z)
= l + z + z2 + --- + zu + biy+1z'/+1
w h e r e bv+\,...,
b2vz2v,
+ •••+
b2i, G C .
Let LOV be given by [ )
~
~Z
Kv{z)
l+PlZ+P2Z2
+
. . .
+ p
^
•
W
Since Pk>Ph
2k
2k + 1 + 2=
Pk+1
Where
fc
=
0 1 2 3
' ' ' '-'
then for v £ N we have 1 >Vi >P2 >P3 > •••
>Pv>0-
Applying Theorem E to the polynomial Kv we obtain Kv{z) ^ 0 for \z\ < 1 hence the function uf is regular in A. Moreover uiu(0) = 0 and on the circle \z\ — 1 we have
On some Problem of the Convolution of Bounded Functions
233
In this way we conclude that for v G {1,2, 3,...} w" € n.
(4)
Let for a certain i / g N the function LOV is represented by following power series expansions: + ^z2+^z3
^(z)=^z
+ ---,
and let s^(z) denote partial sum < W = X > ^ f c = tf * + ^^ 2 + 73^3 + ' •" + 7^" fc=l
for a l i n e { 1 , 2 , 3 , . . . , v + 1}. Now we will estimate s£(l) = 7i + 72 + 73 + • ' ' + 7n- If we integrate on a circle C : |z| = r in a counterclockwise direction with 0 < r < 1 then we obtain fazrndz c
=0
and
f-dz c
= 2wai,
(5)
for all integer m 7^ — 1 and a € C Hence < ( l ) = 7 r + 7 2 + 7 3 + ' " - + 7^ =
c
c
where Q ( z ) = 1 + z + • • • + z n ~ l + dnzn
+ dn+1zn+1
+••• +
dszs,
is any polynomial whose first n terms are equal to 1 + z + z2 + • • • + z"" 1 . If for n < v + 1 we set Q(z)
= K l { z ) = l + z + --- + z n + -- + z» + K + 1 z » + l + ••• + b 2 v z 2 \
then we obtain
c From (3) it follows that
234
Krzysztof Piejko, Janusz Sokol, Jan Stankiewicz
<(D=^ / HSF^)^=hi*""*- G) K»{z)dz= c
c n
=^y^- fi+pi^+---+^^(i+pi^+---+p^ i/ )^. c Using (5) we get S
n(!) = Pv-n+1 + Pv-n+2P\ + Pu-n+3P2 H
f P^Pn-1,
where (pfc) are given by (2), and so n S
n
n(!) = ^ l k ='Y^Pv-n+kPk-l-
(6)
fc=l fc=i
By the above we have -ft = 8v1{l)=pv and for all v G {1,2,3,...} and n £ {2,3,4,... ,u + 1} n
n—1
7^ = < ( 1 ) - < - l ( l ) = ^Pv-n+kPk-l fc=l
-^Pv-n+l+kPk-l *=1
and therefore n-l
7n = 5 Z (P"-«+fe -Pu-n+l+k)Pk-l
+PuPn-l-
(7)
fc=l
The sequence (pn) is positive and decreasing, then from (7) it follows that 7^>0
for all
v£N
and n G {1,2,3,... ,u + 1}.
(8)
We conclude from (6) that for n = zv + 1
<+i(l) = 7iv + 72 + • • • + ll + 7^+1 = £p fc -iPfc-i = 1 +
itpl
fc=i fc=i oo
Since ^ p^ = oo then fc=i
lim < + 1 ( l ) = lim ( 1 + ^ p 2 f c ) = +oo. v—toe
'
i/—>oo \
\
^ — '
fc=l
(9)
/
/
This means that wv, v G N, is the Schwarz function, for which the initial v + 1 coefficients are positive and their sum increase to infinity when v —> oo.
On some Problem of the Convolution of Bounded Functions
235
Now using the properties of ui" we construct the function belonging to the class P(AC + AD + BC, BD) which is not in the class P(A,B)*P{C,D), where \B\ < 1 and \D\ < 1. Since for all x G C; \x\ = 1 we have P(A,B) =P(Ax,Bx). Thus we can assume without loss of generality that B G [0; 1) and D G [0; 1). For fixed v G N let hv be given by h {Z) =
l + (AC + AD + BC)u"(z) l-BD^iz) '
(10)
where u>v € f2 is given by (3). It is clearly that h {Z)
1 + {AC + AD + BC)z * 1-BDz
and so hv G P(AC + AD + BC, BD). Suppose that there exist the functions / G P(A,B), g G P(C,D) such that f{z)*g(z) = h"{z).
(11)
The functions / and g have the following form: Ujjz)
1+AUT.JZ) f{z)=
=1
l-Bu,l(z)
+ {A +
B)
l-Bco1(z)
and
1 + Co;2(z) 3(Z)
, / r , m_^fL_
- 1 - Z?W2(2) ~ X+
( C + D)
1 - £>W2(Z)'
where u)i,u>2 G fi. For simplicity of notations we write f(z) = 1 + (A + B)f(z),
g(z) = 1 + (C + D)g{z),
where
/ » = _!*£) w
and g ( Z ) = "*<*>
(12)
y w l-5Wl(z) l-Z^Cz) Using these notation we can rewrite (11) as
[1 + (A + BJ/W] *[1+ (C+ !,)«,„ .
1+
(
^ 1
+
^
K M
and so
1 + (A + B)(C + D)f(z) * g(z) = 1 + (A + B){C + D)l _ ^ J , ( z ) -
236
Krzysztof Piejko, Janusz Sokol, Jan Stankiewicz
This means that f(z)*g(z) = hl'(z),
(13)
where -
_ [
^(z)
>~
1-BDLJ"{Z)'
Let the functions h", f and 3 have the following expansions in A: 00
00
00
n=l
n=l
n—1
Prom (12) it follows, that
/ » •< ^
and 5 (.) ^ ^-fL-,
and hence by Theorem F we obtain W
N
1 _ I RI2JV
and
EW^TW n=l
'
1 _ I n|2iV
a
El^l ^TrSir ; ^= 1'2'3"-
'
n=l
' '
Letting TV —> 00 we get
n=l
n=l
'
'
'
'
hence 00
00
£ ( K I 2 + l6nl2) = E[(KI-l 6 «!) 2 + 2 MKl] < n=l
(is)
TI=1
- 1-|B|2
1-|.D|2'
From (13) and (14) we obtain on6n = C
for n = 1,2,3,... ,
(16)
therefore (15) and (16) give 00
00
2
Y,(M-K\)
'
'
'
Now we observe that V
U iz)
"
v
'
'
n=l
(17)
On some Problem of the Convolution of Bounded Functions = w"(z) + BD [UJ»(Z)}2 + B2D2
= (liz
+ 72z 2 + ---)+BD
+B2D2
(tfz
( 7 £ + 2BD-y^
(tfz
[uiv{z)f
+ •••
+ l2*2 + • • O 2 +
+ rtz2 + • • - ) 3 + • • • = 7 j > + ( 7 £ + BD^l)2) 2
2
+ B D (Yi?)
237
z2 +
3
z + •• •
Since B € [0; 1) and D £ [0; 1) and since (8) we have
E K l = W I + H + BD(tf)2\
+ | 7 J + 2BD>yW
+ B 2 D 2 ( Y i ? \ + •••
n=l
> E Kl ^ ^ + ^ + 73 + - + iWi = <+i(i)n=l
From the above we have for all v G {1, 2 , 3 , . . . } oc
EKI><+I(1)-
(18)
n=l
Combining (17) and (18) we obtain 0 ^ 2_^ (la™| ~ Pn|) - i _ |_g|2 + x - IDI2 ~ ^sv+i(^-
^^)
From (9) it follows that we be able to choose a suitable i^ such that the right side of (19) is negative. In this way (19) follows the contradiction and the proof is complete. From Theorem 1 and Theorem D we immediately have that this two classes
P(A, B) * P(C, D) and P(AD + AC + BC, BD) are equal if and only if \B\ = 1 or \D\ = 1. References 1.
G. Enestrom, Harledning af en allma formel for antalet pensionarer som vid en godtycklig tidpunkt forefinnas inom en sluten pensionskassa, Ofversigt af Kongl. Vetenskaps - Akademiens Forhandlingar 50 (1893) 405-415. 2. A.W. Goodman, Univalent functions .vol. 2, Mariner Publishing Co., Tampa, Florida, 1983. 3. J. Hadamard, Theoreme sur les series entieres, Ada Mathematica 22 (1898) 55-63. 4. W. Janowski, Some extremal problems for certain families of analytic functions, Ann. Polon. Math. 28 (1957) 297-326. 5. S. Kakeya, On the limits of the roots of an algebraic equation with positive coefficients, Tohoku Math. Jour. 2(1912) 140-142. 6. E. Landau, Darstellung und Begrundung einiger neurer Ergebnise der Funktionentheorie. Chelsea Publishing Co., New York, 1946.
238
Krzysztof Piejko, Janusz Sokol, Jan Stankiewicz
7. G. Polya, I. J. Schoenberg, Remarks on de la Vallee Pousin means and convex conformal maps of the circle, Pacific J. Math. 8 (1958) 295-334. 8. W. Rogosinski, On the coefficients of subordinate functions, Proc. London Math. Soc. 48 (2) (1943) 48-82. 9. S. Ruscheweyh, T. Sheil-Small, Hadamard product of schlicht functions and the Polya-Schoenberg conjecture, Comtnt. Math. Helv. 48 (1973) 119-135. 10. S. Ruscheweyh, J. Stankiewicz, Subordination under convex univalent functions, Bull. Polon. Acad. Sci. Math 33 (1985) 499-502. 11. J. Stankiewicz, Z. Stankiewicz, Convolution of some classes of function, Folia Sci. Univ. Techn. Resoviensis 48(1988) 93-101. 12. H. S. Wilf, Subordintating factor sequences for convex maps of the unit circle, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 12 (1961) 689-693.
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
239
Superstrictly Singular and Superstrictly Cosingular Operators * Anatolij Plichko a a
Institute of Mathematics, Cracow University of Technology, Cracow, Poland
Abstract We prove some known and new results on superstrictly singular operators and establish full duality between superstrictly singular and superstrictly cosingular operators. Key words: Singular operators, superstrictly singular operators, Banach spaces 2000 MSC: 46B07, 46B28, 47B06
1. Introduction Through in this paper the space means a Banach space and the operator means a bounded linear operator. Definition 1. [6]. An operator T from a space X into a space Y is called strictly singular if there does not exist a number c > 0 and an infinite dimensional subspace E CX such that ||Ta;|| ^ c\\x\\ for all x in E. The following local version of this definition is natural. Definition 2. An operator T is called superstrictly singular (SSS for short) if there does not exist a number c > 0 and a sequence of subspaces En C X, dim En = n, such that ||Ta;|| ^ c||x|| for all x in Un En . (1) * Partially supported by DAAD foundation Email address: aplichko9kspu.kr.ua (Anatolij Plichko).
240
Anatolij Plichko
Put for an operator T bn(T) = sup
inf
||Tx|| ,
(2)
where supremum is taken over all n-dimensional subspaces En C X and S(En) is the unit sphere of En. Obviously
l|r|| = 6 i ( r ) > 6 2 ( r ) > . - - > o , T is SSS if and only if bn(T) -> 0 as n -> oo (3) and the greatest constant c for which (1) is satisfied, is equal to lin^^oo bn(T) . The numbers bn(T), which are called the Bernstein numbers, were considered in Approximation Theory (see [21] and references therein). They are among the classical widths. However those widths are considered mostly for compact sets. Evidently, every compact operator is SSS. We almost do not see noncompact SSS operators in [21]. For operators, defined on a Hilbert space, the Bernstein numbers are connected with so-called AMD numbers (see [2]). SSS operators were introduced implicitly in [14] and explicitly, under the name "Sg-operators" or "operators of class CQ", in [10]-[12]. Probably, the difference can be explained by absence of good letter & in Kharkiv. Implicitly these operators were considered also in [23]. The term "superstrictly singular operator" was introduced in [4]; where this class was investigated by technique of superideals. Our note is inspired by the paper [4]. We do not try to calculate the exact values of bn(T), but we shall determine whether they converge to zero or not. Obviously, every SSS operator is strictly singular. It is easy to see that T has the finite rank if and only if bn(T) = 0 begining with some number TV. Observe also, that if T is infinite dimensional then the supremum in (2) can be taken over subspaces En such that T\sn are injective, only. Then the formula (2) turns into following
MT) = s u p
IR^Fl
(2
°
where the supremum is taken over all n-dimensional subspaces En such that the restrictions T\&n are injective.
2. Some properties of SSS operators Using the spectrum of continuous function and Dvoretzky's theorem, V. Milman [11] has shown that SSS operators form a closed ideal, i.e. that a sum of SSS operators is SSS, a composition (right or left) of SSS operator with the bounded operator is SSS and L(X, Y)-norm limit of SSS operators is SSS. Using superideal technique and the Dvoretzky theorem, this result was proved in [4] too. We shall deduce Milman's result from the following Theorem 1. This theorem was proved in [11] too (using the spectrum and Dvoretzky theorem). Our proof of Theorem 1 is elementary and does not use Dvoretzky's theorem.
Superstrictly Singular and Super strictly Cosingular Operators
241
Theorem 1. The operator T : X —> Y is SSS if and only if for every sequence of subspaces En C X, dim En = n, there exist subspaces Fn C En such that dim Fn —> oo and \\T\FA ^ °
as
n^oo
.
The "if part of this statement is evident. To prove the "only if part we need: Lemma 1. For every e > 0 there exists a sequence k(n) —> oo as n —> oc such that every normed space En, dim£" n = n, contains subspaces G\,..., Gk(n)t each are of the dimension k(n), whose finite dimensional decomposition constant is less than 1 + e . The proof of this lemma is easily can deduced from Mazur's lemma on the basic sequences ([8], p.4). Lemma 1 also follows immediately from the Dvoretzky's theorem, but we prefer not to use the Dvoretzky theorem here. • Proof of Theorem 1. Let e > 0. Construct, using Lemma 1, subspaces (G™)i=l™ of En so that dimG™ = k(n) —» oo and (G")i=l™ have, for fixed n, the finite dimensional decomposition constant less than 1 + e. Using (2), choose elements x? in 5(G") , i = l,...,k(n) such that HTx™!! < bk(n)(T) (because of finite dimensional nature of En, infimums in (2) are attained). Now choose a sequence 1 < l(n) < k(n) so that l(n) —> oo and l(n) -fcfc(n)(T) —> 0 as n -^ oo. Put Fn = lin(cc™)'^1). Then for x € S(Fn) , x = Y^l a^, we have according to finite dimensional decomposition nature |ai| < 1 + e , M < 2(1 + £ ) , . . . , \al(n)\ < 2(1 + e). Hence l(n)
J2 \ai\\\Tx?\\ < (J2 \ai\)bk{n)(T)
< 2(1 + e)l(n)bk{n){T)
- . 0 as n -> oo . D
i=l
Remark 1. Theorem 1 is, to a certain extent, a development of the well known Kato's result [6]: Let X and Y be infinite dimensional spaces. Assume that T : X —* Y is an operator such that the restriction of T to any subspace of finite codimension is not an isomorphism. Then for every e > 0 there is an infinite dimensional subspace E of X so that T\E is compact and ||T|.E|| < e. Corollary 1. An operator T is SSS if and only if for every sequence of finite dimensional subspaces En C X , dimEn —> oo, there are subspaces Fn C En such that dim Fn —> oo and \\T\FA
-*0
as
n
-> °° •
Recall that for given e > 0, a space E is called (1 + e) -Euclidean if there exists an operator U from E onto some Euclidean space with ( l - e ) I M | < \\Ux\\ < ( l + e ) | | z | |
VxeE
.
242
Anatolij Plichko
Application of Dvoretzky's theorem gives immediately Corollary 2 The following conditions are equivalent: (i) T is SSS; (ii) for every e > 0 and every sequence of (1 + e)-Euclidean subspaces En
n —• oo ;
(Hi) for every e > 0 and every sequence of (1 + e)-Euclidean subspaces En c X with dim .E n —> oo , £/iere ore subspaces Fn C JE^ , dim Fn —» oo sttc/t i/toi I I T I F II ^ 0
as
n ^
oo .
Corollary 3. ^4 sum T + U of two SSS operators is SSS. Proof. Let En C X be an arbitrary sequence of subspaces, dimIS n —> oo. There are, by Theorem 1, subspaces Fn C £ „ so that dimF n —> oo and ||T|fn|| —> 0. By definition, there exists a sequence xn G S(Fn), such that ||£/a;n|| —> 0. Then
\\(T + U)xn\\ ^ 0 as n ^ o o . n The fact that a composition of SSS and bounded operator is SSS, can be proved very simply. Corollary 4 Let X = Xi © X2 , Tx : Xx -> Y and T2 : X2 ->• Y be SSS. Then the operator T : X —•> Y is defined by the formula T(xi + x2) = T\X\ + T2x2,
i i € l i , i 2 e X2 is SSS. Proposition 1. An L(X,Y)-norm
limit of SSS operators (Xfc) is SSS.
Proof. If we assume conversely that there exists c > 0 and a sequence of subspaces En C X , dimEn —> oo, with the property (1) for T. Then choose k such that \\T - Tfc|| < c/2. Since Tk is SSS, inf{||Tfex|| : x € S(En)} < c/2 for some n. Hence inf{||Tx|| : x e S(E)} < c . This contradicts (1). D The following statement is contained in [11] and [4] but we give a more transparent proof. Theorem 2. If T is not SSS then for every sequence en > 0 there are (1 + en)Euclidean subspaces En C X , dim.E n —> oo, and a constant d > 0 so that for every n {d-en)\\x\\ < \\Tx\\ < (d + en)||a;|| Vx e En . Proof. Of course, we can not do without the Dvoretzky theorem here. Applying it twice, we obtain the existence of (1 + e n )-Euclidean subspaces Fn C X , dimF ra —> oo, and a constant c > 0 such that
Superstrictly Singular and Super strictly Cosingular Operators
243
c||z|( < ||Tz|| Vz G UnFn , and the subspaces TFn are (1 + e n )-Euclidean too. To continue the proof we use the easily-proved L e m m a 2. For any segment [a, b], £ > 0, and a natural number I there is a natural number k = k(l, a, b, e) such that any l-element subset of [a, b] contains a k-element subset of diameter < e. Moreover k(l, a, b, e) can be chosen so that k(l, a, b, e) —> oo as I —> oo. And also
Lemma 3. Let 0 < a < b , 0 < e < a and I € N. Then there exists a natural number k = k(l, a, b, e) such that k —> oo as I —> oo and for any operator T from l-dimensional Euclidean space F onto l-dimensional Euclidean space G satisfying the condition a\\x\\ < \\Tx\\
k
\\T(J2ajei])f = J2\aj\2\\Teij\\2 < £ |a,f(d + e)2 = (d + e)2\\ J > j e i . ||2 . (5) Put E = \in(eij)j=1. The right inequality in (4) follows from (5). The left one is verified in the same way. • Now it is clear how to finish the proof of Theorem 2. • Remark 2 An infinite dimensional version of Theorem 2 is also true: // T is an isomorphism from one Hilbert space into another, then there exists an infinite dimensional subspace E C H such that the restriction T\E is proportional to an isometry up to e. The same fact is true for lp spaces, 1 < p < oo and CQ [11]. Note two another properties of SSS operators. Proposition 2. Let T : X —> Y be an operator and let T be the operator T from X into TX C Y. Then T is SSS if and only ifT is SSS, moreover for every n bn{T) = bn(T).
244
Anatolij Plichko
Proposition 3. Let T : X —» Y be an operator and T : X/kevT —> Y be the corresponding quotient operator. IfTis SSS, then T is SSS too, moreover for every n
bn(T) < bn(f) . Remark 3. An example of quotient map T : l\ —> l\/Z ~ I2 shows that the converse statement is not true (we shall show further that T is SSS; of course T is an isometry).
3. Examples a) Strictly singular operators which are non SSS As it is well known, every strictly singular operator on lp , 1 < p < 00 or on CQ is compact ([8], p.76). Every operator from lp into lq , p =/= q , 1 < p,q < 00, and from lp into CQ and from CQ into lp, is strictly singular ([8], p.75). Moreover, every operator from lp into lq for p > q and from CQ into lp, is compact (Pitt's theorem ([8], p.76). Let us give Example 1. A (strictly singular) operator from lp into lq , 1 < p < q < 00, which is not SSS. Denote by En a subspace of lp which consists of sequences with supports contained between 2n and 2 n + 1 . Let Fn C En be a subspace spanned by 2n-dimensional version of Rademacher functions and Gn be its complement spanned by the remaining 2n-dimensional version of Walsh functions. From Khinchine's inequality ([8], p.66) it follows that there are constants a,b > 0 and dn > 0 such that ad n ||x|| p < ||x||, < 6dn||a;||p for every x in Fn , and also that the projections in En onto Fn along Gn both in norm lp and in norm lq are uniformly bounded. Define an operator T in the following way: if x £ Fn, put Tx = dnx ; if x € Gn, put Tx = x. Then we extend T to a linear and bounded operator from lp into lq . • Remark 4. For p = 2 , q > 2 a similar example was given in [10] and [11]. Remark 5. It will follow from the next Proposition 6 that each operator from l\ into lp , 1 < p < 00, is SSS. Soon we shall consider co-valued operators . Corollary. Let 1 < p < q < 00. For every infinite dimensional Cp-space X and Cq-space Y (in the sense of [7]) there exists a strictly singular operator from X into Y which is non SSS. Indeed, any infinite dimensional £ p -space contains a complemented subspace isomorphic to lp [7]. Let us consider co-valued operators .
Superstrictly Singular and Superstrictly Cosingular Operators
245
Proposition 4. Let X be a Banach space with a finite dimensional decomposition (En). Then there exists an injective operator from X into c® which is non SSS. If X has no subspaces isomorphic to CQ then this operator is strictly singular. There exists an operator from an arbitrary separable Banach space into CQ which is non SSS. Proof. Of course, we can assume that &m\En —> oo. Let us take e > 0. Using the local universality of Co, choose subspaces Fn C CQ which are (1 + £)-isometric to En. So we have disjoint supports and let T : En —> Fn be these (1 + e)-isometries. It remains to extend T to an injective operator from X into CQ. TO prove the last statement of the proposition it is sufficient to use the well known fact that any infinite dimensional separable space has a quotient with basis ([8], p. 10). •
b) SSS operators which are non compact A natural example of noncompact SSS operator is the identity inclusion lp '—> lq for 1 < p < q < oo [12]. Probably, the widths 6n(^->) for these inclusions were calculated or estimated in the Approximation Theory. In [21] the inclusion l\ <-+ li (a width of octahedron) is considered. We shall deduce the result of [12] from a rather general statement on an inclusion into Co. However let us first recall L e m m a 4. [9],[12]. Let X be some linear space of functions of natural argument vanishing at infinity. Then every subspace En c X , dimE^ = n, contains a function x(i) such that max{|a:(i)| : i G N} is attained in at least n points. Proof. Obviously, every function \x(i)\ , x € X attains maximum in at least one point. Let for n the lemma be proved. Consider an arbitrary subspace En+\ C X , dim En+\ = n + 1. By the inductive hypothesis, there exists a function y € En+\ such that max \v(i)\ is attained at least in n points (ik)i- Without loss of generality we can assume that the maximum is attained exactly in n points. The subspace En = {x € X : x(ik) = 0 for k = 1 , . . . ,n} has codimension n, hence has a nonzero intersection with En+i. Let 0 / z £ En D En+i and max \z(i)\ = \z(j)\. Since z(ik) = 0, then j =/= ik, k = l,...,n. Then the family {Ay + (1 - \)z : 0 < A < 1} contains a function, which attains the maximum of modulus in n+1 points (ikYi~\ (in+i may be not equal to j). • Proposition 5. Let X be a space with a symmetric basis (e n ) which is not equivalent to the standard basis of CQ . Then the natural inclusion X <—> CQ is SSS. Proof. Let En C X , dim-En = n. Using Lemma 4, choose an element xn{i) G En, whose maximum modulus is attained at least in n points and is equal to one. Obviously, ||a; n ||x —* oo, which proves that our operator is SSS. • Remark 6. From the proof of Proposition 5 it follows that for the inclusion c-^p of lp to Co, we have
246
Anatolij Plichko Un\
f
p)
—
lii
Corollary 1. The natural inclusion lv <—> lq for 1 < p < q < oo is SSS. Proof. Indeed, II lp(j of lp to lg, q
n\
'pq! — "
Corollary 2. Let 1 < p < q < oo, X be an infinite dimensional Cp-space and Y be an infinite dimensional Cq-space. Then there exists an SSS and non compact operator from X into Y. To prove this it is sufficient to recall the arguments of corollary of Example 1. Corollary 3. There exists an SSS and non compact operator in the space Lp(0,1), 1 < p < oo, p / 2. Proof. Let X be a subspace of the space Lp spanned by Rademacher functions, Y be its complement (for p ^ 1), U be a complemented subspace of Lp isometric to lp , V be its complement. If p < 2 then there exists an SSS and non compact operator from U into X (Corollary 1). If p > 2 then there exists an SSS and non compact operator from X into U (Corollary 1, too). In the both case let us consider an arbitrary compact operator from V (resp. Y) into Lp and extend our operator onto the whole space (see Corollary 4 to Theorem 1). • R e m a r k 8. For 2 < p < oo Corollary 3 was proved in [12]. Of course, Corollary 3 remains true for every space containing complemented Lp(0,1), for example, for Lp(R) , l < p < o o , p ^ 2 . c) Spaces, where SSS{X, Y) = L(X, Y) Definition 7. We say that a space X contains no uniformly complemented almost Euclidean subspaces if there exists e > 0 such that for every sequence of (1 + e)Euclidean subspaces En C X, dimEn —> oo, the relative projection constants X(En,X) - K » . Definition 9. [16]. A space X is called locally TT-Euclidean if there is a d > 1 so that for all n and e > 0 there is an N such that every iV-dimensional subspace of
Superstrictly Singular and Super strictly Cosingular Operators
247
X contains a (1 + £)-isomorph of /£ which is d-complemented in X. Every £i-space or C^-space does not contain uniformly complemented almost Euclidean subspaces ([7], Corollaries 6,2). The well known Pisier space in which the norms of all n-dimensional projections grow with n [18] does not contain such subspaces. Locally 7r-Euclidean spaces coincide with B-convex spaces, i.e. spaces which contain no Z™ uniformly [17]. We shall use both terms B-convex and locally 7r-Euclidean. Proposition 6. Let X contain no uniformly complemented almost Euclidean subspaces and Y be B-convex. Then every operator T from X into Y is SSS. Proof. Suppose contrary to our claim, that there is a sequence of (l + £)-Euclidean subspaces En C X , dim.En —> oo, such that inf
||Tx|| > c > 0 for every n .
Passing, if necessary, to subspaces, we may suppose that Fn := TEn are (1 + e)Euclidean and d-complemented. Let Pn be a projection of norm d of the space Y onto Fn. Put Qn = (T~1\Fn)PnT. Evidently, Qn is a projection of X onto En and
HQnii^iiT-'kii-ii^nii-imi^^imi. Contradiction. • R e m a r k 9. Proposition 6 is inspired by the following Proposition M P [14]. Let T be an operator from the space C(S) of all continuous functions on a compactum S into l^. Then
bn(T) < \IJp-n , where pn is the projection constant of n-dimensional Euclidean space. Proof. Probably, we have the assume in Proposition MP ||T|| < 1. Let En be an n-dimensional subspace of C(S) such that T\sn is one to one and Fn = TEn. Then there is a projection Qn : C(S) -»• En with ||Q n || < ||Tr~1|jFvi||. As it is well known, the projection constant qn of subspace En satisfies the inequality pn < qn-WTWWT-^Fj. Hence,
Pn
( £ WTxiW*)1'" < K sup (J2 \f(xi)\P)1/p •
248
Anatolij Plichko
The following proposition was known to the authors of [14]. Proposition 7. Every p-absolutely summing operator T, 1 < p < oo, is SSS. Proof. Since any p-absolutely summing operator is g-absolutely summing if p < q ([8], p.65), we can assume p > 2. Suppose T is not SSS. Take subspaces En from Theorem 2. Obviously, for "almost orthogonal" bases {xi}f=1 in these spaces we can not find a common K in the definition of p-absolutely summing operator. D Note that not every p-absolutely summing operator is compact. An operator T from Lp(0,1) to a space Y is narrow if for each measurable subset A C (0,1) and each e > 1 there is x 6 Lp such that x2 = \A and ||Tx|[ < s. For properties of narrow operators see [19]. In particular, every compact operator is narrow. There is a narrow operator which is not strictly singular. Question. Let 1 < p < oo. Is every SSS operator T : Lp —> Y narrow, for any space Yl
4. Connection between SSS of an operator and its duals Let us consider first the connection between STS of an operator and its dual. A simple example such as embedding L^ ^-> Li shows that an operator can be SSS x even if its dual is not strictly singular. So, as in the case of strictly singular operators, to find some connections between SSS of operator and its dual, we have to impose some additional conditions. It is found, that for SSS operators such conditions are more natural than those for strictly singular one. Probably, the following corollary of the principle of local reflexivity is well known. L e m m a 5. Let X be a locally TT-Euclidean space. Then X* is "locally w*Euclidean"; more exactly, there is a d* > 1 so that for all n and s there is an N such that every N-dimensional subspace of X* contains an n-dimensional (1 + e)-Euclidean and d-complemented in X* subspace , moreover this complement is weakly* closed. Proof. Since X is locally 7r-Euclidean it is B-convex [17]; hence X* is .B-convex (This is well known and it is easy to prove). So X* is locally TT-Euclidean. Given iV-dimensional subspace of X*, let En be a subspace of X* , dim.Era = n, the existence of which guarantee Definition 4. Let Fn be a d-complement of En. Then the annihilator in the dual space (F71)1- c X** has dimension n. Let e > 0. By the principle of local reflexivity there exists a (1 + e)-isometry T from (F71)1onto some subspace Xn C X such that (Tip,e) = (e,tp) for every
A simple proof of SSS of this embedding is contained, in fact, in ([20], Theorem 5.2).
Superstrictly Singular and Superstrictly Cosingular Operators
249
e G En- Hence, we can take X^ C X* as the desired weakly* closed complement for En . U Theorem 3. Let T be an SSS operator from a B-convex space X into arbitrary space Y. Then T* is SSS. Proof. Suppose T* is not SSS. By Lemma 5, X* is locally 7r*-Euclidean. Hence there are subspaces En C Y* such that dim En —+ oo, for some c > 0
l|T*/II>c||/U
V/€Un£n
and subspaces Fn = T*En are uniformly complemented in X*, moreover these complements Gn are weakly* closed. Put Xn = (Gn)T C X, where T denotes an annihilator in the predual space. Then dimX n = n and for x 6 S(Xn)
\\Tx\\=
sup (Tx,f)= /eS(Y-)
>
sup {x,T*f)>c feS(En)
sup
(x,T*f)
/eS(V)
sup {x,g)>^\\x\\. geS(Fn) a
D
R e m a r k 10. Let us recall that a space is called c-convex if it does not contain uniformly !£,. There exists an SSS operator T from a c-convex space X into a Hilbert space H such that T* is not even strictly singular. As an example, we can take a quotient map l\ —> l\/Z ~ H. The SSS of this quotient follows from Proposition 6. Theorem 3 is false for strictly singular operators ([5], p-47). The following definition was introduced in [12]: A closed subspace E of a space X is said to be partially complemented if there exists an infinite dimensional closed subspace F CX, E D F = 0, for which E + F = E + F. In [12] it is stated Theorem M. // every closed subspace E C X , codimi? = oo, is partially complemented, then the strict singularity of an operator T implies the strict singularity of T*. Prof. Milman informed us that the proof of Theorem M contains a gap and that his proof works only if X* is norm separable. So, the following question is natural; Let X be separable and suppose that every infinite codimensional subspace of X is partially complemented. Must X* be separable? Consider the James tree JT. Let us now consider the connection between the SSS of operator and its second dual. The following (probably, well known) fact plays a decisive role there. Corollary of the principle of local reflexivity. Let $ be a finite dimensional subspace of X** and suppose that for some c > 0
||T*VIJ > c|M| V ^ G $ . Then there exists a subspace E C X , dim E = dim $ ; such that \\Tx\\ > c\\x\\ Vx e E.
(6)
250
Anatolij Plichko
Proof. Let F be a finite dimensional subspace of Y* which (1 — e)-norms T**$, i.e. V<^ G T**$ there is / € S(F), for which (1 - s)\\
(x,g) = (g,Ux) Wx€E,geT*F. Then for arbitrary x 6 E and / G F (Tx,f) = (x,T*f) = (t/z,T*/> = (T**Ux,f) . Therefore, for any x G E there is an element / G S'(F) such that \\Tx\\>\{Tx,f)\ = \{T»Ux,f)\ > (1 - e)||T**C/x|| > (1 - e)c||C/i|| > | ^ | c | | i | | . So, (6) is satisfied for sufficiently small s . •
Corollary. IfT is SSS then T** is SSS too. Remark 11. The strict singularity of T does not imply the strict singularity of T**. We shall give examples in the next section.
5. Superstrictly cosingular operators Definition 5. [15]. An operator T : X —> Y is called strictly cosingular if for every closed subspace E CY of infinite codimension, the map QT (where Q : Y —> Y/E is a quotient map) has non-closed range. It is easy to see ([15]) that if T* is strictly singular, then T is strictly cosingular and if T* is strictly cosingular then T is strictly singular. The following quantitative characteristic of the operator T was introduced in [14]: an(T) = supinf{||Tx||y /B n : x G X ,
||Z||X/T-IE"
= 1} ,
En
where supremum is taken over all closed subspaces En C Y of codimension n and caps denote the corresponding quotient classes. Remark 12. More exactly, in [14] an(T) = sup infi \\Tx\\Y/E~ . Note that with this definition an{T) = 0 for every operator with infinite dimensional kernel. Definition 6. We call an operator T superstrictly cosingular (SSCS for short), if an(T) —> 0 as n —> oo. Evidently, every SSCS operator is strictly cosingular. We do not know any papers except for [14] where the numbers an(T) are considered. We do not know also, how the numbers an(T) are connected with other
Superstrictly Singular and Superstrictly Cosingular Operators
251
widths. The principle of local reflexivity gives the complete duality between SSS and SSCS operators. Namely, the following is true T h e o r e m 4. An operator T is SSS (SSCS) if and only ifT* is SSCS (respectively SSS). Proof. 1. T* is SSS => T is SSCS. Let En be a closed subspace of Y of codimension n and Fn = (En)^. Then d\mFn = n. Let / 0 <= S(Fn) be an element such that
Put En = X/T~xEn.
Then (En)* = T*Fn, Let x £ S(En) be an element such that (x,T*fo)=
sup (x,T*/>. /€5(F n )
Then for every representative x € x
\\fx\\= sup {fx,f) = sup (Tx,f) = feS(Fn)
f€S(Fn)
sup
Hence, ||Tx|| ^ IIT1*/^! and implication 1 is proved. 2. T is SSS=> T* is SSCS. By the Corollary of the principle of local reflexivity, T** is SSS. The T* is SSCS by item 1. 3. T is SSCS => T* is SSS. Let Fn be an n-dimensional subspace of Y*. We can suppose, by (2'), that the restriction T*\Fn is injective. Put En = X/(T*Fn)T. Then dim.En = n. Take an element Xo € S(En) such that (the norm ||Ta;|| is taken in the quotient space Y/Fj) \\Tx~o\\= inf \\fx\\. ll*ll=i Take an element / € S(Fn) such that
(Txo,f)= sup (fx,f). 11*11=1 Then ||T*/II= sup(x,T*/)=
sup
1|*|| = 1
z € z , ||£|| = 1
(x,T*f)= Sup(Tx,/}
ll*ll=i
sup
(Tx,f) =
iex,||£|| = l
= (f? o ,/)<||T^o||-
4. T* is SSCS =>T is SSS. By item 3, T** is SSS and hence T is SSS too. • Theorem 4 allows to transform results, known for SSS operators, into SSCS operators. Let us present some of them.
252
Anatolij Plichko
Corollary 1. SSCS operators form a closed ideal. Proof. See Corollary 3 of Theorem 1 and Proposition 1. Corollary 2. / / an operator T is SSCS then there exists a sequence of closed subspaces En CY of codimension n such that X/T~xEn are (1 + ^)-Euclidean and i n f { | | f i | | y / B n : \\&\\X/T-IE«
= 1} -> 0 as s -> oo .
Proof. See Corollary 2 of Theorem 1. Corollary 3. The natural embedding lp <-^r lq, where 1 < p < q < oo, is SSCS. Proof. See Corollary 1 of Proposition 5. Corollary 4. Let X be B-convex and suppose that Y does not contain uniformly complemented almost Euclidean subspaces. Then every operator T from X into Y is SSCS. Proof. See Proposition 6. Corollary 5. Let T be an SSCS operator from an arbitrary space X into a B-convex space Y. Then T* is SSCS too. Proof. See Theorem 6. Theorem 4 allows us also to prove non SSS or non SSCS of some particular operators. Let us present examples. Corollary 6. An operator T : LI(0,2TT) —> CQ which assigns to a function from L\ the sequence of its Fourier coefficients, is neither SSS nor SSCS, although it is strictly singular. Proof. As it is known ([22]) this operator is strictly singular but its adjoint is neither strictly singular nor strictly cosingular. It remains to use Theorem 2. • Corollary 7. The quotient map from l\ onto l\/Z ~ lp, 1 < p < oo , is SSS, by Proposition 6. The quotient map Q from l\ onto l\jY ~ CQ is strictly singular but the adjoint map Q* is not strictly cosingular ([15]; Example 1). So, Q is not SSS.
6. SSS and uniformly strictly singular operators In [13] the notion of uniformly strictly singular operator was introduced and it was shown that in well known Gowers-Maurey space every operator is a sum of scalar and uniformly strictly singular operators. After some small correction, the definition of [13] reads as follows. Definition 3. Let X be a space with a basis (efc) and Y be an arbitrary space. An element in X is called a block if it has finite support, that is , if it is a finite
Super strictly Singular and Super strictly Cosingular Operators
253
linear combination of elements of the basis. The blocks v and w are said to be consecutive if the support of v (the set of elements of the basis that form v as a linear combination) ends before the support of w begins. One says that an operator T : X —»• Y is uniformly strictly singular with respect to the basis (ek) if for every £ > 0 there exists a number N such that for arbitrary consecutive blocks (xn)^ there exists an element x € S{Ym{xn)\) such that ||Tx|| < e. Let us recall that a sequence (xn, f n ) , xn £ X, fn G X*, is called an M-basis if fn(xm) = Snm , [xn]T = X and for any x € -X"\{0} there is n such that fn(x) ^ 0. The M-basis is called 1-norming if H=sup{|/(z)|:/elin(/n)f\
||/|| = 1}
for every x £ X. Of course we can carry Definition 6 to M-basis. Evidently, every SSS operator is uniformly strictly singular with respect to any basis (and with respect to any M-basis). Proposition 8. Suppose that an operator T : X —> Y, where X is separable, is not SSS. Then T is not uniformly strictly singular with respect to some 1-norming M-basis. Proof. Let (xn, / „ ) be a 1-norming M-basis of X. Then for some c > 0 there is a sequence n^ | oo such that the subspaces Ek = lin(a;n : nu < n < rik+i) contain subspaces Fk so that inf{||Tx|| : x G S(Fk)} > c and dimi7/. —> oo. Hence, we can construct a basis enk+i, • • •, enfe+1 in every Ek so that Fk is a span of some of the first elements of this basis and the biorthogonal functionals span lin(/ n : rik < n < rajfe+i)- Obviously, T is not uniformly strictly singular with respect to (e n ) . • Question. Does exist a non SSS operator which is uniformly strictly singular with respect to each basis ? Proposition 9. Every operator T from lp into a space Y of type q, 1 < p < q < 2, is uniformly strictly singular with respect to the standard basis oflp. Proof. Since Y has type q, there exists a constant M such that for an arbitrary collection (yn)¥ in Y there are signs (6n) for which N
N
i
i
Let yn — Txn where (xn)^ C S(lp) are consecutive blocks. Then
\\T(J20nxn)\\ < M(J2 \\Txn\\*)1'* < M\\T\\Nll« . Since || Yln=i ^nXn\\ = Nl/p, this proves Proposition 9. • Let us give an
254
Anatolij Plichko
Example, of an operator which is uniformly strictly singular with respect to one basis but is not uniformly strictly singular with respect to another basis, and hence is non SSS. Let T : lp —> lq be the operator from Example 1, where 1 < p < q < 2. By Proposition 9, this operator is uniformly strictly singular with respect to the standard basis. Obviously, it is not uniformly strictly singular with respect to basis consisting of blocks w™ : 1 < i < 2™ , n = 1, 2 , . . . of Walsh systems. Remark 13. Prof. R. Wagner informs us, that from results of [1] it follows the existence of strictly singular operator which is not uniformly strictly singular with respect to any basis. His arguments are following: In [1] it was constructed a strictly singular operator T from a space X with a basis e^ —> 0 weakly to a space Y with the property: Whenever (e^) are elements of the basis with n < k\ < • • • < kn then T|iin(efc )n is isometry. Now take any other basis (xk) in X. Fix an n and let k\ = n + 1. Approximate efcj by a finite combination of x^. Let xmi be the last vector used to approximate efcl. There exists a number &2 such that hone of x\,... ,xmi has a significant role in the expression of efc2 as a combination of vectors x^ (because e^ —> 0 weakly). Approximate e^2 by a finite combination of Xk, k > mi . Let xm2 be the last vector used to approximate en2. Continue until n is reached. The sequence e ^ , . . . , e^n is almost a block sequence of (xk)- It is also satisfies n < k\ < • • • < kn so T is an isometry on lin(efcj™. Hence T is not uniformly strictly singular with respect to (xk)Obviously, we can take an M-basis instead of basis Xk in this argumentation. Acknowledgement. The author wishes to express his thanks to prof. A.Pietsch for suggesting the problems and for many stimulating conversations. References 1. S. Argyros and I. Deliyanni, Examples of asymptotic-Zi Banach spaces, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 349 (1997) 973-995. 2. A. Castejon, E. Corbacho and V. Tarieladze, AMD numbers, compactness, strict singularity and essential spectrum of operators Georgian Math. J. 9 (2002) 227270. 3. I.M. Glazman and Yu.I. Lyubich, Finite dimensional linear analysis. Nauka, Moscow, 1969 (Russian). English transl.: The M.I.T. Press, Cambridge, MassLondon, 1974. 4. A. Hinrichs and A. Pietsch, Closed ideals and Dvoretzky's theorem for operators. (unpublished). 5. N.J. Kalton and N.T. Peck, Twisted sums of sequence spaces and the three space problem, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 255 (1979) 1-30. 6. T. Kato, Perturbation theory for nullity deficiency and other quantities of linear operators, J. Analyse Math. 6 (1958) 273-222.
Superstrictly Singular and Superstrictly Cosingular Operators
255
7. J. Lindenstrauss and A. Peiczyriski, Absolutely summing operators on £ p -spaces and their applications, Studia Math. 29 (1986) 275-328. 8. J. Lindenstrauss and L. Tzafriri, Classical Banach spaces. I. Springer, Berlin e.a., 1977. 9. G.G. Lorentz, Lower bounds for the degree of approximation, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 97 (1960) 25-34. 10. V.D. Milman, Some properties of strictly singular operators, Funktsional. Anal, i Prilozhen. 3 (1) (1969) 93-94. (Russian). 11. V.D. Milman, Spectrum of bounded continuous functions specified on a unit sphere in Banach space, Funksional. Anal, i Prilozhen. 3 (2) (1969) 69-79. (Russian). 12. V.D. Milman, Operators of class Co and CQ, Teor. Funktsii Funktsional. Anal, i Prilozen. 10 (1970) 15-18. (Russian). 13. V.D. Milman and R. Wagner, Asymptotic versions of operators and operator ideals Convex geometric analysis, Cambridge Univ. Press, Math. Sci. Res. Inst. Publ., 34 (1999) 165-179. 14. B.S. Mitiagin and A. Pelczyriski, Nuclear operators and approximative dimensions. Proceedings of International Congress of Mathematicians. Moscow, 1966, 366-372. 15. A. Pelczynski, Strictly singular and strictly cosingular operators. I,II. Bull. Acad. Polon. Sci. Sir. Sci. Math. Astronom. Phys. 13 (1965) 34-41. 16. A. Pelczynski and H.P. Rosenthal, Localization techniques in Lp-spaces. Studia Math. 52 (1974/75) 263-289. 17. G. Pisier, Holomorphic semi-groups and the geometry of Banach spaces, Ann. of Math. 115 (1982) 375-392. 18. G. Pisier, Counterexamples to a conjecture of Grothendieck. Ada Math. 151 (1983) 181-208. 19. A.M. Plichko and M.M. Popov, Symmetric function spaces on atomless probability spaces, Dissertationes Math. 306 (1990). 20. W. Rudin, Functional analysis. McGraw-Hill Book Co. New York e.a. 1973. 21. V.M. Tikhomirov, Some questions in approximation theory. Izdat. Moskov. Univ. Moscow. 1976 (Russian). 22. L. Weis, Perturbation classes of semi-Fredholm operators. Math. Z. 178 (1981) 429-442. 23. R. Whitley, Markov and Bernstein's inequalities and compact and strictly singular operators, J. Approx. Theory 34 (1982) 277-285.
This page is intentionally left blank
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
257
ra-Adic Multivariate Linear Splines and their Applications to Approximation Theory Aliaksandr Radyna Mechanical and Mathematical Dept., Belarusian State University, 220050, 4 F. Skaryna avenue, Minsk, Belarus'
Abstract Let m be an integer greater then 1 and Z m be a ring of m-adic integers. Let f be a continuous function acting from Z ^ to real numbers. By the function we introduce an m-adic linear spline which is interpolate f in given points. It is shown that the spline approximates f uniformly. Key words: m-adic linear spline, approximation, interpolation, m-adic numbers 2000 MSC: 11D88, 11J17
1. Introduction During the last 10 years, p-adic analysis were used intensively in quantum physics, some aspects of biology, social sciences et.c, see, for example, [12], [5], [8]. Thus, it is natural to develop p-adic analysis and approximation theory in such a direction. There were many papers about p-adic interpolation and approximation of a continuous function but most of them were devoted to some generalizations of p-adic interpolation theorems of Mahler and Dieudonne, see [6], [7], [2]. Works such as [1], [4], [9], [11] contain such results. We also point out the article of Grintsyavichyus and Markshaitis [3] as more related to the topic of our work. Above articles except Email address: RadynaSbsu.by (Aliaksandr Radyna).
258
Aliaksandr Radyna
last one dealt with interpolation and approximation of a Qp-valued function. The results of our article refer to approximation for a real-valued continuous function. In this work we introduce m-adic linear spline for an r-dimensional case. Interpolation principles for construction of a sequence of splines which will approximate a given continuous real-valued function are applied. In fact, it will be proved that m-adic linear splines of r variables is dense in space C{Xrm; R). In section 2 we will define an m-adic linear spline of r variables for a function / G G^Lrm\R) using an interpolation problem. In section 3 we will prove that such a spline will approximate / . Let us remind some basic notations. Let N be a set of positive integers. Denote by | • | a standard absolute value. Let Q m is a set of a series a = Y^kLsakmk:
2. A definition of an m-adic linear spline in ZJ^ For any n G N we have the canonical partition Z m = l_lt=o~ B-n[i] (see [10] for details). That implies the canonical partition of Z£,: mn — 1 mn — 1
z
™=
U i1=0
mn — 1
U ••• U B-n[h]x...xB.n[ir]. i 2 =0
(1)
ir—0
Denote by ~x an element of J7m. Let us consider a set of vectors Sn C Z ^ Sn = {{h,...,ir)
: tfc = 0 , l , . . . , m n - l , fc = l , 2 , . . . , r } .
We consider the ultra-norm ||"a?|| = m a x ^ - i r \xk\m on 17m. Denote B-n[ i ] = {~x G Z ^ : ||"? — i || < m~n}. Therefore, formula (1) can be rewritten as
Z r m = \J B-n[?]. tesn
(2)
Definition. Let / G C(ZJn;R). By the function / we introduce the spline: Ln(a?)= E i
A(t)||a?-t||,
(3)
€Sn
where A( i ) G R , i G Sn can be found from the system of linear equations
5 3 X(i)\\~f-~i\\=f{t), ~?esn
7cSn.
(4)
m-Adic Multivariate Linear Splines
259
The matrix of the system (4) will depend on enumeration of Sn. In this section we will propose a scheme of constructing of the matrix and inverting one. Firstly, let us enumerate Sn. Every number ik = 0 , 1 , . . . ,mn — 1 can be represented by l k = 2 ^ = o lk\v)mv or as ik = (ifc(0),2fc(l),...,i fc (n- 1)), where ik{v) e {0,... ,m - 1} . So, i £ Sn can be represented as i = (h,i2,...,ir)
= (h{0),ii(l),..-,h(n-
1);
i 2 (0),i 2 (l),... ,»2(n - 1);..., t r (0),i r (l),... ,t P (n - 1))
(5)
Now, we can order representations (5) by the lexicographical law. That means i -< j
< 3 - i k { v ) = j k { v ) , k = l,...,s
, v = 0,
is{t + l) < js(t + l), if t = n-2
...,t,
theni s + i(0) < j s + 1 ( 0 ) .
(6)
Therefore, <Sn can be enumerated as i \ -< t 2 ^ - - ' ^ i mrn • In accordance with such enumeration, close vectors by a subscript are close by the distance || • — • ||. We rewrite (4) as J2Xk\\^i-^k\\=^fCti),
l = l,2,...,mrn
.
(7)
fe=i
The matrix of the system is Kn = {|| i i — i k\\}™k=i• ^ ° s ° l v e (7) and find numbers Afc, k = 1 , . . . mrn we have to invert Kn. To do this we have to introduce a finite sequence of mrn x mrn block-diagonal matrices \m
(Jr^iir^ii)
, fc = 0 , l , . . . , n ,
(8)
where SXtV equals one if x = y or zero if x =£ y and [•] denotes an integer part of a number. These matrices have two properties: Diag{/ f c (n),..., Jfc(n)} = Ifc(n + 1),
(9)
Ii{n) • Ij{n) = Ij(n) • I^n) = m" • Ij(n), when 0 < i < j < n .
(10)
It is not hard to see that matrices (8) forms a linear independent system. Lemma 1. The following representation of Kn is valid K
- = -^T^o(n) - g {~^
!*(«)) + In{n) .
(11)
Proof. Here we use self-similarity of Z ^ and property (9) of matrices (8). We will prove the representation inductively.
260
Aliaksandr Radyna
For n = 1 we have tfi=-/o(l)+/i(l). For n = 2, m7"
tf2 = J2(2) - A (2) + m ^ D i a g ^ ! , . * . , ^ = = 72(2) - /!(2) +m- 1 (-/o(2) +/i(2)) = -m- 1 / 0 (2) -
!
^ ' i ( 2 ) + h(2)
Suppose that (11) is true for Kn-\ (inductive assumption). When the subscript of the matrix equals n we get Kn = In(n) - In-i(n) + m-llDi&g{Kn^^.,Kn-i} n
i
= In(n) -J n _i(n) +m" 1 (
2
~
= i
—~IQ{n) - ^ J fc (n) + J w _i(n)), z mn ^ —'TO™K x fc=i
which equals (11). • Further we will omit (n) in formulas with Ik(n). Lemma 2. (Criterion of an invertibility of a matrix from span(Io,I\,...In)). A matrix A = Y^k=oaklk is an invertible iff^2i=0 aim7"1 ^ 0 for all k = 0,1,.. .n and A'1 = Y^k=o hh, where, a
bo = —,bk = -—
-~
rl
, k = l,2,...,n.
}_, aim
}_, dim"
i=0
i=0
(12)
Proof. Property (10) implies that span(/o,/i, • • • In) is an algebra. Therefore, if A~l exists, then, it must has the same expansion as A. Namely, A~x = X^?=o ^j^j> where bj, j = 0 , 1 , . . .n are unknown coefficients which can be derived from the identity n
n
22 O-kh • 2_j fy^i= ^°" fc=0
j=0
Let us multiple the left-hand side of the last equation taking into account (10) and equate coefficients with Ik on both sides. We have fc-i <2o • bo = 1, flfc 2_, rnnbi i=0
/ k \ + I / J a-im7"1 I bk = 0, fc = 1 , 2 , . . . , n. \i=0
/
This is the system of linear equations with respect to bk, k = 0 , 1 , . . . n which has a solution iff X^=o a i m ™ ¥" 0, k = 0 , 1 , . . . n and next recurrent relations hold:
bo = -,bk
-o-k ( E ^ = ^ i=0
m
" ) L,
k
= l,2,...,n.
(13)
m-Adic Multivariate Linear Splines
261
Remark that if ak = 0 for some indexes k € { 1 , . . . ,n} then bk = 0 and formula (12) is true. So, we eliminate from considerations all ak = 0. Let akl / 0,fc[6 A C {0,1,2,... ,n} for all I = 0,1,2,... ,L. We set ako := ooi ^fc0 : = &o- As a result, (13) are written as
f1"-1 \ bk0 = —, bkl =
A ^
L , 1 = 1,2,...,L.
(14)
E atmi=0
One can rewrite (14) as 1 ko =
- g f c l • bko
^T'
fcl
=
"fci
'
E aim* i=0 fci-2
E 6fe, = - ^ - T 9
a mr
i
*
i
6fcl_1)Z = 2 , 3 . . . , L .
(15)
»=o
Let us multiple j + 1 first equations in (15) and reduce coefficientsfr^o,bkl, • • •, bkj-i from both sides. We have fc
/
<-2
,
j
1
~
ai,
Qfei
TT
Qfcj
fci r% 1 1 l 2
2^ aim
= I
i=0
A
E aim"
j a
,
\
i=o
_
fc(
~
2^ ai»n i=0
/
= ->,-, \ . i =2 , 3 , . . - , L . E ajW ri E a i m " x=0
(16)
i=0
^,Prom (15) one can conclude that last equality in (16) holds for j = 1 too. Since ki-i
ki-i
ki-i < hi — 1 then a, = 0 for all i € (fc;-i,fcj— 1). Therefore, E o,imTl = E o-irnr1'i=0
i=0
Finally, we can rewrite (16) as **o=^'**i =-*,-! % ,i=l,2,...,L. 2^ ajTn" 2^ aimr* i=0
(17)
i=0
Comparing (17) and (12) we see that both cases ak = 0 and ak ^ 0 can be described by (12). • T h e o r e m 1. Let f be a function acting from Z ^ to R. Let { i k}™=i be a set Sn (see (5)) ordered by the lexicographical law (see (6)). Then there exists the unique function Ln(lt) = EfcLi ^fcll"^ ~ *fellsuch that Ln{ i i) = f{ i i) for all 1= 1,2,...mrn.
262
Aliaksandr Radyna
Proof. Applying lemma 2 to Kn (see (11)) we find K~x = Y^=o^kh where bo = - m " - 1 ((mr+1 - I) 2 / (m - 1)) • mn+k-2 L bk = T — v-7 r ' (m(r+l)fc-l + m^±j ^m(r+l)fc+r + -£=ij (mr+1
1< *< n - 1
(18)
- I)2 • m2"-2
(m - l)(m r - 1) (m^+i)"- 1 + ^ f ^ ) (m^+D" - l) ' Now we have to find Aj, i = 1,..., mrn. The above considerations imply that mrn
mrn
mTn
n
l
n
b
^2 X&i = K~ • ^2 Via = ^2 kh Yl y^ i=l
i=l
fc=0
=
s=l
mrn
X 1 H y^khei,
(19)
*:=0 i = l
where yi = / ( i i),l = 1,2,..., mrn. The last formula in (19) contains the expression Ik&i- It is not hard to see that I^ei = e, and l^e-i =
e
j ^0T a ^ ^
5Z
=
1,2,..., n and z = 1,2,..., mrn. Substituting the value of l^i into (19) we will get
J2 xiei = boY. y^i + ^2h^2vi <=1
1=1
fc=l
t=l
e
J2 J = 1+
i
(20)
[i=^] m r-fc
(here and below [•] denotes an integer part of a number). Since the conditions rn rk rk 1 <~ i < ~ m and 1 + Ifc^l mrk J m <- Jj <- ( yl + [[ mlrfc^ Jl )J m
are equivalent with
1< i < mrn and [ ^ 1 = [ ^ 1 we obtain
^2 xiei = bo^2Viti+Ylbk
"52ei
i=i
i=i
i=i
fc=i
Y,
yj >
j=1+[i^]m,fc
which yields A
n (1 + I^fc])™" ' = E6fc E % , i = l,2,...,mrn. k=0
l
(21)
mrk
i= +[^\
Since (7) has the unique solution (21), the function Ln exists and is unique.
•
m-Adic Multivariate Linear Splines
263
3. Statement and solution of the approximation problem In this section we will show, that any continuous function from C(Z^;M) can be approximated by the spline of type (3). But first we have to prove the lemma. Lemma 3. The following formula holds: m™
l/H
|Ln(
}
^ ~^
1
yfcJ
ma
B- n [t,](^)l = ;=1 ^U M • ^
•
(22)
P r o o f . By t h e construction of Ln we have t h a t Ln( i k) = Vk, k = 1, 2 , . . . ,mrn. Let ~y be an arbitrary point in Z ^ such t h a t ~y^ (2), then B-n[
Zrm
i v]\{
-
|J™J" 5 _ n [ T f e ] . Then there is a ball B_n[t
Since
„], such t h a t ~y €
i v}. As a result of this we can write mrn
J/-1
Ln{~y)
i & V fc = 1 , 2 , . . . , mrn.
=E
A f c
H^~
•* fell + ^ i / l l V - * ix|| + Yl
^ 1 1 " ^ - * fcll •
fc=l fc=i/+l
Since a distance between points of different balls is equal to the distance between the centers, we can replace ~y in the first and last sums with i v. After that, we get the equality Ln(^y) = Ln( i v) + A^H"^ — i v\\, ~~y € B-n[ i v] which can be p e r f o r m e d t o Ln(~y) = y v + \v\\~y — i v\\, ~y G B-n[ i v } . R e s u m i n g last t w o equalities one can conclude that
This obviously gives us sup \\Ln(~y)-^yvIB_
f->
A~y)\\ = sup I ^ A ^ H ' y - i V\\IB_ f-» ,("^)| .
The right-hand side of the equality is a maximum of a continuous function over the compact set lTm. Therefore, it is attained at the point I/V So,
sup \LnCy) - ^2 VuIB_ c? 0)\ = |A;| • ||^o - "Till, l?o G B-n[Ti} . In this case the point lj0 must belong to B_ n [ i i}\ -B- n -i[ i i] and |A;| must be maximal. Otherwise, we will get a contradiction with maximality of 'YjKW'y Therefore, we obtain formula (22).
- ^H / B_ n [i i 1 / ](^) • •
264
Aliaksandr Radyna
Theorem 2. Let f G C(Z£,;R). Then for any e > 0 there exists a positive integer N£ such that for all n > Ns, \Ln(~x) - f(~x)\ < e, Vz £ 1rm. Proof. It is sufficient to prove the statement when / is a characteristic function of an arbitrary ball in Vm, because a linear span of such functions is dense in C(Z£,; M). For instance, the proof of this fact would be easily derived from Th.26.2, see [10]. Therefore, we shall approximate a characteristic function IB ,-r»,, where B-u[ i {\ is an arbitrary ball in Um. Here without loss of generality we can assume, that i i G Su. It is true, because in the ultrametric space (Z^,, || • ||) every point of the ball is a center of the ball, and Zrm = U^eS -^-«[ * ]• Therefore, one can assume that i i is a center of £?_„[ i i\ and i i is a point from the partition i i, i 2 , . . . , i m™, ^m = UfcLi -S-«[ * k]- Let us divide every ball B_ u [ z *] into mrn balls. As a result we obtain the partition j i, j 2 ,. • •, j mr(n+U), where j m r » ( 1 _ 1 ) + l l . . . , j TOm, e B_ u [Tj]. Then yk = 1 if fc = mrn(Z - 1) + 1 , . . . ,mrnl and yk = 0 otherwise. We can construct the function Ln+u(!J:) found from the formula n+u
K = J2bk fc=0
= Y^™=i
^v\\~% ~ j v\\> where Xv can be
(l+[^])™^
y»> ^ = i , 2 , . . . , p n + v
E r
M=l + [^]m *
(23)
;
Taking into account the values of j/ M we can rewrite (23) as n
\u
=
n+u
YJbkmrk+
A1/ = m r n
JZ
Y,
^ m ™>
v£{mrn{l-l)
+ l,...,mrnl}
^ - ^€{l,...,mrn(l-l)}u{mrnl
,
+ l,...,m^n+^}
(24) ,
(25)
fc=n+AT
where TV = N(v, I) is a number from { 1 , . . . , u}, -mn+u-1
b0 =
((mr+1 - I ) 2 / (m - 1)) • mn+u+k'2 bk = -T-^ w " N" > l < A ; < n + u - l (•m(r+l)fc-l + i £ - l j ^m(r+l)fc+r- + ffl^ j
(26)
( m r + 1 - I) 2 • m 2 "+ 2 "- 2 r
(m - l)(m - 1) ( m (r+l)(n+«)-l
+
mL^j
(m(r+l)(n+U) _ X) '
Remark that if u = 0, then Z := 1 and we will obtain only the first sum in (24). Denote by Bn := mrn YJktl+i h- Then (24) and (25) are rewritten as n
K = ^2 hmrk
+ Bn ,
for mrn{l - 1) + 1 < v < mrnl ,
(27)
k=0
0 < K < Bn ,
for z/ € { 1 , . . . ,mrn(l - 1)} U {mrnl + 1 , . . . m r ( n + ")} .
(28)
m-Adic Multivariate Linear Splines
265
Let us substitute bk from (26) into (27), (28) and find an asymptotic for |Ai| when n goes to infinity. Using (26), it is easy to see that bk = o(m-('2r+1')k+r+n+u),
k = 1, 2 , . . . , n + u .
(29)
By definition of Bn this imply Bn = 0{m-rn-r+u-1)
, n ^ oo.
(30)
Formulas (28), (30) and the condition Bn > 0 gives us an asymptotic for |A,,|, v e { 1 , . . . , mrn{l - 1)} U {mrnl + 1 , . . . m r ( n +")}: |AV| = Otrrr™- 7 - 4 -"- 1 ), n -+ oo .
(31)
Let us find an asymptotic for |A^| from (27). Denote by a := "^Zi • Applying m (r+l)fc-l( m r+l
(TO(r+l)fc-l
_ !)
+ a )( m (r+l)(fc+l)-l + f l )
^ -
1
1
m(r+l)fc-l+a
"
m(r+l)(fc+l)-l +
a
n
to ^2 bkmrk and using values of bk from (26), we obtain fc=o ( m - l ) ( m ( r + 1 ) " + r + a)
^
V
;
K
'
Applying (30), (32) to (27), we get the asymptotic \K\=0{m~rn+u-1),
n^oo,
v<={mrn(l-l)
Comparing (31) and (33), we obtain that
max
+ l,...,mrnl}.
(33) rn+u 1
\\v\ = O(m-
~)
as
i/=l,...,mr<"+u)
n —> oo. By (22) we have that for a big n, max \Ln+uCx) O(p~2rn+(l~r^u~l)
- IB
.-? ,(~x)\ =
which is equivalent of the statement of the theorem.
•
References 1. Y. Amice, Interpolation p-adique, Bull. Soc. Math. France 92 (1964) 117-180. 2. J. Dieudonne, Sur les fonctions continues p-adiques, Bull. Sci. Math. 68 (2) (1944) 79-95. 3. P.K. Grintsyavichyus, G.N. Markshaitis, Expansion of characteristic functions of open sets of a p-adic integer ring in certain polynomials of a p-adic norm, and a special case of the Weierstrass-Stone theorem, Lituanian Math. J. 23 (1) (1983) 40-43. 4. Ha Huy Khoai, p-Adic interpolation, Mat. Zam. 26 (1) (1979) 101-112. 5. A. Khrennikov, Non-Archimedean analysis: quantum paradoxes, dynamical systems and biological models. Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht, 1997. 6. K. Mahler, An interpolation series for continuous functions of a p-adic variable, J. Reine Angew. Math. 199 (1958) 23-34. 7. K. Mahler, Introduction to p-adic numbers and their functions. Cambridge Univ. Press, 1973.
266
Aliaksandr Radyna
8. G. Parisi, N. Sourlas, p-Adic numbers and replica symmetry breaking, Eur. Phys. J. B. 14 (2000) 535-542. 9. L. van Hamme, Jackson's interpolation formula in p-adic analysis, Proceedings of the Conference on p-adic Analysis (Nijmegen,1978) 119-125, Report 7806, Katholieke Univ., Nijmegen, 1978. 10. W.H. Schikhof, Ultrametric calculus. Cambridge Univ. Press, Cambridge 1984. 11. V.K. Srinivasan, Cam Van Tran, On an approximation theorem of Walsh in the p-adic field, J. Approx. Theory 35 (2) (1982) 191-193. 12. V.S. Vladimirov, I.V. Volovich, and E.I. Zelenov, p-Adic analysis and mathematical physics. World Scientific Publ., Singapore 1993.
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
267
Change of Variable in Integrals over p-adic and Adelic Domains Yauhen Radyna Belarusian State University, Minsk, Belarus
Abstract Here we consider integration of complex-valued functions over p-adic and adelic domains. Formulas of change of variable are obtained resembling one for integral over real domain
I f{y)dy = Jf(
A
A general approach involving absolutely continuous mappings and theorem of Radon and Nikodim is considered in p-adic case. A zero-measure feature of adelic analytic mappings is described. Key words: p-adic integrals, adelic integrals, continuously differentiable mappings, absolutely continuous mappings, analytic mappings 2000 MSC: 11S80, 11S31
1. Change of variable and continuous differentiation Let Q p denote the field of p-adic numbers with standard valuation | | p and Haar measure A; B[a, S] and B(a, 5) denote closed and open balls respectively with center at a and radius <5; Z p = B[0,1] is the ring of p-adic integers. The continuity of usual derivative does not imply even local injectivity of p-adic mapping. Email address: yauhen_radynaStut. by (Yauhen Radyna).
268
Yauhen Radyna
Example 1. Let us consider non-intersecting balls An = B\pn,p~2n]: n = 1, 2,.... Define
Vx,y £ A.
We assume f'(x) = F(x,x) and write / £ Cl(A). Every continuously differentiable mapping is differentiable in ordinary sense. In case of real domain definition 2 yields the usual notion of continuous differentiability. The following theorems can be proved for C 1 mappings. Theorem 3 . (local reversibility of C 1 mappings, [1]) Let f £ Cl(A) and let a £ A satisfy f'(a) =/= 0. There exists open ball B(a, S) contained in A such that restriction f : B(a,S) —> B(f(a),8\f'(a)\p) is a bisection. It inverse g is also continuously differentiable and g'{f{a)) = / ' ( a ) ^ 1 Theorem 4. (formula of change of variable, [1]) Let A C Q p be open set. Let homeomorphism
I f(y)dX(y) = jf{
A
Note that in [2] only analytic mappings on Qp were used for change of variable. They all are continuously differentiable on their domains of convergence. Example 5. Consider a : Z p —> Z p : ^2^L0XiP* — i > *52^Lo%iP2i+1- Mapping
2. Change of variable and Radon-Nikodim derivative There exists another approach based on notion of Radon-Nikodim derivative.
Change of Variable in Integrals over p-adic and Adelic Domains
269
Let A C Q p be open and ip : A —» <^(.<4) be continuous homeomorphism. For any subset X C A measurable with respect to Haar measure A we define measure /i by formula /J,(X) = X(
J f(y)dX(y) = J f{
A
A
The first equality is always true due to definition of measure fi, the second is true if and only if measure /J is absolutely continuous with respect to Haar measure A. In this case the theorem of Radon and Nikodim guarantees the existence of function p called the Radon-Nikodim derivative p = dfi/dX. By d(X) denote the diameter of set X C Qp, d(X) = sup^. ySX \x — y\p. Definition 6. Let A C Q p be open. We say mapping
£r=i<W?i))<e. Theorem 7. Absolutely continuous mapping ip defines measure /J which is absolutely continuous with respect to A. Proof. Let X
270
Yauhen Radyna
Example 9. Mapping ip : Zp —> Z p transposing digits at places 4fc and 2 • 4fc, k = 0,1, 2,... in canonical representation of argument is continuous but not absolutely continuous. Proof. Continuity follows from lemma 8. Consider balls Bmj = B{j,p~2i ], m = 1,2, 3,..., j = 0,1, ...p4™ — 1. Number j +p 2 ' 4 "* belongs to Bmj. Sum of diameters ^d(JBmj)=p4V2-4m=p-4m-0. Yet
Y^d(v(Bmj)) >Y^\
<
\x-y\p.
For any a £ Z p consider sequence an —> a, n = 0,1,..., where an differs from a only at n-th digit (no matter how). The valuation of ratio \(
D
3. Change of variable in integrals over adelic domains Consider set of adeles A [3], i.e., set of sequences {XQO, X2, £3, £5,..., xp,...), where £00 G Qoo = K, xp € Qp, and xp G Z p beginning from some p. Adeles form a ring with respect to pointwise addition and multiplication. There is a topology for adeles such that A is locally compact group with respect to addition. The basis of neighborhoods of zero consists of the sets V$ = Ilpes ^p x Tlp^s^p^ where 5 is finite subset of P = {00,2,3, ...,p,...} containing 00, Vp is neighborhood of zero in Q p . Cylindrical neighborhood of point a £ A is any set a + Vs- By A we define Haar measure on A. Define function v : A —> R : (zoo,£2, ••• ,xp,...) H-> l ^ l o c • |x2|2 • ••• • \xp\p •.... (in general product can diverge to zero).
Change of Variable in Integrals over p-adic and Adelic Domains
271
Definition 11. Let A C A b e open. We say mapping / : A —> A is continuously differentiable on A if there exists continuous mapping F : A2 —> A such that f(x) — f{y) = (x — y)F(x,y) Vx, y € -4. We assume /'(x) = F(x,x) and write
Mapping F is unique because set of pairs (x, y) G A2 such that x — y has inverse (x — y)~x is dense in A2. Definition 12. Let A c A b e open. We say mapping
J f(y)dX(y) = I f{
tp(A)
Proof. For any a G A consider cylindrical neighbourhood U of a as in definition 12. Group A is locally compact and cr-compact; so we can choose locally finite at most countable cover A = [ji Ui with such neighborhoods. It is enough to prove the formula of change of variable for each U = Ui. We can write U = J7oo x U2 x ... x Up x ..., Up C Qp and (fiixoo,x2,..., xp,...) = (^oo(xoo), ^2(2:2),...,
...,
Applying formulas of change of variable for Qx = R and Q p and using properties of Haar measure on A we obtain
J d\(y) = I I / P
V>(U)
= f tY[\ipp(xp)\p)
u \r
Vp(Uv)
dX
P^ = J{ j W'P{x)\pd\P{x) = p
Up
(dXco • dX2 •... • dXp - . . . ) = f v(ip'(x))dX{x).
'
D
v
Adeles form topological ring, so we can give the following definition. Definition 14. Adelic analytic mapping is any formal power series with adelic coefficients converging at some neighbourhood.
272
Yauhen Radyna
Properties of such analytical mappings are very different from the properties of padic and real analytic mappings. The whole set of adeles can have zero measure image under non-constant analytic mapping. The following proposition demonstrates it. Proposition 15. Let n > 2 be an integer. Image of ring of adeles A under irn : x — I > xn has zero masure. Proof. Theorem of Dirichlet states that there exist infinitely many primes p = l(mod n) (i.e., (p- 1) is divisable by n). Let a be primitive element modulo such p (i.e., among a1, a2,..., a p ~ 1 (mod p) we can find all of numbers 1,2, ...,p—l). Among powers 1™, 2 n ,..., (p — l ) n (mod p) we can find only (p - l ) / n different numbers, exactly a 1 , a2, ...a ( p ~ 1 ) / n . Therefore powering elements of Z p we shall obtain only elements with the first nonzero digit equal to a1 ,a2, ...a^p~i^n. Measure of set {x™ : x € Z p } is obviously not greater than 1/n (in fact, it is 1/n • (p™ — pn~l)/{pn — 1)). Consider the following sequence of cylinders Kj, j = 1,2,..., [Jj Kj = A, oo
j
Kj = [-j,j] x Y[ (p7J%Pi) x
I I %Pi> where pi is i-th prime.
Image nn(Kj) is also a cylinder, irn(Kj) = Tjoo x Tj2 x ... x Tjp x ..., where Tj p C Q p . Its measure is equal to product of corresponding measures in Qp: \(nn(Kj)) = ^oc(Tjoo) -Tip ^p(Tjp)- This product contains infinitely many multipliers not greater than 1/n < 1/2. Therefore CC
OC
A(7rn(A)) = A(7rn(|J Kj)) = X{\J^n(Kj)) 3= 1
= 0. D
j=l
References 1. W. Shikhof, Ultrametric Calculus. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1984. 2. Vladimirov V.S., Volovich I.V., and Zelenov I.I., P-adic Analysis and Mathematical Phisycs. World Scientific Publ., Singapore, 1993. 3. Gelfand I.M., Graev M.I., Pjatetski-Shapiro I.I., Representation Theory and Automorphic Functions. Nauka, Moscow, 1966. (Russian). 4. Khrennikov A., Non-Archimedean Analisys: Quantum Paradoxes, Dynamical Systems and Biological Models. Kluwer Academic Publisher, Dordrecht, 1997.
Functional Analysis and its Applications V Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
273
Invariant Subspaces of Dissipative Operators in Krein Space and Sobolev Problem on a Rotating Top* A. A. Shkalikova a
Moscow Lomonosov State University, Department of Mechanics and Mathematics, 119992, Moscow, Russia
Abstract Let TC be separable Hilbert space with fundamental symmetry J = P+ — P_ where P± are mutually orthogonal projectors such that J 2 is the identity operator. A short proof of the following result is presented in the paper. If A is a maximal dissipative operator in the Krein space K, = {H,J}, the domain of A contains P+(TL) and the operator P+AP- is compact then there is an A-invariant maximal nonnegative subspace C such that the spectrum of the restriction A\c lies in the closed upper-half plane. This theorem contains the well-known results on this subject of Pontrjagin, hanger, Krein and Azizov. As an application of this theorem the criterion for the stability of a rotaing top with a cavity filled with an ideal liquid is given. Key words: Pontrjagin and Krein spaces, dissipative operators, invariant subspaces, fluid mechanics 2000 MSC: 47B37, 47B44 Studying in 1940 a problem on a rotating top with a cavity filled with an ideal incompressible fluid, S. L. Sobolev met an interesting class of operators which became self-adjoint after multiplication by a self-adjoint operator with one negative eigenvalue. Sobolev paid attention of L. S. Pontrjagin to such a class of operators (the * The work is supported by RFFI, grants No 01-01-00691 and No 01-01-00958. Email address: ashkalikovSyahoo.com (A. A. Shkalikov).
274
A. A. Shkalikov
investigations of Sobolev were published only 20 years later in [19]). In 1944 Pontrjagin published a fundamental paper [15] on properties of self-adjoint operators in spaces endowed by indefinite metric with finite number of negative squares. One says that a Hilbert space "H is endowed by a fundamental symmetry or an indefinite metric, if a quadratic form [x,x] = (Gx,x) is introduced in Ti, where (-, •) is the usual scalar product and G is symmetric operator in Ti. This metric is called regular if G is a bounded and boundedly invertible operator. Without loss of generality one can assume in this case that the metric is generated by the operator J = P+ — P-, where P± are orthogonal projectors in Ti such that P+ + P_ = / . The space Ti equipped with indefinite scalar product [•, •] is called the Pontrjagin space (we denote it by 11^ = {Ti, J}) if r a n k P + or rankP_ equals x < oo. It is called the Krein space (we denote it by K, = {Ti, J}) if the both operators P+ and P_ are infinite dimensional. A subspace C in Pontrjagin or Krein space is called nonnegative (nonpositive) if [x,x] ^ 0 (^ 0) for all x £ C. A subspace C is said to be maximal nonnegative if there is no nontrivial nonnegative extensions of C. Pontrjagin [15] proved in 1944 the following fundamental result. Pontrjagin theorem. Let A be a self-adjoint operator in the space H*, x = r a n k P + < oo. Then there exists an A-invariant maximal nonnegative subspace C of dimension x such that the spectrum of the restriction A\c lies in the closed upper half-plane. Starting from the paper [15] the problem on the existence of invariant subspaces stays in the center of the operator theory in the spaces with indefinite metric. Important generalizations of Pontrjagin theorem were obtained by Langer [10,11] and Krein [7]. The problem on the existence of maximal semi-definite invariant subspaces was also positively solved for the class of the so-called definitizable operators in Krein space (see [12,13]). Moreover, Krein and Langer [8] and Azizov [1] proved that Pontrjagin theorem remains valid for maximal dissipative operators in Pontrjagin space. Here we shall prove the theorem on existence of maximal nonnegative subspaces for an m-dissipative operator A in Krein space, provided that the domain of the operator D(A) contains Ti+ = P+iTi) and the operator P+AP- is compact (moreover, we relax the last condition by showing that the theorem remains valid if the operator P+AP_ is only relatively compact wih respect to P-AP-). From one hand this theorem generalizes the result of Langer [11] to the case of a maximal dissipative operator (instead of a self-sdjoint one), on the other hand it generalizes the result of Krein, Langer and Azizov [8,1] for the case of Krein space (instead of U.^). Note that there is an analogue of this result for nonexpansive operators in Krein spaces obtained by Azizov and Khoroshavin (see [2, Ch. 3,§3]). The connection of this result with our version can be realized by the Cayley transform, although it is not immediate (this was communicated to the author by Azizov). However, the main advantage of this presentation is that we give a direct and short proof. An important remark is that we borrow the basic ideas from the original paper of Pontrjagin [15], although we essentially simplify those from the technical point of view. In the second part of the paper we demonstrate an application of the theorem
Invariant Subspaces of Dissipative Operators
275
on invariant subspaces to Sobolev problem on a rotating top with a cavity filled with a liquid. The first part of this paper is based on the author's paper [17] (which has not been translated into English). In the second part we use the results of the paper [5].
1. Theorem on invariant nonnegative subspaces for dissipative operators in Krein space Let us represent the space Ti in the form Ti = Ti+ © Ti- where Ti± = P±(H). Consider a closed operator A in Ti and assume that its domain V(A) is such that V{A) D Ti+. Then the operator A admits the following matrix representation with respect to the decomposition Ti = Ti+ © Ti-: A =
Un A12\ \A21 A22j
=
P+AP\ \P-AP+ P-AP_) '
(P+AP+
Since the operator AP+ is closed and well defined on the whole space Ti, it is bounded. Consequently, the operators An and A21 are bounded. An operator A acting in Krein space 1C = {Ti, J} is said to be dissipative if
Im[Ax,x]^Q
Va; G V(A).
It is called uniformly dissipative if there is e > 0 such that Im[Ax,x] Js s(x,x)
Vx G V(A).
A dissipative operator A in fC is said to be maximal dissipative (or m-dissipative) if the operator JA with the domain V(A) is m-dissipative in Hilbert space Tt, i. e. if the open lower half plane belongs to the resolvent set of JA (see [4, Ch. V] for other equivalent definitions). Our nearest goal is to prove the following result. Theorem 1. Let A be a maximal dissipative operator in Krein space K. = {Ti, J} such that T>{A) D Ti+ and let the operator A\2 = P+AP- be compact in the separable space Ti. Then there exists an A-invariant maximal nonnegative subspace C such that the spectrum of the restriction A\c lies in the closed upper half-plane. First we shall prove several lemmas. Lemma 1. Let A be a maximal dissipative (uniformly m-dissipative) operator in Krein space K, and T>(A) D Ti+. Then A22 is m-dissipative (uniformly m-dissipative) operator in Ti- and for all A from the open half-plane C + (V\ from the half-plane Im A ^ —e with some e > 0) the operator G(X) := A12(A22
- X)-1
is bounded. Moreover, given any S > 0 the operator function G(X) is uniformly bounded in the half-plane Im A > S (1mA > — e + S).
276
A. A. Shkalikov
Proof. The first statement that A22 is m-dissipative in H- provided that A is m-dissipative in K. one can find in [2, Th. II.2.9]. We will get this fact independently. Notice that if x G T>(A22) then x G T>(A) (since V(A) D H+). Therefore, for all x G V{A22) we have \m(A22X, x) = Im[Ax, x] ^ 0, hence A22 is dissipative. Further, fix a number a > 2||AP+|| (under the assumptions of the lemma the operator AP+ is bounded) and consider the operator function S(X, a)=\ \0
12 ) = (JA + ia) + (A - ia)P- - AP+. -A22 + X)
The operator JA is m-dissipative in 7i, therefore, JA + ia is invertible and ||(JA + fa)" 1 !! ^ a" 1 . Since a > 2||AP + ||, the operator S(ia,a) is invertible. Obviously,
lm(S(X:a)x,x) ^ (a/2)||z||2
Vx G V(A)
and for all A G C+ = {A | ImA ^ a } . This implies that 5(A, o) is invertible for all A G C+ and [I^-^A, a)|| < 2a" 1 . Hence, A22 - A is invertible for A G
X+GH+};
(1) +
(ii) C is nonnegative and there is no nonzero element y+ € W+ such that [x, y \ = (x, y+) = 0 for all x G C. Proof. (See [15]). Let £ be a nonnegative subspace in /C. For all x = x+ + x_ G C we have ||x+|| ^ ll^-lli hence P+ : C —> P+(£) is a bijection. Now we get the representation C = {x | x = x+ + Kx+, x+ G P+(C), \\K\\ < 1}, where K — P+1 —I. Obviously, C has no proper nonnegative extensions if and only if P+{£) = H+. The equalities (x,y+) = 0 for all x G C imply y+ _L P+{C). Thus conditions (i) and (ii) are equivalent. D
Invariant Subspaces of Dissipative Operators
277
The operator K participating in representation (1) is called the angle operator of the subspace C Lemma 3. Let A be a maximal uniformly dissipative operator in K, and V(A) D H+. Then the real axis R belongs to the resolvent set of A and the spectrum of A in C + is bounded. If a contour F+ surrounds the spectrum of A in C + and
Q+ = ^r.J(X-A)-1dX
(2)
r+ is the corresponding Riesz projector, then £+ = Q+(H) is the A-invariant maximal nonnegative subspace. Proof. The invariance of C+ under A and the inclusion C+ C T>(A) follow from the properties of the Riesz projectors [16, Ch. 7]. By assumption 3A (and hence JA — /j,J for all /J, € R) is maximal uniformly dissipative operator in Hilbert space "H. Then J A — \i J is boundedly invertible for /x e R, hence, so is A — /J, for the same values of fx. Denote G(A) = A12(A22 - A)- 1 , F(X) = (A22 - A ) " 1 ^ . By Lemma 1 these operators are bounded for all A from the half-plane Im A > —e, and we can write the Probenius-Shur factorization
/ / G(X)\
(M(X)
0 \ ( I
o\
K}
-(X-A)=[ \0
,
(3)
I J \ 0 A22 - \J \F{X) I)
where
M(X) = An~\-
A12{A22 -
\)~lA21
is the transfer function of the matrix A in H+ © H- • Consequently, the operator A — A is invertible in C+ if and only if the same is true for M(A). For A € C+ and |A| — > oo we have M-\X)
= (An - A)" 1 (/ - G(X)A21(A11
- A)" 1 )" 1 = - A " 1 + O(A" 2 ),
since by Lemma 1 G(X) is uniformly bounded in C+. Thus the spectrum of A in the upper half-plane is bounded. Take a contour r + in (2) consisting of a segment [-R, R] and the half of the circle CR = {A | |A| = R, ImA ^ 0}. The operator A+ = A\c+ is bounded in the subspace C+ = Q+(H). Therefore, we have as R —> oo
± I (A - A+y'dX = ±-.J (A"1 - X-2A+(I - \~lA+)-1) dX = \l + O(R~l), CH
CR
where / is the identity operator. Let x = Q+x € £+ and y = (X— A+)~xx. we have
Then
278
A. A. Shkalikov R
[x,x}=Re[Q+x,x} = hx,x} + ^- [ Im [y, (A - A)y]d\ + O^" 1 ). 2
2TT
7
(4)
For A € R Im [y, (A - A)y)\ = Im [^y, y] ^ e(y, y). Passing to the limit as R —» oo and taking into account the inequality ||x|| ^ | | A - A+|| ||y||, we obtain 1 1 -[x,x] = —
f°°
f°°
Im{Ay,y}d\>e\\x\\2
\\X-A+\\~2
d\. J-oo J-oc It is left to prove that the subspace C+ is maximal positive. It follows from (3) that 2
27r
(X-A)~1=
(
~M"1(A)
M"1(A)G(A)
1
1
\ 1
\F(A)M" (A) F(A)M- (A)G(A)-(^ 22 -A)- J ' Hence, for all z G K+ ( ( A - , 4 ) - 1 2 ^ ) = -(M-1(A)2^). Integrating this equality along the contour T+, using relation (4) and tending R —> oo, we get 1 Z"00 +— Im [Xy, y] dA, 2 27r i-oo where y = (A-^4)" x z. Consequently, 2(Q+z, z) ^ (z, z) for all z 6 H+. Hence there is no nonzero z £ W+ such that z _!_ £ + = Q+(H). By Lemma 2 the subspace C+ is maximal positive. • 1 (Q + Z , z) = [Q + Z ) z] = -(z,z)
Lemma 4. Lei i/ie operators A\\ and A21 in the canonical representation of the operator A be bounded and V(Ai2) D T>{A22)- Then a maximal nonnegative subspace C is A-invariant if and only if its angle operator K possesses the properties (i) the image of K lies in T){Ai-i); (ii) the operator K satisfies the operator Riccati equation A2i + A22K - KAU - KAl2K
= 0.
(5)
Proof. (See [15,6]). Let C have representation (1) and be yl-invariant. Then the image of K lies in X^y^) and for any x+ € 7i+ there is an element y + € 7i+ such that
(A11 A12\ / Substituting y + = Anx+ + Ai2Kx+ (A12 + A22K)x+
X+
\
/ y+ \
in the second equation we find
= K(Au + ^12^)0;+
Vx+ e H+,
Invariant Subspaces of Dissipative Operators
279
and (5) follows. Conversely, if the image of K lies in V(A22) and (5) holds, then equation (6) is valid with y+ = A\\x+ + A12KX+. This implies A-invariance of C. D Lemma 5. Let T be an operator in 7i and let a domain fi with possible exception of isolated points belong to the resolvent set ofT. Let Tn be a sequence of operators such that \\Tn — T\\ —• 0 as n —> 00 and fi lies in the resolvent set of all operators Tn. Then the whole domain fi belongs to the resolvent set ofT. Proof. Obviously, if a point fi belongs to fi fl p(T) then there is a neighbourhood Usi/J.) such that Ug(fi) G p(Tn) for sufficiently large n and ||(Tn-A)-1-(r-A)-1|| ^ 0
asrwoo
uniformly for A € lig(fj,). Take a contour 7 in fi which does not intersect the isolated spectrum points of T. From the last relation we get that the Riesz projector corresponding to 7 equals to zero (since the corresponding Riesz projectors for Tn equal to zero). This implies that the spectrum of T in fi is empty. •
The proof of Theorem 1. Consider the family of operators
(
An + is A21
A12 \ A22 - is)
, £>0.
Since A is m-dissipative in K and Im [A(e)x, x] = Im [Ax, x\ + e[Jx, x\ ^ e(x, x), the operators A{e) are uniformly m-dissipative in fC. By Lemmas 2, 3 there is an j4(e)-invariant uniformly positive subspace £(e) and the corresponding angle operator K{e) satisfies the Riccati equation A21 + (A22 - ie)K{e) - K(e)(An + ie) - K(e)A12K(e) = 0.
(7)
As ||-ftT(e)|| < 1, there is a sequence of operators Kn = K(en) such that Kn —>• K (converges weakly to K). This follows from the fact that the unit sphere of the separable space Ti is compact in the weak topology. Certainly, ||if || ^ 1. Observe that Kn —*• K implies KnB —^ KB and BKn —^ BK for any bounded operator B. One can not guarantee the convergence KnBKn —*• KBK, however, such convergence does hold if B is a compact operator. It suffices to check this only for one-dimensional operator B, since a compact operator can be approximated in the uniform operator topology by operators of finite rank. Indeed, if B = {-,v)u then for any f,g£ H+ we have (KnBKnf,g) == (Knf,v)(Knu,g) -> (Kf,v)(Ku,g) = (KBKf,g).
280
A. A. Shkalikov
By the assumption of Theorem 1 the operator A12 is compact. Then all the summands in (7) have the weak limits with a possible exception of the sequence A22Kn. However, it follows from the Riccati equation that A22Kn -± KAn
+ KA12K
- A21 =: S.
In particular, for all / € Ti+, g € V(A22) we have (A22Knf,g)
= (Knf,A*22g)
- (Kf,A*22g) =
(Sf,g).
From the last relation we conclude that Kf G T>(A22) and ^22-?^ = limit operator K satisfies the Riccati equation (5) and by Lemma A-invariant nonnegative subspace C with the angle operator K. It is left to show that the spectrum of the restriction A\c lies upper half-plane. Obviously, the operator F : C —> H+ defined by x = x+ + Kx+ G £ is invertible and
A\c = F-l(An
S. Hence the 2 there is an in the closed Fx = x+ for
+ A12K)F. i_
It is left to show that the spectrum of An + A\2K lies in C . Since A is m-dissipative in fC, the operator —An is m-dissipative in Ti+. Then the spectrum of An lies in C+ and by theorem on holomorphie operator function the spectrum of An+Ai2K is discrete in C~ (as the operator Ai2K is compact). Applying Lemma 5 we complete the proof. • Remark 1. One can weaken the assumption that A12 is compact (cf. [2, Ch. 3, § 3, Problem 9]). It suffices to assume that Ai2 is A22-relatively compact, i. e. that the operator T = Ai2{A22 — A)" 1 is compact for some (and then for all) A € ^(^.22). Indeed, assume that T is compact for some A G C~. We can choose A such that \\T\\ < 1. Denote Sn = (A22 — X)Kn. The compactness condition of Ai2 was not used in Lemmas; it was only used while passing to the limit in the Riccati equation. Let us rewrite equation (8) in the form (I - KnT)Sn l
= (ien - \)Kn + K0(An
+ ien) - A21.
1
Since \\(I — KnT)~ \\ ^ (1 — HTH)" , it follows from the last equation that the norms of Sn are uniformly bounded. Hence, there is a sequence Snj which converges weakly to an operator S. Since T is compact, we have KnjTSnj —*• KTS. Obviously, S — {A22 — \)K, hence, K satisfies Riccati equation (6), and the corresponding nonnegative subspace is A-invariant. Further, Ai2K = TS is compact operator. Therefore, the spectrum of A\c coincides with the spectrum of An + Ai2K and lies inC+. Theorem 1 does not contain information about the spectrum of the restriction A\c on the real axis. In applications such an information is often quite important (see [18]). Below we formulate a simple version of a general theorem, which can be found in [18]. Here we omit the proof, although for such a simple formulation it can be easily carried out independently.
Invariant Subspaces of Dissipative Operators
281
Theorem 2. Let the assumption of Theorem 1 hold and [i be a real isolated eigenvalue of A. Let C be an A-invariant nonnegative subspace and A+ = A\c- Then \x belongs to the spectrum of A+ if and only if there is a nonzero element x € ker(A-iS) such that [x,x] > 0. In particular, ifkei(A — fj) is a negative subspace in K,, then JJ, belongs to the resolvent set of A+.
2. Sobolev problem on a rotating top with a cavity filled with a viscous liquid 2.1. Notations and the equation of motion We consider a system "rigid body + fluid". A rigid body occupies a bounded region Qi in R3 and contains a cavity fi inside, i. e. Q C fii. The cavity 0 is entirely filled with a viscous incompressible liquid. The body is rotating around a fixed origin of coordinates. Consider the orthonormal frame O e o e ^ rigidly attached to the body in such a way that the unit vectors of this frame coincide with the principal axes of inertia of the body with frozen liquid. Consider also a fixed orthonormal frame 0/0/1/2- In the nonperturbed state the axis eo coincides with /o- The motion of the system is described by the variables (z,w,v(x)), where z is the coordinates of fo, w is the angular velocity of the rigid body and v(x) is the velocity field of the fluid. Here x = {xo,x\,X2) £ fi are the coordinates of a point. All variables z, w, v(x) and x are vectors in the frame Oeoe^. We have to recall some basic notations and operators of fluid mechanics (see [9,14], for example). The finitness of kinetic energy implies that the values of the velocity field v(x) belongs to the subspace Jo(fi) C L^{Vt). The subspace Jo(fi) is the closure of smooth compactly supported in tt solenoidal vectors, i. e. of vectors v(x) such that div v(x) = 0. The vector B*v = / [a;, v(x)] dx n is called the gyrostatic moment of the fluid (here [•, •] denotes the vector product if M3). One can consider B* as a bounded operator B* : Jo(fl) —> R3. Then the adjoint operator B is defined by Bw = Po[w,x], where Po is the orthogonal projection of L|(^) onto JQ(Q). It is easy to see that rot Bw = 2w. Let A be the Laplace operator acting in Jo(fi) on the domain consisting of smooth compactly supported in Q functions. The operator R = PQA is nonnegative and admits the Friedrichs extension, which is also denoted by R. It is called the Stokes operator. It is known [9] that the Stokes operator is uniformly positive and has discrete spectrum. Let C3 be the complexification of R3. Define in C3 the operators by the quadratic forms
282
A. A. Shkalikov (Aow,w)= (Aw,w)=
/
\\[w,x]\\2dp(x),
I \\[w,x]\\2dp(x), n
where p(x) is the distribution of mass of the rigid body in fii \ fl and dp(x) = p is the density of the fluid in fi. Without loss of generality it is assumed further that the density of the fluid equals 1. The matrices corresponding to these operators are called inertia tensors of the body and the body with the frozen fluid, respectively. According to the definition of the frame Oe§e\ei we have A = diag(a o ,ai,a 2 ) where a, are the moments of inertia of the body with frozen fluid with respect to the principal axis of inertia Oej. Further we assume ao ^ ai ^ a-i. Define the operator H in C 3 by Hx = -i[x,e0] =
0 0 -i
•
v° * °) The operator G = -2PQH acting in the space Jo(fi) is called the gyroscopic operator. It is easy to see that G is bounded and self-adjoint. By v is denoted the viscosity of the fluid. Denote also k = glm, where m is the mass of the system, g is the gravitational acceleration and I is the distance from the fixed point O to the center of gravity of the system. The evolution of the system is described by the equations (see [14], for example) z= [z,w], Aw + B*v= [Aw + B*v,w] + k[z,eo], Vp + vAv = v + (v • V)v + 2[w,v] + [w, [w,x]} + [w,x],
divv(x) = 0.
The first equation is known as the kinematic relation, the second equation describes the evolution of the kinetic moment of the system with respect to the point O and the third one is the Navier-Stokes equation for the fluid in the coordinate system attached to the rigid body. Using the first two equations the last one can be rewritten in the form (see [5]) Bw + v = Po([v, (2w + rotu)]) + vP0Av. Obviously,
(z,w,v(x)) = (eo,weo,0) is the stationary solution of the obtained system of equations, provided w is constant (angular velocity of the nonperturbed rotation). Linearing the system of nonlinear equations at this stationary solution, we obtain the system
Invariant Subspaces of Dissipative Operators
283
z = iuj(Hz — tjj~lHw),
Aw + B*v = iu(ku-lHz - H(aol - A)w + HB*v, Bw + v = iu{-2P0H + WLO~1P0A)V, where / is the identity operator. 2.2. The operator form of the linearized equations
Consider the Hilbert space W= C3xC3xJ0(Q), whose elements are columns u = (z, w, v)*, where t denotes the transposition. Then the last system of the linearized equations is recast in the operator form as Wti = iuMu,
\ieH,
(8)
where 'I 0 0 \ W =
0 A B* , v0
H
( M=
-kuj^H
-u-xH
H(A - aol) HB*
\°
B IJ
0 ^ D
°
)
and the operator D acting in Jo(fi) is defined by D = G + i-R. The domain of M is assumed to be £>(M) = C3 x C3 x V(R). Equation (8) is not convenient for the study, since the operator M is neither symmetric nor dissipative. There is a trick [5] which reduces this equation to a nicer form. Consider the operator 'UJ2(A + N) -LOI o\
S= ^
-toA
I
0 ,
-u>B
0 ij
(l
where N =
0
0 nx 0 \0 0 n2y
with n\ = do — a\ — k/u>2,
A direct calculation shows that
(0
712 = ao — 0,2 — k/u>2.
284
A. A. Shkalikov f 2
u (A + N) -uA
J:=SW= K
-UJA
A
B*
-UJB
B
I
(uj2a0-2k)H
'
-UJB*^
J
-uHA + ku^H
-uHB*^
l
L:=SM=
-uAH + ku- H AH + HA-a0H v
-LOBH
HB*
BH
D
j
Obviously, the operator S is bounded. It follows from the relation
(io2N o\ / / (A \0 I ) \ 0 i) \-uA IJ
(LU2{A + N) -u>l\ _ 11 -ul\
y
-uA
I J
that S is boundedly invertible if and only if both numbers ni and Ti2 are nonzero. In this case the operator J is also boundedly invertible. Hence, if ni, n-2 / 0 the linearized system (8) can be rewritten in the equivalent form u = io;Tu,
T=J"1L.
(9)
We can represent the operator L in the form L = V + D,
D:=diag{J, 1,D},
D = G +
WUJ-1R,
where V is finite-dimensional symmetric operator, G = G* is gyroscopic operator and R = R* is the Stokes operator. Now it is easily seen that the operator L is maximal uniformly dissipative operator (it is assumed that u> > 0 and v > 0). Obviously, J is a symmetric bounded operator having finitely many nonpositive eigenvalues. We shall prove that the number of its negative eigenvalues coincides with those of the matrix N. First we notice that W is positive. Indeed, (Wu,u) = (z, z) + {Aow, w) +
([u,x] + v(x), [u,x] + v(x)) dx ^ 0. n If Wu = 0 then z = 0 and w = 0 (we recall that AQ > 0), therefore, v(x) = 0. Hence, W > 0. Consider the operators f
w2N
Jo =
0 0
0
()\
A - B*B 0 ,
f So =
Oil
I
0 0s
-iol I 0 • \-OJB
B I,
As the operator W is positive, so is the operator
(AB*\ II o\ (A-B*BO\ (I B*\ \B I)~\BI) { 0 1) \o 1) •
Invariant Subspaces of Dissipative Operators
285
Therefore, A — B*B > 0 and the number TT_(JO) of negative eigenvalues of Jo coincides with the corresponding number TT_ (JV) of the matrix AT. Now, using the equality J = SQJOSO, we obtain an important result: 7r_(J)=7T_(A0 and J is invertible provided that n\, nc = TT-(N). Now we shall use the fact which is left without proof in this paper (the reader can find it in [5]). The operator L has no nonzero real eigenvalues. Zero is an eigenvalue of L of multiplicity 2 and the corresponding null subspace is the linear span of the vectors Xo = (eo,0,0)* and x\ = (0,eo,0)*. This subspace is 3-positive, i. e. (Jx, x) > 0 for all x = axo + /?xi ^ 0. This allows to obtain the following important result. Theorem 3. Assume that ni, n-i ^ 0. Then the operator T has exactly TT_( eigenvalues in the upper half-plane. In particular, the problem in question is stable if UJ > (a0 - ai)/k and is not stable if UJ < (a0 - ai)/k. Proof. The first assertion follows directly from Theorem 2 of Section 1. If u; > (do — ai)/k, then both numbers n\ and ri2 are positive (we recall that by assumption a\ > 02, therefore n 2 > ni). In this case J > 0 and T = J ~ 1 / 2 L i J 1 / 2 is similar to the m-dissipative operator Li = J~ 1 / 2 LJ~ 1 / 2 . If u> < (ao — a\)/k, then T has at least one eigenvalue from the lower half-plane, and this implies the instability of the problem. This theorem has quite clear physical sense: the shape of the body and the angular velocity of nonperturbed motion are responsible for the stability. One can guarantee the stability if the body has an oblong shape, i. e. if oo 2> a\ ^ 02- Otherwise the stability holds only with large nonperturbed angular velocity. Historical remarks about the above problem and other results can be found in the book [14] and the paper [5]. References 1. T. Ja. Azizov, Dissipative operators in Hilbert space with indefinite metric, Izv. Acad. Nauk SSSR, Ser. Mat. 37 no 3 (1973) (in Russian). English transl. in Math. USSR Izv. 7 (1973). 2. T. Ja. Azizov, I. S. Iohvidov, Linear operators in space with indefinite metric. John Wiley, Chichester, 1989.
286
A. A. Shkalikov
3. I. Gohberg and M. G. Krein, Introduction to the theory of linear nonselfadjoint operators in Hilbert space. AMS, Providence, Rhode Island, 1969. 4. T. Kato, Perturbation theory for linear operators (2-nd edition). SpringerVerlag, New-York, 1976. 5. A. G. Kostyuchenko, A. A. Shkalikov, M. Yu. Yurkin, On the stability of a top with a cavity rilled with a viscous Fluid, Fund. Anal, and its Appl. 32 (2) (1998) 100-113. 6. M. G. Krein, On an application of the fixed point principle in the theory of operators in space with indefinite metric, Uspekhi Matem. Nauk 50 (2) (1950)180-190 (in Russian). 7. M. G. Krein, On a new application of fixed point principle in the theory of operators in space with indefinite metric, Dokl. Acad. Nauk SSSR 154 (5) 10231026 (in Russian). 8. M. G. Krein, H. Langer, On definite subspaces and generalized resolvents of Hermitian Operatorss in spaces II^, Funkz. Anal, i Prilozh. 5 (2) (1971), 59-71, 5 (3) 54-69 (in Russian). English transl. in Fund. Anal, and Appl. 5 (1971). 9. O. A. Ladyzhenskaya, The mathematical theory of incompressible flow. Gordon and Breach, New York, 1964. 10. H. Langer, On J-hermitian operators, Dokl. Acad. Nauk SSSR 134 (2) (1962) 263-266 (in Russian). 11. H. Langer, Eine Veralgemeinerung eines Satzes von L. S. Pontrjagin, Math. Ann. 152 (5) (1963) 434-436. 12. H. Langer, Invariant subspaces of a class of operators in spaces with indefinite metric, J. Fund. Anal. 19 (3) (1975) 232-241. 13. H. Langer, Spectral functions of definitizable operators in Krein spaces, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 948 (1982) 1-46. 14. N. N. Moiseev, V. V. Rumyantsev, The dynamics of a body with fluid-filled cavities. Nauka, Moscow, 1965 (in Russian). 15. L. S. Pontrjagin, Hermitian operators in spaces with indefinite metric, Izv. Acad. Nauk SSSR, Ser. Mat. 8 (1944) 243-280 (in Russian). 16. F. Riesz, B. Sz-Nagy, Lecons d'analyse fonctionelle. Akademai KIADO, Budapest, 1972. 17. A. A. Shkalikov, On the existence of invariant subspaces of dissipative operators in spaces with indefinite metric, Fund, i prikl. matem. (2) (1999) (in Russian). 18. A. A. Shkalikov, Operator pencils arising in elasticity and hydrodynamics: the instability index formula, Operator Theory: Advances and Applications 87, Birkhauser, (1996) 258-285. 19. S. L. Sobolev, Motion of a symmetric top with a cavity filled with a fluid. Zh. Prikl. Mekh. Tekhn. Fiz. (3) (1960) 20-55 (in Russian).
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
287
Property of Maximality for Spectral Components Alexey Tikhonov Mathematical analysis division, Taurida National University, 4, Yaltinskaia str., Simferopol, Crimea, 95007, Ukraine
Abstract The aim of this paper is to show that operators closed to normal ones with spectrum on a curve possess certain maximal invariant subspaces, which are related to the interior and the exterior of the curve. We generalize the corresponding results (for the real axis and the unit circle) established by Naboko and Makarov. Key words: invariant subspace, functional model, operator, Hilbert space 2000 MSC: 47A15, 47A10, 47A25
1. Introduction In the paper [1] Naboko introduced the spectral components N± for operators closed to self-adjoint ones. Several years later considering the parallel case of the almost unitary operators Makarov [2] found the following characterization for these invariant subspaces: the subspace iV+ is the maximal among those rationally invariant subspaces H' of an operator S for which the restriction S\H' is a deformation of a weak completely non-unitary (c.n.u.) contraction. Recall that an operator S is called a deformation of an operator T (we shall write S -< T) if there exists a quasiaffinity X such that SX = XT (a bounded operator X is called a quasiafrmity if Ker X = {0}, Ker X* = {0}). Operators S and T are called quasisimilar if S -< T and T -< 5. The aim of this paper is to generalize the above characterization to the case of trace class perturbations of normal operators with spectrum on a curve. Email address: tikhonov®club.cris.net (Alexey Tikhonov).
288
Alexey Tikhonov
We pass to precise statements. Let C be a simple closed C 4+£ -smooth curve, G+ = Int C (G_ = Ext C) be the interior (exterior) of the curve C, ip± be conformal maps of the unit disk B onto G±. Let UQ € [if] be a normal (that is, UQUQ = UOUQ) operator acting in a Hilbert space H, and cr(Uo) C C. We shall consider trace class perturbations S = Uo + V, V e &i such that p(S) D G+ ^ 0. For this class of operators, we define the spectral components: N±(S) = clos { / £ f f : V 5 £ f f
((S - z)-lf,g)
G E2(G±) } ,
where E2(G±) are Hardy-Smirnov spaces [3]. This (weak) description is purely in terms of the operator S and does not use any addition information like a representation of 5 as a perturbation of some auxiliary operator. If S is almost unitary, these subspaces coincide with the corresponding subspaces denned in [1,2]. For readers familiar with Sz.-Nagy-Foia§'s theory [4], we note that N+(T0) = H.x, AT_(T0) = H whenever To is a c.n.u. contraction. Moreover, N-(
2. Functional model Our basic tool to obtain above mentioned characterizations of N± (S) is the functional model for trace class perturbations of normal operators with spectrum on a curve [5]. Here we briefly survey the construction of this model, which is a generalization of the well-known functional model of Sz.-Nagy-Foia§-Naboko [4,6,1,7]. Let 9t and H be separable Hilbert spaces. We shall consider pairs n = (7r+,7r_) of operators TT± £ [L2(C, VI), H] satisfying the following conditions:
Property of Maximality for Spectral Components
289
(i)i V^Gi oo (G,[9T]) « 7 r ± ) ^ = ^ « 7 r ± ) ; ^ ) x ( 7 ^ ) 2 = 1
2
(O2 (^TTi)- G [L (G,9I)];
2(TT^+);
(«) 2 P_(7rl^ + )P + = 0;
(Hi) Ran7r+ V Ran?r_ = Ji,
where ir_ is the Moore-Penrose inverse for TT_ , P± are the (non-orthogonal) projections onto the Hardy-Smirnov spaces E2(G±,<Xt) such that Ran7>± = E2(G±,yi), KerP± = E2(G^,yi). The conditions Uir± = ir±z uniquely determine the normal operator U with absolutely continuous spectrum on the curve C. For this operator, we have UT± = T±Z, W^U = Z-K]±, T\XJ = ZTI , where T*± = ( A * ) " 1 ^ - Q±TTi±), A± = (7 - e±0^)1/2, &± = 7T^7r± . We put
nlf e E2(G^,m), nlf G E2(G+,Vl) },
ICe = {feH:
P© = (/-g+)(J-g_), Q+ = g + ( 7 - g - ) , Q-= «?-,
where q± =
•K±P±IT±
• For them, we have /Ce = RanPe,
Q+)(I - Q-) = I -Q+-Q-,
PQ
=
PQ
= (7 —
Q\ = Q±, Q±QT = 0. It is easy to show that
9 ± G L°°(G,[9t]). Moreover, 9+ G B(G+, [9t]), that is, 6+ admits a bounded analytic continuation to the domain G+ . We also define operator-valued functions 0 J by formula 0±(z)n = (P±O~n)(2:),n € 9t, z G G±. Under certain addition assumptions, which are always satisfied in the case of functional model for trace class perturbations of normal operators, we have 0± G B(G±, [91]). Let x e [m\. We put >cl_ = xr_ = x, xl+ = - ( 7 + xO+), xr+ = -{I +
o+x); ezt = i-ozx, -x + N)(G, B{G), scalar
e+, = -x + G+ +
e+=
+
9+ + > « e ; e . We have 6 ^ G (B : A0(G±, [OT]). (We write W e {B : [91]) if TV G B(G, [91]) and W" 1 e A^(G, [01]), that is, TV"1 = l/Jfi, (5 e n G B(G, [91]). In the terminology of [4] the latter means that W admits a multiple.) In the paper [5] the following theorem is established.
Theorem . Let C be a simple closed G4+£-smooth curve, Uo be a normal operator such that a{U0) C G, and let S - Uo G 6 i , p(5) n IntG ^ 0. Then there exist a pair II = (7r_|_,7r_) satisfying the conditions (f), (if), (iii), an operator x G [91], and an invertible operator Z G [77, /Ce] such that SZ = ZS, where S/o = f//o + ( T T U ; +irlxL)ezt(<x)-1(TrlUf0)(tt), f0 G /C e . This theorem allow us to proceed with functional model objects only. Working with the functional model we have the advantage to produce explicit formulas. We consider the following subspaces of H :
290
Alexey Tikhonov
N±(Il,x)={feH:
44
N(U, x)={feH:
P
e / = e±7riQ ± /};
e±7rl/ = ^ A ± r l / };
M(U,X) = { / £ « : e-W- 1 (7r;/)(z) = e+(2)-1(7r^/)(z)}; NM±(n,x) ={feN±(n,x):rlf
= 0}.
Here and throughout of the paper we refer a reader to [5] for more details. These " lifted" spectral components are crucial for us in this paper (we define the operators S± (see Section 3) acting in N±(Yl,x)) as well as for studying the duality problem of spectral components in [5]. One of consequences of that duality is the fact of coinciding weak and model spectral components X(S) = c l o s P e ^ ( n , x), X G {N±,N, NM±} and M(S) = M(H, x)nK.e. Note also that N{U, x) = N+{U, x)D N-.(U,x) and N±(U,x) = NM±{IL,x) \J N{Il,x).
3. Property of maximality Proof (of the main theorem). 1) The inclusion Vjj'gLat 5 H' *- N±(S) can be easily derived from the following properties of N±: T e Q± *=> N^(T) = H; X e [H], XT = SX => XN±{T) C N±(S). The inverse inclusion follows from statement 2. 2) We introduce the following subspaces and operators: N'± = N'±(U, x) = (7 - QT)N±(U, yi) C N±(U, x),
S±f = Uf + 4 ^ 9 " (oo)-1(4^/o)(^)> / e N'±(U, x). To prove that N±(S) £ Lat T 5 we shall check that S\N±(S) are deformations of S± and, in turn, that S± are deformations of operators from Q^.. For this purpose we present the following list of properties: a) P e |iVi = (/ - Q±)\N'±, Kev(Pe\K) = {0}; b) S± G [N'±];
c) a(S±) C a(S) \ G±; d) SPe\N'± = PeS±;
1
e) (S± - a)- = (I- QT)(U - a)-l\N'±,
a G G± ,
from which it follows that S\N±(S) are deformations of 5±. The proofs, which are mainly based on computations with the model, are omitted. To prove that S± are deformations of operators from Q^ we need to dwell on the spectral structure of operators S±. To this end we consider the subspaces: K±
= c\osNi±,
N^± = K±(U, *) = ( / - Q¥)N(U, x);
NM'± = NM'±(U,x)
= (I- QT)NM±(U,x)
= { / G JV; : 4 / = 0 } ,
Property of Maximality for Spectral Components
291
which are absolutely continuous and singular components, respectively, for the operators S± (see Remark 1 for the exact statement). For N{,±, we have f) Ker(/ - QT)\N(U, x) = {0}; g) N'e± G Lat S±; h) a(S±\K±) c C;
i)S±(I-QT)f=(I-QT)Uf,
feN(Ii,x).
Whence we can conclude that the restrictions S±\N^± are deformations of the normal operator U\N(H, x). It can easily be shown that there exist operators Te± G [He±] H Qzf such that the operators Te± are similar to U\N(Yl,x). Denote by Ve± an operator from [He±, N(U, x)] that realized this similarity UVe± = Ve±Te±. So, S±|iVg± are deformations of Te± G Q^. Further, for NM'±, we have j) NM'± G Lat S±;
k)
1) NM'± = n^Ee^
,
where EQ^ = { v± G E2{G±, [01]) : @^v± £ E2(G^, [Ot]) }. To justify the latter property, one can make use of the following assertion: / G NM± => ir^f — x^v±, where -v+ = (e+ c )- 1 7 rlP e / = ( e ; 9 + - I)^+Q+f + e ; 7 r l P e / G E2(G+, [01]), -w_ = ( 6 ^ ) - 1 7 r ^ P e / = e V Q - / + 4 P e / G £ 2 (G_, [
m)
fc^Ee*)-1
= -(6± )" 1 4Pe G
[NM'±,EQTJ
.
Since we have — 7rT>f^-(0^)~17r^-Pe/ = / , / G NM'± , it suffices to check that Ker(7TiFx?F|.EeT ) = {0}. Indeed, let ~K^X^V± = 0. Then x^v± = 0. Consequently, i) x i > + = o "=4> xv+ = o => v+ = (/ - e i x ) u + = e ^ v + G E2(G-,[yi}) n E 2 ( G + , [
) a €
G ± v± G S e T ,
that is, the restrictions S±\NM'± are similar to operators Tj± G [-H\±] H 5 T , where ffi± = £ 6 T and (T i± - a ) " 1 = P ± I ^ |£? 0 T , a G G± . We have found that the parts S± | A^ ± and 5± | NM'± are deformations of operators T|± and Te± from 5^ • To show that S± are deformations of operators from Q^ it remains to check that the operators X± = Tt^x^. © (7 — Q^)Ve± are quasiaffinity. This follows from the properties: o) N'e± n NM'± = {0} ;
p) N^ V NM'± = N'± .
First, we check o). Let / G N^± n NM'±. Then / = lim /„, /„ G i\^ ± . Since Nl± C JV±(n,x), we have ^±PBfn G 9^E 2 (G T ,[9t]) c 9 ^ E 2 ( G T , {%) => (&^i)~1nlzPef G E2(GT,[*n]), where 9 ^ = 9 ^ 9 ^ e is the inner-outer factorization. Whence we have
(Qle)-l(Qli)-^iPef
= (9^)-ViP e / = (9± ) - 1 4 P e / G E2(G±, [91]).
292
Alexey Tikhonov
Since 0 ^ e are two-sided outer functions, we have (@^>ci)~lir±Pe>f = 0. Then *±Pef = 0 => iT^Pef = 0 => Pef = 0 => / = 0. Then we have A^± n NM'± = {0}. To check the property p) we note that N'± = (I - Q^)N±(U,x) = (I Q?){NM±(Il, x) V N(U, x)) = NM'± V ^ ± . 3) The necessity of the conditions NT(S) = NT(S*) = H is obvious. We shall prove the sufficiency. We have already shown S± -< T± = Tl± © Te± and we will show that T± -< S±. To this end we take (regularization of the unbounded operators
X^1)
Y± = X^S^Si),
where ST{S±) = (I - QT)5T(U)\N^, S± € B(G±) are
scalar outer functions such that (0^.) l = (1/S±)Q,± and operator valued functions Q± e LX(C, [9T]). It is easy to see that Y±S± = T±Y± and closRanKt = H[± © He±. Since 5T are outer functions, we get Ker 5^(U)\N'± = {0}. Hence Ker5 T (5±) = {0} and KerY± = {0}. It remains to show that the operators Y± are bounded. Let / (E N±. Take / e ± = Tr^n^xIpA^r^:/ + r ^ ^ r ^ / and f\± = 8^(U)f — / e ± = 7r±(<5T7Tj_ — fi^xr^A^T^)/. For them, it is easy to check that / e ± € AT(n,x) and / i ± € iVM ± (n,xr). Then we have (/ - Q T ) / i ± £ iVM^ and
- (I-QJS^lTjf = (/-QT)/i± + (/-gT)/e± = - X ± ( e ± )-17r;Pe(/1 Q T )/i± +^'±K± /e±- Whence the operators Y± are bounded. Thus T± -< S± and the operators S± and T± are quasisimilar. In the same way, in the dual model for an adjoint operator we have the quasisimilarity of S*± and T*±. We claim that the operators (7±)* and T«± are similar. This is the case for the parts (Te±)* and T*e±. In order to make sure that (Ti±)* and T*;± are similar, we observe that the operators T\± and (T*i±)* (or, to be more precise, their resolvents) are defined by the same formula. (In the case when G+ = ED, the operators T\± are standard restricted backward shifts [4,6]). The difference is in the spaces where they act: EQ^ and £ Q T . Recall definitions for operator valued functions 0r^. = I — QZx and 0~. = / — xQZ- These analytical in the domain G_ functions differ only by the order of the multipliers. To cover both cases (for the domains G±) we need the following lemma. *T(5±)/
Lemma . Let P2 = P, Q = I - P, PDQ = PGQ = PFQ = PCQ = 0, CD DC, CG = GC, CF = FC. Then (7 + P F G ) | # i £ [#i,# 2 ], ((I + PFG)^)-1 (I + PFD)\H2, PC\HX e [HX),PC\H2 £ [H2], (I + PFG)PC\H1 = PC{I PFG)\Hi, where Hx = KerQ n KerP(D + G + DFG), H2 = Ker Q n KerP(£>
= = + +
G + GFD). Note if we choose in the lemma P = I, D = I+A, G = I+B, F — - / , we obtain the well-known identities dimKer(/-AB) = dim Ker ( / - B A) and ap(AB)\{0} = (Tp(BA) \ {0}. In our cases the conditions like PDQ = 0, CD = DC mean that D is an analytic operator-valued function. If we choose in the lemma P = P_, D = 0+, G = -x, F = - 0 ~ , C = jzr^, a G G_, then we obtain that the operators P _ ^ ^ | ^ e + anc ^ ^-J^a \^e+ are similar. If we choose P = P+, D = I + 0 1 , G = I + x, F = -I, C = jzr^, a e G+, then we obtain the similarity for the operators P+j^ \EQ- and
Property of Maximality for Spectral Components
293
Thus we have established the property: q) S*± and S± are
quasisimilar.
Therefore we have S -< S± and S* -< S±. This completes the proof of the statement.
• Remark 1. Note also that r ) M ( 5 ± ) = NM'±(Yl,x);
s)N(S±)
=
N'e±{Yi,x).
Remark 2. One can specify statement 2 of the theorem : we have S\N±(S) -< (fizfi(T±), where the operators T± are c.n.u. contractions such that their characteristic function admit a scalar multiple. Remark 3. There axe analogous theorems for the spectral components N(S) and NM±(S). The corresponding assertions can be obtained if we replace Q± by Qe = {T : T =
This page is intentionally left blank
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
295
A General View on Approximation Ideals Nicolae Titja Transilvania University of Bras,ov, Faculty of Sciences, Department of Mathematics, 2200 Brasov - Romania
Abstract By means of the symmetric norming functions and the abstract concept of approximation numbers of an element in a normed algebra, we present a general view of approximation ideals. Some properties and applications are also presented. Key words: Approximation ideals, symmetric norming functions 2000 MSC: 46A32, 47B06 Introduction. The purpose of this paper is to present a new study of the approximation ideals in a Banach algebra X. This approach generalizes the approximation ideals for operators and sequence spaces (see the examples below). To this end the generalized approximation numbers of an element from the Banach algebra X and the symmetric norming functions of R. Schatten are considered. If the algebra X is L(H), the Banach algebra of all linear and bounded operators T : H —> H, where H is a separable Hilbert space, these ideals are the Schatten classes of operators, [2], [5], [7], [10], [11]. HB : X xX -+X isa. bounded bilinear operator, it is proved that, for some approximations ideals A, the induced operator B : A x A —* A is also bounded, but not for all approximation ideals.
1. Approximation numbers Let (X, || • ||) be a normed (Banach) algebra and let || x \\*: X —> NU {+00} be a group norm (|| • ||*> O i f x e l . ^ 0 ,
|| x + y \\*<\\ x \\* + || y \\*,\\ x ||* = || -x f )
Email address: n.titaOinfo.unitbv.ro (Nicolae Tija).
296
Nicolae Ti\a
such that || xy ||*< min{|| x \\*, \\ y \\*}. For all x G X we define a sequence (an(x)) as follows: an(x) = inf{|| x -x ||, i £ l , || x ||*< n}, n = l , 2 , . . . It is obvious that: || x ||= ai(x) > O2(x) > . . . > 0. Proposition 1.1. The next relations are true: k
(1).
^
k
« n (Xl +X2)<2^
(On(xi)
n=l
+ O,n{x2))
, fc = 1, 2 , . . .
n=l
fc fc
(%). ^ a n (xix2) < 2 J 2 (a n (xi)a n (x 2 )), fc = 1,2,... 71 = 1
71 = 1
Proof. By the definition of the numbers a n (x) for all e > 0 there are xi,x2 G X such that || Xj ||*< n and || x, — x» ||< a n (xj) + | , i = 1,2. Because || xi +X2 ||*< 2n — 1 we obtain: a 2 n - i (xi + x 2 ) <|| (xi + x 2 ) - (xi + x2) \\<\\ xi — xi || + || x2 -x2 \\< < a n (xi) + a n ( x 2 ) +e. Since e is arbitrary it implies : fl2n-i {xi + x 2 ) < o n (xi) + a n (^ 2 )Now we can write: k
2k a
k a
~^2 n (Xl +X2) < ^ n (Xl + X2) < 2 ^ «2n-l (xi + X2) < n=l
n=l
n—1 k
< 2^(a n (xi) + an(x2)). 71=1
This proves (1). To prove the relation (2) we remark at first that a2n-\ (xix 2 ) < a n (xi)a n (x 2 ), because, if xi, x2 are as above, we have: || xi (x2 —x2) -\-Xi~x2 ||*< 2n — 1 and hence a 2 n-i (xix2) <\\ xxx2 - [ x i ( x 2 - x 2 ) +xxx2]
11 = 11 (xi - x i ) ( x 2 - x 2 ) ||<
< (a n (xi) + -J (an(x2) + -J . Since e is arbitrary we obtain the purpose relation. Now, (2) results in the same way as (1), namely: fc fc fc
^ a n ( x i z 2 ) < 2^o 2n _i(xix 2 ) < 2^a n (xi)a n (x 2 ). 7i=l
n=l
n=l
Examples. We present two examples of normed algebras on which we can take a norm || • ||* .
A General View on Approximation Ideals
297
(1). Let (loci il " Hoc) be the normed algebra 1 of all bounded sequences (real or complex numbers), with || x ||oo= sup n \xn\. Here || x ||*= card(x) = card{i G N : Xi =^ 0}. In this case an(x) are the approximation numbers of the sequence x, an(x) = inf{|| x - x W^: card(x) < n}. (2). Let (L(E), || • j|) be the normed algebra of all linear and bounded operators T : E —> E, where E is a normed (Banach) space and || • || is the uniform norm. The norm || • ||* is || T ||*= rankT and hence an(A),A G L(E), is the n- th approximation number of the operator A,
o n (^)=inf{|| A-1\\:
1 G L(E),
rankl
Remark. If E is a separable Hilbert space and A is a compact operator, it is well known, [2], [11], that an(A) — \ n (AA*)* , where {An (AA*)1} is the sequence of ji
eigenvalues of (AA*)2 in decreasing order. In the sequel we denote by K the set of all real sequences x such that card(x) is finite and x\ > X2 > • • • > 0. The functions <j> (symmetric norming functions) of R. Schatten, [5], [6], [7], [11] are defined as follows:
2. Approximation ideals A^X) For x € X and <j> a symmetric norming function we define A^X) Proposition 2.\.A^(x)
= {x e X :
<j>({an(x)})
is an ideal (bilateral) in X.
Proof. At first we prove that, if Xi G A^X), i = 1,2, then xi + x2 G A^X). This is a corollary of the proposition 1.1. and the properties of <j>. Precisely, since T,\an (xi + x2) < 2Ef (an (x\) + an (x2)), we have: 0 ({an (xi + x2)}) < 2cj) ({an (xi) + an (x2)}) <2(<j> (an (x{)) + 4> (an (x2))) • Now, since an (xix2xs) (2)), we obtain:
<|| x\ || an(x2) || x^ || (from the proof of proposition 1.1.,
<\\ xx || <j>({an(x2)}) || x3 \\
Xi,x^ € X, we have Xix2x3 G A
Remarks. 1). We remark that || x \\<j>= 4>({an(x)}) is a quasinorm on A^(X) and this is a quasinormed vector space. The properties || x ||^> 0, x =fi 0 and 1
Tor x,y
eloo,xy={x\y\,X2yi,...)
298
Nicolae Ti\a
II % + y ||^< 2 (|| x ll^ + || 2/ IU) are obvious (see above). If a is a scalar (a 7^ 0), from the above proof, we obtain: || ax ||^=|| aex ||^<|| ae || • || x ||^= |a|- || z^, ||^ . On the other hand
II x ||«HI - -ax || 0 < — || ax ||0, i.e., |Q| II x ||<£<|| ax ||^, . This means || ax ||^,= |a| || x ||^, for all scalars a, since for a = 0 the equality is also true. 2). A^X) is quasinormed subalgebra of X, because II xy ||0<|| x ||^ • || y ||0 (from the definition of [| x ||^, it results that || x ||<|| x ||^.) Proposition 2.2. / / x\ £ A<^(X) and X2 £ A^» (X) i/ien X1X2 G A^,(X), wi(/i II 2:1^2 !U< 2 || Xi H^, • j| X2 ||^», where
norming functions
and
Proof. From the proposition 1.1. we obtain: II £1^2 IU= i> {{an{xix2)})
< 2ip ({an{xi)an(x2)})
<
< 20({a n (x 1 )}) • 0 ; ({a n (x 2 )}) = 2 || xx \U • \\ x 2 || 0 ; . For the special case when X = L(E), the results are presented in [8], [11], and for the particular case when E is a Hilbert space one can see [2], [5], [7]. For some particular cases of functions 0 we can obtain the special classes of Lorentz or Lorentz - Zygmund ideals [9], [11] and more particular if 0 is 4>p : (an(x)) —> ( S a J ( i ) ) ' , 1 < p < 00, we obtain the ideals AP(X), respectively Lp{X) for operators. In this last case, the conclusion of the proposition 2.2 is ||x1x2||p=(EaP(x1x2))i<2j|x1||Pl-||x2||P2, where
P= m
+
w'
because
(
3. Bilinear operators on A
x A^X)
->
A^X)
is also bounded. The answer will be affirmative only for some functions 0, namely for the functions 0 : (a n (x)) —> 0 ( { a „ }), where 0 is a symmetric norming function. To this end we prove the following Lemma. 2
0J(x) = sup (!/ , )eK *$$$,
[5] [10], [11].
A General View on Approximation Ideals L e m m a 3 . 1 . The sequence (an(B(x,y))) k
L,n=l
an(B(x1,x2))
k
s OM Ln=x
satisfies
inequality
|| x2 || an{xi)+
it
299
\\ xi \\ an{x2)
, _ 1 O , K —i, z , . . . ,
fb
where M is constant. Proof. Let M > 0 be a constant such that || B(xi,x2) \\< M \\ x\ || • || x2 || and let x, be such that || x, J|*< n,i = 1,2, and || Xj — x, ||< an(xi) + e. Since || £? (xi,X2) ||*< n 2 , we obtain: an2(B(x1,x2))
<\\ B(xl,x2)-B(x1,x2)
|| = || S (xa - X!,x2) + B (xx,x2 -x^) \\
<M{\\ xi - x i || • || x2 || + || xi || • || x2 - x 2 ||) < < M [(an ( x O + e) || x 2 || + (|| xx -xx\\
+ \\Xl ||) (an (x2) + e ) ] .
Since e is arbitrary it results an2(B(xux2))
<2M[\\ x2 \\ an(x1)+
\\ xx \\ an (x 2 )].
Then we can write
E
a w (.B(xi,x 2 ))
>p
<
n=l
an{B{x1,x2))
n=l k
(n+l)2-l
E
y^
ra=l
~
.
.
..
oi(.B(xi,X2))
i=n2
t—1
k <
3 y ^ ani
,D ,
^
(B{x1,x2))
1=1
n
n=l
The proof is complete. Theorem 3.2. / / B is an operator as above, then the induced operator B : A-r x A-r —•> AT is bounded. Proof.
||B(x1,xa)||5 = ?({aB(fl(x1,a:a))}) = ^ ( { ^ ( ^ M } ) <
<6M^({ l | a a | l °" ( a ; i ) + l | i l ! l | | f l " ( a ; 2 ) }) < 6 M ( | | x 2 II • j| Xi | | ? + | | x i || • || x 2 | | ^ ) . Since || Xi ||<|| x^ ||^ , we obtain: ||5(x1;x2)||? <12M||xi||? ||x2||? and hence B is bounded. Remark. The results are also true when B : X x Y —> Z, where X, y, Z are Banach spaces.
300
Nicolae Ti\a
Applications. Let Ti : E —> E, i = 1,2, be linear and bounded operators where £ is a normed space, then operator T\ &)a T2 : E (^)a E —•> E 0 a E is bounded if a is a tensor norm (|| 2\ (g)T2 \\a<\\ Tx || • \\T2 ||) 3 From the theorem 3.2. we obtain: Corollary 3.3. // Tt £ L^ (E), i = 1,2, then 7\ ® T2 G L^ ( £ ® a E). This result is well-known [9], [10], [11]. Acknowledgement.The author thanks the referee for his helpful comments and advice. References 1. J. Diestel, J. Uhl jr., Vector Measures, Math. Surveys, A.M.S. 15 (1977). 2. I. Gohberg, M. Krein, Introduction to the theory of non-self adjoint operators. A.M.S. Providence, 1969. 3. G. Kothe, Topological Vector spaces II. Springer Verlag, 1979. 4. J. Peetre, G. Sparr, Interpolation of normed abelian groups, Ann. Mat. pura et Appl. 92 (1972) 217 -262. 5. N. Salinas, Symmetric norm ideals and relative conjugate ideals, Trans. A. M.S. 188 (1974) 213-240. 6. R. Schatten, A theory of cross-spaces. Princeton Univ. 1950. 7. R. Schatten, Normideals of completely continuous operators. Springer Verlag 1960. 8. N. Turn, On a class of l ^ operators, Collect. Math. 32 (1981) 275 -279. 9. N. Ti^a, Approximation spaces and biliniar operators, Studia Univ. BabesBolyai, Math. 35 (1990) 89-92. 10. N. Ti^a, On the approximation numbers of the tensor product operator, Ann. Univ. "Al. I. Cuza" Iasi 40 (1994) 329 - 331. 11. N. Tita, Ideale de operator! generate de s numere. Ed. Univ. "Transilvania", Brasov, 1998. 12. K. Yosida, Functional analysis. Springer Verlag, 1965.
3
All standard norms on the tensor product of two normed spaces are tensor norms, [1], [3], [10].
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
301
Inversion of the local Pompeiu transform Natalia P. Volchkova Department of Mathematical Analysis and Function Theory, Donetsk National University, 24, Universitetskaya str., Donetsk, 83055, Ukraine
Abstract The construction of inversion of the local Pompeiu transform for some classes of cylinders is obtained. Key words: Fourier series, convolution, Bessel functions, spherical functions 2000 MSC: 42C10, 44A35, 33C10, 43A90
1. Introduction Let R™ be a real Euclidean space of dimension n > 2 with the Euclidean norm | • |, let M{n) be the group of Euclidean motions in R n , and let T = {^}f=1 be a finite family of distributions with compact supports in R™. For fixed g G M(n) we consider the distribution g^ acting on C°°(R n ) by the rule
(g^J) = (^J°g),
/eC°°(R").
The (global) Pompeiu transform V? is the map *V:C°°(R n ) -* C°°{M{n))k given by Vr(f)(g)
= ({giMi,f),...,igfik,f)),
g € M(n).
(1)
Similarly, for an open set U c K " the local Pompeiu transform maps C°°(U) into the Cartesian product C°°(A(U,[ii))x.. .xC°°(A(U,fik)) by the formula (1), where A{U,m) = {g<= M(n): supp£f/ii C U}. For given T and U the following problems arise (see [4]).
302
Natalia P. Volchkova
Problem 1. Find out whether Vp is an injective map. If it is not, describe the kernel of Vp. Problem 2. In the case V? is injective, find the converse map. Many authors have studied the injectivity of the Pompeiu transform and related problems for special T and U (see the survey papers [4,13], which contain an extensive bibliography, and also [2,3,6,8-12]). The most interesting case is the case when U = Bn(y) = {x G R n : |x — y\ < R}, and T = {XB} is the characteristic function (indicator) of a compact set E C Bji(y) of positive measure. For this family J- and the set E C BT{XQ) having a hyperbolic point x\ G E fl dBr(xo) and the global Pompeiu property, the Pompeiu transform Vp is injective with respect to U if R > 2r (see [2,3], and also [6,9-11], where for some E the minimal value of R for which VXE is injective is found). In [3] for the sets E with the above properties the construction of the inversion of the transform VXE in the ball BR(U), R > 3r is obtained. Besides, for the case where E is a square a function / G C°°{Bn(y)) is recovered in [3] from its Pompeiu transform VXE(f) also for R > 2r. In connection with this, the inversion of the transform TXE in the ball -Bfl(y) of radius R > 2r for other compacts E is of great interest. In the present paper the solution of this problem for some class of cylinders is obtained.
2. Statement of the main result Let S™"1 = {x G W1: \x\ = 1}, let p and a be the polar coordinates in W1 (for each x e R n we set p = \x\ and if x ^ 0, then we set a = | € S™"1). Let |r s (fc) ((r)}> 1 < s < djt, be a fixed orthonormal basis in the spase Tik of spherical harmonics of degree k, regarded as a subspace of L2 (S™^1) (see [7, Chapter 4, section 2]). To every function / € LIOC{BR) we assign its Fourier series oo
dk
k=0s=l
where
fk.{p)=
J
f(P<7)Ys{k\a)da.
Sn-1
To reconstruct / it is sufficient to find the coefficients fks of its Fourier series. Further, as usual, 2?(R™) is the space of infinitely differentiable functions on Rra, with compact supports, and D'(R n ) is the space of distributions on R n . Let p,\ * \ii be the convolution of two distributions on R n one of which is compactly supported. We need a concept of circular symmetrization of a distribution defined as follows: for any fi G £>'(Rn), we define TZfi setting
Inversion of the local Pompeiu transform
303
(il(i,v>) = {fi{x), J
(2)
SO(n)
where SO(n) is the group of rotations of R™, and dk is the normalized Haar measure on SO(n). Let a e (0,2TT), (3a = \ °
/ 2
' "
G
^
S
y 7T , a e (7T,27r), /3 a , Re z > cos f } be the circular segment of angular measure a, H = (S3 — /i a ) x
{
a
cos— , a € (0,TT],
2
6fe > 0 ,fc= 3, . . . , n .
0 , Q€(7r,27r),
Further we need the following differential operators: A = -^ + • • • + ^ j - , D" = flxx-i81.^(^ = K - , x n ) £ Z£, | x | = X l + • • • + x , ) , £>i = ^ + i ^ , £>2 =
aX'ax,'
D
«(a) = (n + «)afj " ^ ^ 7 , (a e M1). We denote ftfe = TZ(D2D^),
where /i = -^Di2{ha)D2XHLet ro be the radius of the least closed ball containing Sg, r = VV§ + &J+ •••+*£, R> 2r, f £ C°°(BR), where Bij = B fl (0). For a: G S f l . ,
we set f(x) = f(-x),
fi(x) = (/ * HXH)(X),
fi{x) = (/*!/<) (i), i = 2,3, where
^2 = ^ 1 ,
_ J 7 e 5 + ^ ^ ( 3 n - 4 ) ( 3 n + 2 ) A ^ 1 - ^ A 2 ^ 1 , 3nsin2 | = 2r2, 1
^3 + ^-ATli , 3nsin 2 ^/2r 2 ,
k
in
2
for a € (0, TT], and ^3 = 7^2 for a S (w, 2n). The main result of this paper is the following T h e o r e m 1. Let R > 2r. Then for any k € Z+, l < s < 4 , p e ( 0 , i?) there exist distributions Uiti, (I e N, i = 1,2,3,4) with the following properties: (1) suppWM c B f l _ r (Z e N,i = 1,2,3), suppWi,4 C BR {I e N); (2) for any / e C°°(B fi ) (A"/) f c s (P) = /_im «W,,i, /2> + (W,l2, / 3 » ,
(3)
/fc8(p) = ;Hm ((W,,3, /1) + (W,l4, A"/)) •
(4)
Let us make some remarks. Lemmas 1 - 3 (see section 3 below) show how to reconstruct the functions fi, i = 1,2,3 in terms of VXH(f). Therefore, applying the equalities (3), (4) we can compute the Fourier coefficients of / in terms of the Pompeiu transform of / . Thus, in Theorem 1 the procedure for the local inversion of the Pompeiu transform VXH is obtained. This method enabled us to obtain similar results for other compact sets E. In particular, analogues of Theorem 1 can be
304
Natalia P. Volchkova
proved for cylinders of the form K x [—63,63] x . . . x [—bn, bn], where K belongs to some class of polygons or circular domains.
3. Auxiliary assertions Let 1 < i < j < n, h, 9 G M1, let r^/j be a shift on h along Xi axis, and let kijtg be the rotation in the plane (xi,Xj) by an angle 9. Lemma 1. Let E C JBri, R > n, f G C°°(BR). Then
V
*'{§£to=^WW9))\^
VXE (Ai(0)/) (g) = 4 (VXE(f)(hj,e°9))
(5) ,
(6)
where gE C BR. Proof. For small h we have VXE (f)(n,h o g) = VXE (/ o Ti>h)(g).
(7)
Differentiating (7) with respect to h and setting h = 0 we obtain (5). Equality (6) is proved analogously. • Lemma 2. Let R > ru E C ~Bri, v = DHDij{a)xE- Then for any / G C°°(BR) and x G BR-ri we have
(/*^)(z) = (-l)W+i J (VXB(Dij(a)D")(y)(f(ky-x)))(e)dk, (8) SO(ti)
where e is the unit element of SO(n). Proof. Using (2), we have
{f*nV){x)
= {V{y), J f(ky-x)dk).
(9)
SO(ra)
By the relation (9) and the definition of Dij(a), we obtain
{f*TZu)(x) = (-l)^+1 j J (DiJ(a)D^(y)(f(ky-x))dkdy. E SO(n)
Hence, from (1) we obtain the required assertion.
•
Inversion of the local Pompeiu transform
305
Remark. Let x G Bn-ri, k G SO(n) be fixed, and let gi be the element of M(n) acting by the formula gxy = ky - x. Then VXE (f{ky - x)) (g) = VXE{f) {gig), where gE c BR^\X\. Due to this relation and Lemma 1 the values / * IZv can be recovered from Pompeiu transform VXE(f) via formula (8). Let S be the Dirac delta measure at the origin of R™. Lemma 3 ([3]). Let R > 2ri, E C ] 3 r i , \i{x) = C°°{BR), and every x € -BR- n we have
Then for any / G
U{D"XE)-
(/*M*))(*)= J (D"5{y),{VXEf)i -k^x~*v SO(n)
\
\)dk> /
where M(n) is considered as the group of (n + 1) x (n + 1) matrices of the form k x ,
k G SO(n),
x G R",
0 1 and E " is identified with the affine subspace {xn+i = 1} of R n + 1 . For each m G { 1 , . . . ,n} let rym be a map R n —> R" acting as follows: if x = (xi,...
G Rn, then rjmx = ({r)mx)i,...,
,xn)
(r)mx)n),
where (r)mx)k
= xk for k ^
m and (r)mx)m = —xm. Let G™ (respectively, G™) be the set of maps R™ —> R™ representable as a composition of an even (respectively, odd) number of maps rjmj
1 < m < n. Lemma 4. For any / G Cn+l(H)
/ D2Di2(ha)-^f{xi,...
we have
,a; n )da;i... dxn =
H
=
E
" £
a df . + sin where
)\f(Zi,vb)-f(z2,Vb)+sm^(z1,r]b)
LJ
2a^ (Z2 ' r?6) J ' —i sin — , a G (0, n], 2 e
'2
, a G (TT,2TT),
Proof. Let Sa = Sg- ha, u G C 3 (S Q ). Then
b= (6 3 , .
+
306
Natalia P. Volchkova [Di2(ha)—Iu)(xi,x2)dx1dx2 C>X J \ 2 J
(10)
\-ha
=
J
[(Au){xl,^i-(xl + hay)
cosf -ha
- (Au) (xu-^/l-ixi+ha)2)]
cLci,
where A= -£^ - x2dx9ldx2 +{xi+ha)-§^.
Bearing in mind that
+ ha)2)
(Au) (zi, ^l-{Xl
= -Q— \u (xi, v7! - (xi + ha)2j - v / l - ^ + Z l J 2 ^ (xU ^ 1 - ^ 1 + / l a ) 2 ) ] , (Au) (xl,-^\-(xl
+ hay)
+ ha)*^ (xi.-Vi-Cxi + M 2 )]
+ y/i-(Xl from (10) we find
y (^12(/>a)|^) ( l l , ^ ) dxXdx2 sa . a du a du N = u(z1)-u(z2)+sm-— z i ) + s m - - — (z2). 2 0x2
n
(11)
2 0x2
l
Since for every v G C ~ ([-b3,63] x . . . x [-bn, bn]) bn
63
(D2v) ( x 3 , . . . , z n ) d z 3 . . . d x n =
••• -b3
^ veG^-2
-bn
from (11) we obtain the assertion of Lemma 4.
^(776) -
^2
v(r)b),
flgcr2
•
Let Jq be the Bessel function of the first kind of order q > 0, and let jq(z) = Jq(z)/ zq. The spherical transform of the radial distribution /i with the compact support in R™ is defined by ji(\) = (n(x),js^(\\x\)),
A€C.
(12)
Inversion of the local Pompeiu transform
307
Lemma 5. Let k S Z+. Then TZk(X) = ( - l ) " - ^ " - 2 * * •. .6 ra A 2 ( fc+n - 2 ) j d ^ W ^ - e f A r ) + A2C2fcj32±2^4(Ar)} , where Cxk = z\-z\
+ ifcsin § (zf" 1 + z\~x) , C2fc = sin2 § (zf - 4 ) .
Proof. Since j'q(i) = —tjq+\{t) (see [1, Chapter 7, § 7.2, formula (51)]), we have ^{{xx+\x2)kjq(\\x\)) = k(Xl + ix2)k-1jq(X\x\)
(13) - X2x,(xx
ix2)kjq+l(X\x\),
+
-^((x1+ix2)kjq(X\x\)) = ik(x1 + ix2)k~1jq(X\x\)
(14) - X2x2(xi +
ix2)kjq+1(X\x\).
Using induction on k from (13), (14) we find {-l)kDk
(jq(X\x\)) = X2k(Xl +
ix2)kjq+k(X\x\).
Hence (see (12)) Uk(X)
= A 2 ( fc +"- 2 )(M,^3 • • •Xn(x1 +
JX?)ki3n+2k-6(X\x\)),
where fj, = -§£iD\2{ha)D2XH- Using Lemma 4, we obtain the required assertion.
•
By the Paley - Wiener theorem [5, Theorem 7.3.1] there exist radial distributions (j,i and /i2 with supports in Br, for which Jii(X) = (—l)nL'2(X)/X2n, /^(A) = {—l)nT>z(X)/X2n. j,From Lemma 5 and properties of Bessel functions (see [1, Chapter 7, § 7.9]) it follows that jSi(A) and JL2{X) have no common zeros. Further, we shall need a lower estimate for the function jSi(A)/U2(A)^+fc_i(£A), where e > 0. Lemma 6. Let a i , 02,(23 > 0, k G Z+, 6(\) =
J3^1{a1X)J3n{a2X)jq+k_1{azX).
Then there are constants L\k, L2k, such that for any integer I > L\k there exists Pi € (1,1 + 1) such that if either \z\ = pi or | Im A| > 1 and |A| > Lxk, then
\eW\>r-^=re{ai+a2+aa)]1m^. Proof. The function #(A) is an even entire function, therefore to prove the assertion of Lemma 6 we can assume that Re A > 0. From the asymptotic development of the Bessel function (see [1, Chapter 7, § 7.13, formula (3)]) we find
.(A)= lyJlM-^M^M-'^L
CQS
^ A . (3n _1} ^ ,
308
Natalia P. Volchkova /
7T\
/
7T\
/ e(a1+a2+a3)\lm\{\
x cos \a2X - (3n + 1 ) - J cos (a 3 A - (n + 2k - 1 ) - ) + O
7n+2t+1
.
By the Lojasiewicz inequality (see [3]) we have \cosz\>—d(z,V)ellmzl,
(15)
?re
where V = {(2i + 1)TT/2,Z G Z}, d(z, F ) = min (1, disi(z, F)). Using (15) and repeating arguments from the proof of Lemma 7 in [3], we obtain the assertion of Lemma 6. • In what follows let us assume that R > 2r. Choose a strictly increasing sequence of positive numbers {£m}m=i with limit ^ — 1, and a corresponding increasing sequence of radii Rm = 2r(l + e m ) , m > 1, Ro = 0. Lemma 7. Let R > 2r.Then for any k £ Z + , m G N, t € [Rm-i,Rm) there are two sequences of radial distributions satisfying the following conditions: (1) supp/i M C Bfl m -r, i = 1,2, i e N, (2) there exist constants L = L(k,R,r,Ei,n),C = C(R,r,Si,n) > 0 such that for I > L the equality \j*+k-i(t\)
- (jui(A)w,i(A) + / U 2 ( A ) £ I I 2 ( A ) ) | <
C(/e,r,ei,n)||AH-^eflw|ImA,
||A||=max(1>|A|)>
holds. To prove Lemma 7 it is sufficient to use Lemma 6 and repeat the arguments from the proof of Proposition 8 in [3].
4. The proof of main result By Lemma 7 it follows (see [3, proof of Theorem 9]) that for any m € N, p € [i? m _i, Rm) there are distributions Uiti ( l € N , i = l, 2) with supports in RR-T such that for / > L and any / G COC(BR) the following estimate is valid |/fc.(p)-<Wj,i,/*A*i>-
(16)
|x|<M
where i?^ = | i ? + | i ? m , -W = [n"^13] + 1, and the constant C3 does not depend on R,r,ei,n. Substituting in (16) / for A n / and having in mind that A n /i; = 1^+1,
Inversion of the local Pompeiu transform
309
i = 1,2, we obtain the equality (3). Let now 7\ = IZXH, T2 = AnS. Then Ti(0) ^ 0, ?2(A) = ( —l) n A 2n . Thus, T\ and T2 have no common zeros. Moreover, T\ has an asymptotic behavior of the same type as that of the Bessel function (see [2,3]). Hence we can apply the same procedure as above to the two radial distributions Xi and T2. By the same reasons there exist distributions liij (I S N, i = 3,4) such that (4) holds. Theorem is proved. References 1. H. Bateman and A. Erdelyi, Higher transcendental functions. 2 (Nauka, Moscow, 1974). 2. C.A. Berenstein and R. Gay, Le probleme de Pompeiu locale, J. Anal. Math. 52 (1989) 133-166. 3. C.A. Berenstein, R. Gay, A. Yger, Inversion of the local Pompeiu transform, J. Anal. Math. 54 (1990) 259-287. 4. C.A. Berenstein and D. Struppa, Complex analysis and convolution equations, Current Problems in Mathematics, Fundamental Directions, 54 (VINITI, Moscow, 1989) 5-111. (In Russian). 5. L. Hormander, Linear partial differential operators. Springer-Verlag, Berlin 1963. 6. P.A. Masharov, A new Morera-type theorem on the disk, Visnik Kharkiv Univ. Ser. Math. Prikl. Math. Mekh. 475 (49) (2000) 126-132. 7. I. Stein and G. Weiss, Introduction to Fourier analysis on Euclidean spaces. Princeton University Press, Princeton, NJ, 1971. 8. V.V. Volchkov, A definitive version of the local two-radii theorem, Mat. Sb. 186 (6) (1995) 15-34. 9. V.V. Volchkov, An extremum problem related to Morera's theorem, Mat. Zametki. 60 (6) (1996) 804-809. 10. V.V. Volchkov, Extremal cases of the Pompeiu problem, Mat. Zametki. 59 (5) (1996) 671-680. 11. V.V. Volchkov, Extremal problems on Pompeiu sets II, Mat. Sb. 191 (5) (2000) 4-16. 12. V.V. Volchkov, Injectivity sets of the Pompeiu transform, Mat. Sb. 190 (11) (1999) 51-66. 13. L. Zalcman, A bibliographic survey of the Pompeiu problem, in: B.Fuglede et al. (eds), Approximation by Solutions of Partial Differential Equations (Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht, 1992) 185-194.
This page is intentionally left blank
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
311
Space of Probability Measures and Absolute Extensors in the Asymptotic Category Mykhajlo M. Zarichnyi Department of Mechanics and Mathematics, Lviv National University, Universytetska 1, 79000 Lviv, Ukraine
Abstract The main result asserts that there exists a proper metric space of asymptotic dimension zero such that its space of probability measures with respect to the Kantorovich metric is not an absolute extensor for the asymptotic category. This provides a negative answer to a question formulated by Dranishnikov. Key words: Asymptotic dimension, probability measure, extensors, metric spaces 2000 MSC: 46E27, 46E30, 54C55, 54E35
1. Introduction It is well-known that in the category of compact Hausdorff spaces the inclusion P(AE(0)) C AE is valid, where P stands for the probability measure functor and AE (respectively AE(0)) denotes the class of absolute extensors (in dimension 0) for the class of paracompact spaces; see, e.g. the survey paper [9]. Every compact metrizable space is an AE(0), therefore, the space P(X) is an absolute extensor for arbitrary compact metric space X. The question whether a counterpart of this fact is true in for the category of proper metric spaces and * The paper was finished during the author's visit to the University of Saskatchewan. He thanks the Department of Mathematics and Statistics for hospitality. Email address: toposSfranko.lviv.ua, mzar81itech.lviv.ua (Mykhajlo M. Zarichnyi).
312
Mykhajlo M. Zarichnyi
the asymptotically Lipschitz maps (see the definitions below) was formulated by Dranishnikov [2, Problem 12] in connection with existence of the homotopy extension theorem in this category. An example providing the negative answer to this question was found in [10]. This example is of infinite asymptotic dimension in the sense of Gromov [3] and the aim of this note is to demonstrate that there is also a zero-dimensional counterexample. Moreover, we show that the space of probability measures of the mentioned space is not an absolute extensor for the class of proper metric spaces of the asymptotic dimension 0. Note also that the existence of an asymptotically zero-dimensional space whose space of probability measures is not an absolute extensor for the asymptotic category contradicts to the remark following Problem 12 in [2] . This example also works for another constructions, in particular, for the spaces of measurable maps from a unit segment into a proper metric space and for its subspace consisting of step functions (the Hartman-Mycielski construction). That these spaces are absolute extensors in the category of metric spaces and continuous maps is a background for some theorems on extension of partial (pseudo)metrics, see [1], [11], [7]. Therefore, the corresponding problems on extension of partial (pseudo)metrics in the asymptotic category require alternative approach. As in [10], the construction of the example is based on results of U. Lang [6] on extendability of asymptotically Lipschitz maps into Euclidean spaces.
2. Preliminaries 2.1. Asymptotic category Together with Roe's category of proper metric spaces and coarse maps [8], the asymptotic category A introduced by A. Dranishnikov [2] turned out to be an important universe for developing asymptotic topology. A typical metric will be denoted by d. A map / : X —> Y between metric spaces is called (A, e)-Lipschitz for A > 0, e > 0 if d(f(x), f(x')) < Xd(x, x') + e for every x, x' € X. A map is called asymptotically Lipschitz if it is (A, e)-Lipschitz for some A,£ > 0. The (l,0)-Lipschitz maps are also called Lipschitz or short. A metric space is proper if every closed ball in it is compact. A map of metric spaces is (metrically) proper if the preimages of the bounded sets are bounded. The objects of the category A are the proper metric spaces and the morphisms are the proper asymptotically Lipschitz maps. A metric space Y (not necessarily an object of A) is an absolute extensor (AE) for the category A if for every proper asymptotically Lipschitz map / : A —> Y defined on a closed subset of a proper metric space X there exists a proper asymptotically Lipschitz extension / : X —• Y of / .
Probability measures and absolute extensors 2.2. Asymptotic
313
dimension
The notion of asymptotic dimension is introduced by M. Gromov [3]. Let X be a metric space. A family C of subsets of X is said to be uniformly bounded if there exists M > 0 such that diam A < M for every A £ C. Given D > 0, we say that a family C of subsets of X is D-disjoint if ini{d(a, a') \ a £ A, a' £ A'} > D for every A, A' £C, A^A'. We say that the asymptotic dimension of X is < n (written asdimX < n) if for every D > 0 there exists a cover U of X such that W = ZY° U • • • U Un, where every family Ul is uniformly bounded and .D-disjoint. If, in the definition of the absolute extensor we require that asdimX < n, then the definition of the absolute extensor in asymptotic dimension n (briefly AE(n)) is obtained. It is easy to see that, for a proper metric space X, the inequality asdimX < 0 is equivalent to the condition that for every C > 0 the diameters of the C-chains in X (i.e. the sequences x\,X2, • • • ,Xk with d(xi,Xi+i) < C for every i = 1,2,... ,k — 1) are bounded from above. 2.3. Spaces of probability measures For a metric space X let P(X) denote the space of probability measures with compact supports on X. We naturally identify the probability measures with the corresponding functionals on the set C(X) of continuous real-valued functions on X. Every point x £ X is identified with the Dirac measure 5X concentrated in X. The Kantorovich metric on P(X) is defined by the formula: d{ii,v) = sup{|/x( Y of proper metric spaces the naturally defined map P{f): P(X) —> P(Y) is short and that the barycenter map b: P(Rn) -> Rn, b{n) = I xdfi, Jw is short.
3. Example The example below is a modification of the author's example of a proper metric space whose space of probability measures is not an AE in the asymptotic category [10]. The modification allows to achieve asymptotic zero-dimensionality of the example. For the sake of completeness we provide the details of the construction. For every n, the Euclidean space R n is naturally identified with the subspace {(xi) \xi = 0 for all j > n) of the space I2.
314
Mykhajlo M. Zarichnyi
We endow the subspace X' = \JnGN{n2} x l " c l x ! d((m, (Xi)),
2
with the metric
( n , (yz))) = (\m - n\2 + \\(Xi) - ( y t ) | | 2 ) 1 / 2 .
Obviously, X is a proper metric space. For every n we denote by pn: X' —> W1 a map denned by the formula pn{m, (x*)) = ( x i , . . . ,xn). Clearly, pn is a short map. It is shown in [6] (see Theorem 1.5 therein) that for any n > 2 there exists a metric space Xn that contains the Euclidean space M.n as a metric subspace and such that there is no (A, e)-Lipschitz retraction from Xn onto W1 with A < n 1//4 . In the sequel we will need an explicit construction of these spaces. Following [6], for every natural k and natural n > 2 we define graphs Gn^k as follows: the set of vertices V(Gn^) is the union of I(Gn,k) and T(Gn
||XJ_I
- Xi\\' \ (x - x 0 ) x i , . . . ,x; = y) is a path in Gn,k >
U=i
J
(here |[x||' denotes the max-norm of x G M.n.) Define spaces X and Y as follows:
X
oc
oc
oc oc
2 Xr G 2
= U U i" } ( " ,^), ^ = LJ U ^
XV G
( n*,k*)
where the metric on X is inherited from X' and the metric on Y is the maximal metric that agrees with the already defined metric on X and the metric dn
{yu---,yn}c(j(j{j2}xV(GP!P) 3=2 1=3
and diam {yi,...,yn}<
2
\/{k ) + (3fc2)2 < VTOC. Otherwise k
k
{yi,... ,yn} n Y \ U |J{j 2 } x V{GP^) ± 0 j=2 l=j
and { y i , . . . , yn} is a singleton. It is proved in [6] that the following holds for the spaces Xni = W1 U|Jfcln{™2} x V(Gn2 4.2) endowed with the maximal metric that agrees with the initial metric on
Probability measures and absolute extensors
315
Rn and the inherited from Y metric on \J^Ln{n2} x V(Gn2;fc2) (note that these two metrics coincide on the intersection of their domains): there is no (A, e)-retraction of Xn2 to R™2 with \
4. Space of measurable maps For a Banach space B, by Li([0,1],-B) we denote the set of Bochner integrable measurable maps from [0,1] to B. Every metric space X can be isometrically embedded into a Banach space and this allows us to define Li([0,1], X) as a subspace in ^([0,1], B). It is well-known that for any short map / : X —> Y the induced map
/M^ao.ij.xj-Liao.ii.n /*M = M is short as well. Also, the integration map 6 : L i ( [ 0 , l ] , R " ) - > R n , b(
is short. Let now X be an example from Section 3. Arguing similarly as in this example and using the above mentioned properties of the maps /* and b, we conclude that the space Li([0, l],X) is not an AE for the category A. Recall that the Hartman-Mycielski construction is defined as follows (see [4]). Given a metric space X, denote by HM{X) the set of all maps a: [0,1) —> X for which there exists a finite sequence 0 = t0 < t\ < • • • < tk = 1 such that a is constant on every interval [U,U+i), i = 0,..., k — 1. The space HM(X) is endowed with the metric d(a,(3) = Jo d(a(t), f3(t))dt, which allows to consider HM(X) as a subspace of Li([0,1], Jf). Again, one can similarly show that the space HM(X), where X is an example from Section 3, is not an AE for the category A.
316
Mykhajlo M. Zarichnyi
5. Question Let X be a proper metric space of finite asymptotic dimension and such that X is an absolute extensor for the category A (it is proved in [2] that R™ = {(xi,..., xn) £ K n | xn > 0} is such a space). It is not known whether the space of probability measures P(X) is an AE for the category A. We leave this as an open question. Similar questions can be formulated for the spaces of measurable maps and the Hartman-Mycielski construction. References 1. T. Banakh, C. Bessaga, On linear operators extending [pseudo]metrics, Bull. Polish Acad. Sci. Math. 48 (2000) 35-49. 2. A. Dranishnikov, Asymptotic topology, Russian Math. Surveys. 55 (6) (2000) 71-116. 3. M. Gromov, Asymptotic invariants of infinite groups. Geometric group theory, Vol. 2 (Sussex, 1991), 1-295, London Math. Soc. Lecture Note Ser., 182, Cambridge Univ. Press, Cambridge, 1993. 4. S. Hartman, J. Mycielski, On the imbedding of topological groups into connected topological groups, Colloq. Math. 5 (1958) 167-169. 5. J.E. Hutchinson, Fractals and self-similarity, Indiana Univ. Math. J. 30 (1981) 713-747. 6. U. Lang, Extendability of large-scale Lipschitz maps, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 351 (1999) 3975-3988. 7. E.D. Tymchatyn, M. Zarichnyi, On simultaneous linear extensions of partial (pseudo)metrics, Preprint (2002). 8. J. Roe, Coarse cohomology and index theory for complete Riemannian manifolds. Memoirs Amer. Math. Soc. no 497, 1993. 9. E.V. Shchepin, Functors and uncountable powers of compacta, (Russian) Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 36 no. 3(219), (1981) 3-62. 10. M. Zarichnyi, Asymptotic category and spaces of probability measures, Visn. L'viv National University (in press). 11. M. Zarichnyi, Regular linear operators extending metrics: a short proof, Bull. Polish Acad. Sci. Math. 44 (3) (1996) 267-269.
Functional Analysis and its Applications V. Kadets and W. Zelazko © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved
317
F-Algebras: Some Results and Open Problems Wieslaw Zelazko Institute of Mthematics Polish Academy of Sciences, Sniadeckich 8, PO Box 21, 00-956 Warszawa 10, Poland Key words: F-algebras, submultiplicative F-norm, Bo-algebras, Q-algebra, maximal ideals 2000 MSC: 46H05, 46H40 The first class of topological vector spaces (t.v.s.) considered in the famous Banach's book ([7]-[9]) is the class of the spaces of type F (the letter was chosen to honor the name of Maurice Frechet), i.e. the class of completely metrizable t.v.s. The topology (metric) of such a space X can be given by means of an F-norm \\x\\, i.e. a functional || • || which satisfies (i) j|x|| > 0 and ||x|| = 0 iff x = 0,
(ii) Hz + y l l ^ HsU + | M | , (Hi) \\ax\\ < \\Px\\,
(iv) limQ n = 0 implies ||a n x|| = 0, (v) lim | \xn 11 = 0 implies lim 11axn\ \ = 0, (vi) lim ||x n || = 0 and lim \an\ = 0 implies lim | | a n x n | | = 0, for all elements x, y S X and all scalars a, (3 (cf. [7]-[9] or [22]). The condition (vi) is a consequence of previous conditions. The distance (metric) in X is given by
\\x-v\\A real or complex algebra A is said to be a topological (resp. semitopological) algebra, if it is a t.v.s. and the map (a;, y) —> xy is jointly (resp. separately) continuous. A commutative semitopological algebra is topological iff the map x —> x2 is continuous (this fact fails to be true in a non commutative case). An F-algebra is defined as a semitopological algebra which is an F-spa.ce. For general informations on topological algebras the reader is referred to [20] and [30] (see also [13]). Email address: zelazkoaeuro.impan.gov.pl (Wieslaw Zelazko ).
318
Wieslaw Zelazko
Proposition 1. (Arens [3]) An F-algebra is a topological algebra. This Proposition follows immediately from the fact that a separately continuous bilinear map between F-spaces is automatically jointly continuous. For incomplete metrizable semitopological algebras the Proposition 1 is false. One can have even a semitopological normed algebra which is not a topological algebra. Clearly, the multiplication in such an algebra does not extend to a separately continuous multiplication on its completion. An example of F-algebra is the algebra S (already considered by Banach as an example of space of type F , cf [8], example 1 in the Introduction, §7) of all (classes of) Lebesgue measurable functions on the unit interval, provided with the topology of convergence in measure and with the pointwise algebra operations. Its F-norm can be given by the formula
" " J l + \x(t)\
o The joint continuity of multiplication in an F-algebra does not lead to any reasonable inequality involving its F-norm. If A is a unital F-algebra and its F-norm is submultiplicative,
ll*3/ll
p(xy,Q)
Other important classes of F-algebras are algebras of type Bo (according to the Banach School terminology, cf [18], [19], [29],[30]), i.e. locally convex F-algebras. The topology of such an algebra A can be given by means of an increasing sequence \x\i < l^b < . . . of (homogeneous) seminorms satisfying (1)
\xy\i < |z| i + i|r/| i + i
for all i = 1 , 2 , . . . and all elements x, y € A. In t h e case when A is unital with the unity e, then we can require additionally |e|j = 1 for a l H . Example of such a n algebra is constructed by Arens ([2]) algebra Z ^ O , 1] = H P >i -^p[0) 1] with pointwise algebra operations and the convergence in all norms \x\p = (Jo \x(t)\pdt)
P
,p > 1
F-Algebras: Some Results and Open Problems
319
The same topology is given by any increasing sequence pi —+ oo, and the sequence can be chosen so that the relations (1) are satisfied (see e.g. [30]). An important subclass of the above one is the class of multiplicatively convex (m-convex) £?o-algebras, called also Arens-Michael i?o-algebras. These algebras were introduced independently in [4] and in [21]. Here we replace (1) by \xy\i < M,M>, i = l,2 Important examples of such algebras are algebras of analytic functions on a domain O (in C,Cn, or in a suitable manifold) provided with the pointwise algebra operations and the compact-open topology (topology of uniform convergence on compact subsets of $7). If instead of homogeneous seminorms we consider p-homogeneous seminorms, 0 < p < 1 (p depending upon the seminorm in question), we obtain the class of locally pseudoconvex F-algebras. In this case the formula (1) has to be replaced by
(2)
\*v\pit+1
where pi is the homogeneity exponent of the seminorm | • |j (note that if | • | is a p-homogeneous seminorm, 0 < p < 1, and 0 < q < 1, then | • \q is pg-homogeneous, i.e. it is subadditive too). We shall not go into details concerning these algebras and refer the reader to [25] and [30] (see also [17]). In this paper we shall be dealing only with questions concerning the general .F-algebras. After discussing some long time open questions we shall concentrate mostly on the ideal theory of these algebras. One of important still open questions (posed directly in [26]) is the problem whether the Gelfand-Mazur theorem is valid for the algebras of type F, i.e. whether every division algebra in this class is trivial (topologically isomorphic to C in case of a complex algebra and to either R, C, H in the real case; here H denotes the division algebra of real quaternions) The counterexample proposed in [25] does not work. Perhaps the most general positive result in this direction is due to Turpin and Waelbroeck ([24], see also [25]) and reads as follows Theorem 2. Let A be a complex (resp. real) topological division algebra with continuous inverse and possessing a continuous p-homogeneous seminorm, 0 < p < 1. Then A is topologically isomorphic to C (resp. to either of R,C,H). The requirement that the operation x —• x" 1 is necessary for validity of the above result, but in the case of an F-algebra it is satisfied automatically. It follows from the following result proved by Arens in [3] and by Banach in [10] in the separable case, and in [29] in the general case. Theorem 3. Let Abe a real or complex unital algebra of type F. Then the operation x —> x*1 is continuous on the set G{A) of all invertible elements in A iff the set G{A) is a Gs set. Note that the Gelfand-Mazur theorem fails for incomplete metrizable topological algebras even in the locally convex case. A suitable example was constructed by Williamson in [26]. Thus there is an infinite dimensional algebra of type Bo containing a dense division algebra. In this example the operation of taking an inverse is
320
Wieslaw Zelazko
discontinuous (as follows from Theorem 2). However the mentioned above F-algebra S contains a dense field (the field of all rational functions) and it has a continuous inverse. Another example of algebra with discontinuous inverse is the mentioned above algebra Z/w[0,l] The multiplicatively-pseudoconvex algebras always have a continuous inverse, so that the Gelfand-Mazur theorem holds true for this class. It is also true for semitopological normed or p-normed algebras ([27]). However, even a finite dimensional Banach algebra can have a dense division ring: one can construct for an arbitrary natural n a division ring which is an algebra over rational numbers and which is algebraically isomorphic to a subring of C, while topologically it is a dense subset of C n (see [34]). Another important problem is the famous Michael Problem ([21], Question 1; it was also independently posed by Mazur during his seminars; H. G. Dales writes in [13] that the problem was posed by Mazur around 1937). It is the question whether all multiplicative-linear functionals on an m-convex Bo-algebra are automatically continuous. The strongest up-to-now result in this direction is due to Arens [5]. We say that a topological algebra A is finitely generated if there is a finite subset of it such that A coincide with its smallest closed subalgebra containing this subset. Theorem 4. Let A be a commutative complex finitely generated m-convex Boalgebra. Then all its multiplicative-linear functionals are continuous. The Michael-Mazur problem is also open for Bo-algebras or F-algebras even in the finitely generated or singly generated case. Using the Theorem 4 it is settled in positive in case of a commutative £?o-algebra for which the maximal ideal space is at most countable (cf. [13], Corollary 4.10.12, and [32]). For more information about this problems and also for some equivalent formulations see [14] and [16]. While for unital commutative Banach algebras or locally bounded F-algebras there is a 1-1 correspondence between maximal ideals and multiplicative-linear functionals (the maximal ideals coincide with kernels of these functionals), such a correspondence does not hold true for more general algebras. For m-convex Boalgebras we have the following result ([31]). Recall that a unital semitopological algebra is said a Q-algebra if the group G(A) of all its invertible elements is open. Theorem 5. Let A be a commutative unital complex m-convex algebra of type Bo. Then the following are equivalent. (i) All maximal ideals in A are closed. (ii) All maximal ideals in A are of codimension one, i.e. they are kernels of multiplicative linear functionals. (Hi) The spectra of all elements in A are bounded. (iv) The spectra of all elements in A are compact. (v) A is a Q-algebra, i.e. the set G(A) is open. (vi) The maximal ideal space 9Jl(A) is compact. In the above %R(A) denotes the "maximal ideal space" of A, i.e. the set of all continuous multiplicative linear functionals on A provided with the Gelfand topology. The (algebraic) spectrum of an element x in A is given by the formula a(x) =
F-Algebras: Some Results and Open Problems
321
{A £ C : x — Ae 0 G(A)}, where e denotes the unity of A. It follows, in particular, that if a commutative m-convex unital jBo-algebra is not a Q-algebra, then it must have a dense maximal ideal of infinite codimension. Such an algebra, however, must have at least one closed maximal ideal which is a kernel of a multiplicative linear functional. In the non m-convex case it can happen that all maximal ideals are dense and of infinite codimension, it is so in the mentioned above algebra Lu [0,1] or in the Williamson's algebra, as well as in the algebra S. In the case of a commutative complex unital algebra of type Bo every closed maximal ideal is of codimension one and so it is a kernel of a multiplicative linear functional. It follows immediately from the Gelfand-Mazur theorem for these algebras (both facts are equivalent). For a general .F-algebra both facts form open questions, as mentioned above. The equivalence of (i) and (v) in the above theorem is also true for general commutative F-algebras, as proved by Akkar and Nacir in [1]: Theorem 6. Let A be a real or complex commutative unital F-algebra. Then A has all maximal ideals closed iff it is a Q-algebra. We do not know whether the above result can be extended to non-commutative algebras and the one-sided ideals. An obvious conjecture (posed already in [38]) is the following one. Conjecture 7. Let A be a unital F-algebra. Then A has all maximal left ideals closed iff it is a Qi-algebra (a left Q-algebra, i.e. an algebra for which the set G[(A) of all left-invertible elements is open). The difficulty lies in constructing a dense left ideal in the case when Gi (A) is not open. The construction of such an ideal would not be difficult if we knew that A has a maximal commutative subalgebra which is not a Q-algebra. However, it is a still open problem whether a topological algebra whose all maximal commutative subalgebras are Q-algebras is itself such an algebra. We even do not know whether Q;-algebras can really exist, i.e. whether one can have a Qj-algebra which is not a Q-algebra. We either do not know the answer to the following Conjecture 8. Let A be a real or complex F-algebra which is not a Q-algebra. Then A has either a (proper) dense left ideal or such a right ideal. We have only a two-sided version of the Akkar and Nacir Theorem (see [39], the proof is not yet published). To formulate it we need the following notation. Let x be an element of a unital algebra A, and denote by id,2(x) the smallest two-sided ideal in A containing this element. Put G2{A) = {x £ A : ic^x) = ^4}. Call a semitopological algebra A a Q2-algebra of the set G2{A) is a neighbourhood of the identity element in A (we do not know whether G2{A) is open when it has a non-empty interior, we know only that it is true for Gi(A) or for Gr(A)). Clearly, a Qi- or a Q r -algebra is a Q2-algebra. Theorem 9. Let A be a real or complex unital F-algebra. Then A has all maximal
322
Wieslaw Zelazko
two-sided ideals closed iff it is a Q2-algebra. As before, we do not know whether there exists a Q2-algebra which is not a Q-algebra, but we suspect that such an algebra can exist. For an infinite dimensional commutative F-algebra it can happen that not only maximal ideals are closed, but also all ideals are closed (in the Banach algebra case such a situation cannot exist, as follows from the mentioned below result of Grauert and Remmert [15]). For instance, consider the algebra A of all formal power series x = Y^f &l with usual multiplication (convolution multiplication of coefficients) and the seminorms n
An = ^2|& • 0
As a t.v.s it coincides with the space (s) considered by Banach in [8] (example 2 in §7 of the Introduction). Clearly these seminorms satisfy (2), so that s is a commutative m-convex Bo-algebra. It is not hard to see that every proper ideal of A is of the form In = tnA, n = 1,2,... (it follows from the fact that every element x in A, for which £0 7^ 0, is invertible in A, in particular A is a Q-algebra), and so it is closed. The characterization of commutative F-algebras with all ideals closed was obtained independently by Choukri and El Kinani [12], and the author [37]. Theorem 10. Let A be a real or complex unital F-algebra, then A has all ideals closed iff it is a Noetherian algebra. Recall that a commutative algebra A is said Noetherian if every its ideal is finitely generated, i.e. is of the form / = x\A + x-^A + ... + xnA for some natural n, where Xi,... ,xn € A. Similarly we define a left or right Noetherian algebra in case when A is not commutative. Thus every commutative Noetherian F-algebra must be a Q-algebra. The above mentioned example is even a principal ideal domain, i.e. every of its ideals is principal (i.e. singly generated). In a sense it is a trivial example because it is has only countably many ideals and is a radical algebra (it has only one maximal ideal). A much more involved example of an m-convex Bo algebra which is a principal ideal domain was constructed by Carboni and Larotonda [11]. It is a semisimple algebra with uncountably many maximal ideals (it consists of holomorphic functions in the unit disc in C, continuous on its boundary, and the unit disc is its maximal ideal space). The fact that the algebras in both examples are m-convex is forced by the fact that a commutative Bo-algebra, which is a Q-algebra, must be m-convex (see [28] for the complex case and [38] for the real case; however, in the non-commutative case we can have a non-m-convex Q-algebra of type Bo, cf [35]). For a Banach algebra case the theorem of Grauert and Remmert ([15], Appendix to §5) states that a commutative Noetherian Banach algebra must be finite dimensional. This result was extended to the non-commutative case by Sinclair and Tullo [23]. Again we do not know whether the non-commutative version of the Theorem 10 is true. An obvious conjecture is that an F-algebra has all left ideals closed iff it is left Noetherian (this condition is necessary, see [37]). The difficult part is in proving
F-Algebras: Some Results and Open Problems
323
that a left Noetherian F-algebra must have all left ideals closed. We do not know either whether a left Noetherian F-algebra is automatically right Noetherian. We pass now to the problem of existence of an F-algebra with all ideals dense (the other end of the scale). No such example is known. Aharon Atzmon [6] constructed a commutative unital complete locally convex algebra with all proper ideals dense, but it is non-metrizable (such an algebra cannot be multiplicatively convex). For non-unital algebras the problem is open even for Banach algebras (see e.g. [33]). Even it is not known whether a non-unital Banach algebra must have a proper closed subalgebra (unless it is of dimension one). If there is example of a (commutative) Banach algebra A without proper closed subalgebras, then its construction is not easy, since all operators of multiplication by elements of A have no proper closed invariant subspaces. Also no example of such an algebra is known in the class of all topological algebras. However, the author constructed in [36] an incomplete locally convex metrizable infinite dimensional semitopological algebra with all proper subalgebras dense (of course, such an algebra must be commutative and non-unital) We close this paper with the discussion on the following Conjecture. The quoted below results are of a preliminary character and it is their first publication. Conjecture 11. A commutative unital F-algebra has a dense principal ideal iff the operation of taking an inverse is discontinuous. For our discussion we need the following concept. Call an element x of a unital commutative semitopological algebra A topologically invertible if there is a net (za) of elements of A such that limQ xza = e, where e is the unity of A. Equivalently, the principal ideal generated by x is dense. We could consider also such a concept in a non-commutative algebra and consider the left or light topological invertibility (it is unclear whether we can take the same net for an element which is both left and right topologically invertible), but here we limit ourselves to the commutative case and to the algebras of type F. Denote by G* (A) the set of all topologically invertible elements of such an algebra A. Clearly G(A) c Gt(A) and an element x e A is in Gt(A) \ G(A) iff x is a proper (i.e. non-invertible) topologically invertible element. We have Gt(A)2 C Gt(A), i.e. Gt(A) is a semigroup under the multiplication. Also xy £ Gt{A) implies that both x and y are in Gt(A). The following result is true also in the non-commutative case (under a suitable definition of Gt(A)). Proposition 12. Let A be real or complex unital algebra of type F. Then the set G*(A) is a Gs-set. The following Corollary gives half of the proof of the Conjecture 11. Corollary 13. Let A be as above and suppose that the operation x —> x " 1 is discontinuous. The A has a proper topologically invertible element and so a (proper) dense principal ideal. The proof follows immediately from Theorem 3 and Proposition 12. Under the assumptions of the Corollary 13, we can effectively construct a non-invertible el-
324
Wieslaw Zelazko
ement in Gt{A). Namely, we can take a sequence of invertible elements xn —> e such that the sequence (x" 1 ) is divergent. Passing, if necessary, to a subsequence, we can assume that the product £1X2... is convergent to an element x. It can be proved that x is non-invertible and belongs to the set Gt(A). In a similar way we can obtain another characterization of F-algebras with a continuous inverse. Proposition 14. Let A be a real or complex unital algebra of type F. Then the operation x —» x" 1 is continuous iff every convergent infinite product of invertible elements is invertible. It is not hard to see that the mentioned above algebra L"[0,1] has proper topologically invertible elements. To see it take, say, any continuous function x(t) on the unit interval, 0 < x(t) < 1, which decreases to zero on [0,£o] and increases to one on [t o .l], and such that the inverse x~1{t) is not in Lp[0,1] for some p > 1. Thus x is in L"[0,1] and is non-invertible there. Put wt)
=
/a;" 1 (*). \ n,
ilx-l{t)<notherwise.
Clearly zn is in L"[0,1] for all n. One can easily check that xzn —> e = 1 in the topology of Lu [0,1]. On the other hand, it can be shown that all m-convex algebras, as well as the mentioned above algebra 5 fail to have such elements (these algebras have a continuous inverse). All these facts support the Conjecture 11. The author does not know the answer to the following problem, interesting for the ideal theory of F-algebras. Problem 15. Let A be a commutative unital F-algebra and suppose that for some Xi,... ,xn G A the ideal x\A + ... + xnA is proper and dense. Does it follow that A has proper topologically invertible elements ? One can define a topological spectrum
G\A).
It is smaller than the usual (algebraic) spectrum, but it has a certain advantage, as seen in the following Proposition 16. Let A be a unital complex metrizable topological algebra, and denote by A its completion (it is an F-algebra). Then for each x in A we have a^(x) =aL(x). The proof follows immediately from the formula Gt(A) = Gt(A)C\A. This concept of spectrum seems to be appropriate for incomplete metrizable topological algebras (even for normed algebras). It is not hard to see that it satisfies the spectral mapping theorem for (non-constant) polynomials, i.e. crt(p(x)) = p{crt{x) for all x in the algebra in question. Here we assume p{%) = 0, since for some elements this spectrum can be empty.
F-Algebras: Some Results and Open Problems
325
Clearly, the Proposition 16 fails for the algebraic spectrum, even if A is a normed algebra. References 1. M. Akkar, C. Nacir, Continuity automatique dans les limites inductives localement convexes de Q-algebres de Frechet, Ann. Sci. Math. Quebec 19 (1995) 115-130. 2. R. Arens, The space L" and convex topological rings, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 52 (1946) 931-935. 3. R. Arens, Linear topological division algebras, ibidem 53 (1947) 623-630. 4. R. Arens, A generalization of normed rings, Pacific J. Math. 2 (1952) 455-471. 5. R. Arens, Dense inverse limit rings, Michigan Math. J. 5 (1958) 160-182. 6. A. Atzmon, An operator without invariant subspaces on a nuclear Frechet space, Ann. of Math. 117 (2) (1983) 660-694. 7. S. Banach, Teoria Operacyj, torn 1. Operacje liniowe. (In Polish) Warszawa 1931. 8. S. Banach, Theorie des operations lineaires. Warszawa, 1932. 9. S. Banach, Kurs Funkcionalnogo Analizu (Liniini Operacii). (In Ukrainian) Kiev 1948. 10. S. Banach, Remarques sur les corps et groupes metriques, Studia Math. 10 (1948), 178-181. 11. G. Carboni and A. Larotonda, An example of a Frechet algebra which is a principal ideal domain, ibidem 138 (2000) 265-275. 12. R. Choukri and A. El Kinani, Topological algebras with ascending and descending chain conditions, Arch. Math. 72 (1999) 438-443. 13. H. G. Dales, Banach Algebras and Automatic Continuity, London Math. Soc. Monographs 24, Oxford Univ. Press, 2000. 14. P. G. Dixon and J. Esterle, Michael's problem and the Poincare-FatouBieberbach phenomenon, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 15 (1986) 127-187. 15. H. Grauert, R. Remmert, Analytische Stellenalgebren. Springerl971. 16. T. Husain, Multiplicative Functionals on Topological Algebras. Pitmann Books Ltd., London 1983. 17. A. Kokk and W. Zelazko, On vector spaces and algebras with maximal locally pseudoconvex topologies, Studia Math. 112 (1995) 195-201. 18. S. Mazur, W. Orlicz, Sur les espaces metriques lineaires I, Studia Math. 10 (1948) 184-205. 19. S. Mazur, W. Orlicz, Sur les espaces metriques lineaires II, ibidem 13 (1953), 137-179. 20. A. Mallios, Topological Algebras. Selected Topics. North-Holland, Amsterdam 1986. 21. E. Michael, Locally multiplicatively convex topological algebras, Mem. Amer. Math. Soc. 11 (1952). 22. S. Rolewicz, Metric Linear Spaces. PWN, Warszawa 1984.
326
Wieslaw Zelazko
23. A. M. Sinclair and A. W. Tullo, Noetherian Banach algebras are finite dimensional, Math. Annalen 211 (1974) 151-153. 24. P. Turpin, L Waelbroeck, Algebres localement pseudo-convexex a inverse continu, C. R. Acad. Sc. Pans 267 (1968) 194-195. 25. L. Waelbroeck, Topological Vector Spaces and Algebras, Lecture Notes in Math. 230 Springer 1971. 26. J. H. Williamson, On topologizing the field C(t), Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 5 (1954) 729-734. 27. W. Zelazko, On the locally bounded and m-convex topological algebras, Studia Math. 19 (1960). 28. W. Zelazko, A theorem on 5o-division algebras, Bull. Polon. Acad. Sc. 8 (1960) 373-375. 29. W. Zelazko, Metric generalizations of Banach algebras. Rozprawy Mat. (Dissertationes Math.) 47 1965. 30. W. Zelazko, Selected Topics in Topological Alghebras, Aarhus Univ. Lecture Notes 31 1971. 31. W. Zelazko, On maximal ideals in commutative m-convex algebras, Studia Math. 58 (1976) 291-298. 32. W. Zelazko, Functional continuity of commutative m-convex £?o-algebras with countable maximal ideal spaces, Coll. Math. 51 (1987) 395 399. 33. W. Zelazko, On certain open problems in topological algebras, Rend. Sem. Mat. Fis. Milano 59 (1989) 49-58. 34. W. Zelazko, A subfield of a complex Banach algebra is not necessarily topologically isomorphic to a subfield of C, Coll. Math. 63 (1992) 135-137. 35. W. Zelazko, Concerning entire functions in jBo-algebras, Studia Math. 110 (1994) 283-290. 36. W. Zelazko, A semitopological algebra without proper closed subalgebras, Coll. Math. 74 (1997) 239-242. 37. W. Zelazko, A characterization of commutative Frechet algebras with all ideals closed, Studia Math. 138 (2000) 293-300. 38. W. Zelazko, On m-convexity of commutative real Waelbroeck algebras, Comm. Math. 40 (2000) 235-240. 39. W. Zelazko, Some problems concerning Q-algebras, Proc. ictaa 2000 (in print).
